19.11.2013 Views

A THEOLOGICAL JOURNAL XLIV 2002 Published by the Protestant ...

A THEOLOGICAL JOURNAL XLIV 2002 Published by the Protestant ...

A THEOLOGICAL JOURNAL XLIV 2002 Published by the Protestant ...

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

A <strong>THEOLOGICAL</strong> <strong>JOURNAL</strong><br />

Eine gemeinsame Hoffnung von Juden<br />

und Christen?<br />

The Formation of Rabbinic Judaism:<br />

From <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís Philosophy to <strong>the</strong><br />

Talmudsí Religion<br />

Eine j¸disch-deutsche Handschrift des<br />

Buchdruckers und Konvertiten Johannes<br />

Helicz, Breslau 1537<br />

The Crisis of <strong>the</strong> Union of Czech<br />

Brethren in <strong>the</strong> Years Prior to <strong>the</strong> Thirty<br />

Years War or On <strong>the</strong> Usefulness<br />

of Persecution<br />

Access to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls ñ V<br />

1<br />

<strong>XLIV</strong> <strong>2002</strong><br />

<strong>Published</strong><br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Theological Faculty<br />

of Charles University Prague<br />

137


A <strong>THEOLOGICAL</strong> <strong>JOURNAL</strong><br />

Eine gemeinsame Hoffnung von Juden<br />

und Christen?<br />

The Formation of Rabbinic Judaism:<br />

From <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís Philosophy to <strong>the</strong><br />

Talmudsí Religion<br />

Eine j¸disch-deutsche Handschrift des<br />

Buchdruckers und Konvertiten Johannes<br />

Helicz, Breslau 1537<br />

The Crisis of <strong>the</strong> Union of Czech<br />

Brethren in <strong>the</strong> Years Prior to <strong>the</strong> Thirty<br />

Years War or On <strong>the</strong> Usefulness of<br />

Persecution<br />

Access to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls ñ V<br />

1<br />

<strong>XLIV</strong> <strong>2002</strong><br />

<strong>Published</strong><br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Theological Faculty<br />

of Charles University Prague<br />

142


CONTENTS (<strong>XLIV</strong>, <strong>2002</strong>) Nr. 1<br />

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PETR SL¡MA<br />

Aufzeichnungen aus den bˆhmischen Dˆrfern<br />

5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GERHARD SAUTER<br />

Eine gemeinsame Hoffnung von Juden und Christen?<br />

19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JACOB NEUSNER<br />

The Formation of Rabbinic Judaism: From <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís<br />

Philosophy to <strong>the</strong> Talmudsí Religion<br />

44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MARTIN ROTHKEGEL<br />

Eine j¸disch-deutsche Handschrift des Buchdruckers und<br />

Konvertiten Johannes Helicz, Breslau 1537<br />

51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

The Crisis of <strong>the</strong> Union of Czech Brethren in <strong>the</strong> Years Prior<br />

to <strong>the</strong> Thirty Years War or On <strong>the</strong> Usefulness of Persecution<br />

69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

Access to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls ñ V<br />

Book Review<br />

126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAVEL HOäEK<br />

The Trinity and <strong>the</strong> Interfaith<br />

S. Mark Heim, The Depth of <strong>the</strong> Riches: A Trinitarian Theology<br />

of Religious Ends<br />

132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILIP »APEK<br />

The Old Testament as Inspiration in Culture<br />

138


a <strong>the</strong>ological journal<br />

<strong>Published</strong> <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Theological Faculty of Charles University,<br />

»ern· 9, 115 55 Praha 1, Czech Republic.<br />

Associate editors: Ivana Noble, Tom·ö HanËil and Petr Sl·ma<br />

Typography: Petr Kadlec<br />

Printed <strong>by</strong> Arch, Brno<br />

Administration: Barbara Kolafov· (cv-adm@etf.cuni.cz)<br />

Annual subscription (for three issues) : 28 € or <strong>the</strong> equivalent<br />

in Europe, 25 USD for overseas. Single copy: 10 € or 9 USD.<br />

Please make <strong>the</strong> payment to our account to:<br />

»esk· spo¯itelna / VodiËkova 9 / 110 00 Praha 1 / Czech Republic<br />

account # 3062 457-018/ 0800.<br />

Orders, subscriptions and all business correspondence<br />

should be adressed to:<br />

Communio viatorum<br />

»ern· 9<br />

P. O. Box 529<br />

CZ-115 55 Praha 1<br />

Czech Republic<br />

Phone: + + 420 2 21988 205<br />

Fax: + + 420 2 21988 215<br />

E- mail: cv@etf.cuni.cz<br />

URL: http://www.etf.cuni.cz/cv.html<br />

(ISSN 0010-3713)<br />

I»O vydavatele (ETF UK, »ern· 9, 115 55 Praha 1) 00216208. EvidenËnÌ ËÌslo MK »R 6374.<br />

139


EDITORIAL<br />

Aufzeichnungen aus den bˆhmischen Dˆrfern<br />

Der blutige Fr¸hling <strong>2002</strong> im Heiligen Land†ñ kein nur frommes<br />

Wort, sondern die wahrscheinlich politisch korrekteste Bezeichnung<br />

des Territoriums, in dem sich die chronischen Auseinandersetzungen<br />

zwischen Israelis und Pal‰stinensern mit derzeit erneuter Heftigkeit<br />

abspielen, hat die Frage nach den Perspektiven des vor fast zehn<br />

Jahren begonnenen Friedensprozesses in Israel / Pal‰stina wieder laut<br />

werden lassen. Die Gewalt ist zu tragischen Dimensionen eskaliert.<br />

Will man die Ursachen dieses Konfliktes diskutieren, muss man sich<br />

jeweils mit der Perspektive beider Seiten auseinandersetzen. Das sich<br />

daraus entwickelnde Bild wird infolgedessen immer ein ambivalentes<br />

sein m¸ssen. Die Folgen der neuen Welle der Gewalt lassen sich heute<br />

noch kaum absch‰tzen. Gerade diese Komplexit‰t verbietet es aber,<br />

simple Konfliktlˆsungen zu finden. Als bestes Beispiel einer schlechten<br />

Lˆsung seien hier die ÑRezepteì des Ministerpr‰sidenten Miloö<br />

Zeman erw‰hnt, die er w‰hrend seines Besuches in Israel im Februar<br />

<strong>2002</strong> zum Besten gab, indem er Arafat mit Hitler verglich und die<br />

Aussiedlung der Pal‰stinenser bef¸rwortete.<br />

Wir kˆnnen die Augen vor dem israelisch-pal‰stinensischen Konflikt<br />

nicht verschlieflen. Zum einen, weil es um menschliches Leid<br />

geht, das uns angeht, genauso wie etwa das Leid der Nordkoreaner,<br />

der Tschetschenen oder Somalier, das uns zu konkreten Formen unserer<br />

Hilfe auffordert. Dar¸ber hinaus birgt die Situation in Israel/<br />

Pal‰stina f¸r europ‰ische Christen und Christinnen eine doppelte<br />

Relevanz: Die Entstehung des modernen Staates Israel steht, neben<br />

allen innerj¸dischen wie auch allgemein abendl‰ndischen Peripetien,<br />

in direktem Zusammenhang mit der Tragˆdie des Vˆlkermordes,<br />

an dem sich viele Europ‰er unter dem nationalsozialistischen<br />

Regime in Deutschland beteiligt haben. Aber mehr noch: Die Geschichte<br />

des auserw‰hlten Volkes und des verlobten Landes, wie sie<br />

im Alten Testament geschildert wird, bestimmt die Landschaft unseres<br />

Glaubens. Die Juden, die mit dem biblischen Volk in einem direkten<br />

Kontinuum stehen, die aber unsere Trennung der Konfessionalit‰t<br />

und Nationalit‰t nie vˆllig akzeptieren konnten und die<br />

selbst†ñ zitiert nach der Unabh‰ngigkeitserkl‰rung des ersten israe-<br />

1


EDITORIAL<br />

lischen Ministerpr‰sidenten David Ben Gurion†ñ den Aufbau eines<br />

israelischen Staates Ñim Lichte der Weissagungen der Prophetenì<br />

sehen, gehˆren in den Horizont unseres Glaubens. Umso vorsichtiger<br />

m¸ssen wir mit Formulierungen bez¸glich der heutigen Lage in<br />

Israel/Pal‰stina sein.<br />

Zur Relevanz des heutigen Judentums haben sich die in der<br />

Leuenberger Gemeinschaft verbundenen reformatorischen Kirchen,<br />

darunter auch die Ev. Kirche der Bˆhmischen Br¸der, bekannt, indem<br />

sie sich im Juni 2001 in Belfast das Lehrgespr‰chsergebnis der<br />

beauftragten Gruppe ÑKirche und Israelì zu eigen gemacht haben.<br />

In diesem Dokument heiflt es:<br />

ÑAus der Perspektive des christlichen Glaubens gilt, dass der<br />

bleibende Platz, der Israel zukommt, aus dem gˆttlichen Erw‰hlungshandeln<br />

resultiert. Israel selber definiert sich auch<br />

als Zusammenhang eines Volkslebens. Christen wissen, dass<br />

die Gemeinschaft des Volkes Israel durch ein Erw‰hlungshandeln<br />

Gottes begr¸ndet ist, welches sich auf einen Lebenszusammenhang<br />

bezieht, der sowohl sozial wie religiˆs bestimmt<br />

ist.ì (II 3.1.1.)<br />

Inwieweit sich daraus allerdings eine religiˆse Relevanz des Staates<br />

Israel ableiten l‰sst und was unter dieser Relevanz genau zu verstehen<br />

ist, bleibt unbeantwortet. Der israelische Historiker Mosche<br />

Zimmermann beobachtet die wachsende Rolle religiˆser Motive und<br />

Argumentationen in der heutigen israelischen Gesellschaft mit grofler<br />

Besorgnis, denn die Expansion der Religion sei, so Zimmermann,<br />

die Ursache der heutigen Unruhen. Zimmermann verbirgt nicht, dass<br />

seine Zuneigung dem Ñalten guten linkenì†ñ und aufgrund der Rereligionisation<br />

des Judentums schnell verschwundenen†ñ s‰kularen<br />

Zionismus gehˆrt. Jacob Neusner, der amerikanische j¸dische Theologe<br />

und Forscher im Bereich des rabbinischen†ñ oder wie er es nennt,<br />

des Ñformativenì Judentums, weist wiederum das nationale Element<br />

im Judentum zur¸ck, wenn er in einer in der Zeitschrift Commentary<br />

verˆffentlichten Diskussion einen Artikel mit dem charakteristischen<br />

Titel schreibt: ÑWhy Iím Not an Ethnic Jew†ñ Why Iím a†Religious<br />

Jewì. Hier jedoch, im Communio Viatorum, bringt Neusner seine<br />

2


EDITORIAL<br />

These vor, in der er die im 3. Jh. verfertigte Mischna als ein utopisch-philosophisches<br />

Dokument bezeichnet, das sich mit dem Fall<br />

des Jerusalemer Tempels auseinandersetzt†ñ im Unterschied zu dem<br />

im 5. Jh. entstandenen Jerusalemer Talmud, der auf Grund der Erfahrung<br />

mit dem Aufstieg des Christentums seine eigene Version des<br />

Heils, also eine Religion, vorlegt. Symbolisiert die Frage nach der<br />

Gestalt des Heils die Trennung zwischen Synagoge und Kirche, dann<br />

ist im Gegensatz dazu das Erwarten der Erlˆsung inmitten einer<br />

unerlˆsten Welt, nach dem in Prag gehaltenen Vortrag des Bonner<br />

systematischen Theologen Gerhard Sauter, zugleich das Element, das<br />

beide ÑVˆlkerì verbindet. Am Ende seiner Vorlesung bekennt Sauter:<br />

ÑAls Versˆhner steht Jesus zwischen Christen und Juden†ñ aber nicht,<br />

um sie voneinander zu trennen.ì<br />

Was ergibt sich daraus f¸r den christlichen Auftrag, der am Ende<br />

des Matth‰usevangeliums lautet: ÑDarum gehet hin und machet zu<br />

J¸ngern alle Vˆlker?ì Diese Frage ist vielerorts in Kirchengemeinden<br />

Tschechiens diskutiert worden. Im Synodalbeschluss der<br />

Ev. Kirche der Bˆhmischen Br¸der zur Beziehung zwischen Christen<br />

und Juden vom Mai <strong>2002</strong> heiflt es:<br />

Paulus bezeichnet den Weg Gottes mit Israel als ein Geheimnis,<br />

durch das die ÑF¸lle der Heiden zum Heilì gelingen kann.<br />

Eben dann, wenn die Juden in ihrer Beziehung zu Gott die<br />

christliche Auffassung Christi ablehnen, sehen wir in dieser<br />

Ablehnung einen Ausdruck dieses Geheimnisses, das f¸r uns<br />

schwierig und beunruhigend ist. Zugleich aber sehen wir in<br />

dieser Haltung eine Treue mit dem Bund, den Gott mit Israel<br />

geschlossen hat. Mission gehˆrt zum Wesen der Kirche. Die<br />

Kirche ist durch eine erweiterte Einladung zum Erwarten des<br />

Gottesreiches entstanden und als solche soll diese Einladung<br />

Ñallen Vˆlkernì vermittelt werden. Ganz deutlich ist diese Aufgabe<br />

in der s‰kularisierten tschechischen Gesellschaft zu erkennen†ñ<br />

und ebenso deutlich auch, wie wenig wir dieser Aufgabe<br />

gerecht werden. Als Christen bleiben wir jedoch immer<br />

diejenigen, die selbst in den ÷lbaum Israels eingepfropft worden<br />

sind. Darum meinen wir, dass die Kirche der Synagoge<br />

gegen¸ber in einer br¸derlichen Beziehung steht.<br />

3


EDITORIAL<br />

Sicherlich gab es zwischen Christentum und Judentum immer<br />

‹bertritte und zwar in beide Richtungen†ñ und nicht selten mit betr‰chtlichen<br />

Folgen. In seiner Studie erforscht Martin Rothkegel die<br />

Umst‰nde und Folgen der in den 30er Jahren des 16. Jh. vollzogenen<br />

Konversion der Krakauer j¸dischen Druckerfamilie Helicz. Im Zusammenhang<br />

mit der von der Br¸derunit‰t geleisteten tschechischen<br />

Kralitzer Bibel¸bersetzung wird ein Nachkomme dieser Familie<br />

Lucas Helicz, erw‰hnt. Jind¯ich Halama Jr. beobachtet die Wege der<br />

Br¸derunit‰t zu Beginn des 17. Jh. Er zeigt den Zusammenhang auf<br />

zwischen dem Verlust des Ñprophetischen Grundtonsì innerhalb der<br />

Unit‰t, der das hussitische Erbe charakterisierte, und dem allm‰hlichen<br />

Prozess eines Ñsich der Welt ÷ffnensì, das zur Anpassung an<br />

die politischen Gegebenheiten f¸hren muflte. ÑVon Qumran nach<br />

Kunvaldì, so deutete vor mehr als dreiflig Jahren Stanislav Segert<br />

eine gewisse Gedankenverwandtschaft an, die zwischen j¸dischen<br />

Essenern und der urspr¸nglichen bˆhmischen Br¸derunit‰t zweifelsohne<br />

besteht. In diesem Heft legt Segert einen weiteren Teil seiner<br />

umfangreichen rezensierenden Reihe der essenischen Biblio<strong>the</strong>k vor.<br />

Petr Sl·ma<br />

4


EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN<br />

UND CHRISTEN?<br />

Gerhard Sauter, Bonn<br />

Was f¸r eine Frage!<br />

Sind Juden und Christen durch eine gemeinsame Hoffnung miteinander<br />

verbunden ñ vielleicht eher als durch einen gemeinsamen Glauben?<br />

Diese Frage wird heute oft spontan mit ÑJaì beantwortet. Das<br />

scheint auch nahezuliegen, wenn man traditionsgeschichtlich denkt:<br />

Die fr¸hen Schriften des Christentums berufen sich h‰ufig auf Erwartungen<br />

aus prophetischen und apokalyptischen Texten und halten<br />

viele dieser Erwartungen aufrecht, andere Erwartungen sehen sie hingegen<br />

als ¸berholt an, denn sie seien durch die Christusgeschichte<br />

Ñerf¸lltì: ein hˆchst interpretationsbed¸rftiges Wort! 1 Jesus Christus,<br />

der von Gott Gekommene, wird als Ñder Kommendeì 2 erwartet, als<br />

der Weltenrichter am J¸ngsten Tage ñ doch darin stimmen Juden und<br />

Christen gerade nicht ¸berein. Also doch keine gemeinsame Hoffnung<br />

von Juden und Christen? Oder vielleicht eine aufgespaltene<br />

Hoffnung, von der ein Teil, etwa die Erwartung des Weltendes, Juden<br />

und Christen gemeinsam w‰re, w‰hrend Christus trennend zwischen<br />

Juden und Christen st¸nde? Dies g‰lte zumindest bis zum Ende der<br />

Welt, und das w‰re dann lange genug! Christen hoffen darauf, dafl<br />

Jesus Christus wiederkommt und vollendet, wozu er einst gekommen<br />

ist ñ f¸r Juden dagegen stehen Erlˆser und Erlˆsung noch aus.<br />

Ungef‰hr so lautet die Gegen¸berstellung, wie sie die wechselseitige<br />

Wahrnehmung von Judentum und Christentum lange Zeit bestimmt<br />

hat. Es ist eine etwas subtilere Sicht, als wir sie aus manchen<br />

bildlichen Darstellungen vor allem aus dem Mittelalter und der fr¸-<br />

1 Berechtigte Einw‰nde nennt Gerhard Safl, Leben aus den Verheiflungen<br />

(FRLANT 164), Gˆttingen 1995, 261 f.<br />

2 Zu diesem Pr‰dikat s. Gerhard Sauter, Einf¸hrung in die Eschatologie, Darmstadt<br />

1995, 45ñ54.<br />

5


GERHARD SAUTER<br />

hen Neuzeit kennen. Hatten die Juden die Sorge vor einem falschen<br />

Messias 3 parat, um fremde Hoffnungsvorstellungen zu personalisieren,<br />

zu demaskieren und damit auszuschlieflen, so wurde auf christlicher<br />

Seite der Antichrist oft mit j¸dischen Z¸gen versehen 4 . Soweit<br />

ich sehe, sind es Christen h‰ufiger als Juden gewesen, die die andere<br />

Seite als einen Gegenpol betrachteten und den Kontrast schilderten,<br />

um dadurch die eigene Position abzugrenzen und auch sch‰rfer zu<br />

zeichnen. Diese polemische Darstellung konnte zus‰tzlich durch die<br />

Selbstwahrnehmung diktiert werden, durch eine Selbsteinsch‰tzung,<br />

die alles, was man f¸r sich selber als eigent¸mlich und wesentlich<br />

beanspruchte, herausstellte. Auf christlicher Seite wurden schon fr¸h<br />

das ÑGeistlich/Spirituelleì im Gegensatz zum ÑFleischlich/Materiellenì<br />

5 , sp‰ter das Jenseits als ‹berbietung des Diesseits und das Individuelle<br />

im Gegen¸ber zum Sozialen hervorgehoben.<br />

1 Das Kontrastschema ÑSchon jetzt/Noch nichtì<br />

Handelt es sich bei der Zeitvorstellung und dem Geschichtsbild, das<br />

ich eingangs skizzierte, auch um ein solches Wahrnehmungsmuster?<br />

In ihm stellt sich das Verh‰ltnis von Judentum und Christentum etwa<br />

3 Eine Schl¸sselrolle spielte Sabbatai Zwi (1626ñ1676); vgl. die Darstellung seiner<br />

messianischen Krˆnung (in diesem Falle eine positive Zeichnung): Judentum in<br />

Kunst und Literatur, hg. von Sharon R. Keller, Kˆln 1995, 137.<br />

4 Beispiele: Der Antichrist und Die f¸nfzehn Zeichen vor dem J¸ngsten Gericht.<br />

Faksimile der ersten typographischen Ausgabe [Straflburg 1480]. Inkunabel der<br />

Stadt- und Universit‰tsbiblio<strong>the</strong>k Frankfurt am Main Inc. fol. 116 I/n, mit Beitr‰gen<br />

von Karin Boveland, Christoph Peter Burger und Ruth Steffen, Hamburg/Amsterdam<br />

1989.<br />

5 Der Kirchenvater Hieronymus statuiert: ÑEin weiser christlicher Leser sollte bei<br />

den prophetischen Verheiflungen dieser Regel folgen: Wir lehren, dafl das, was die<br />

Juden und die j¸disch denken bei den Unsrigen ñ vielmehr bei denen, die nicht zu<br />

uns gehˆren ñ, in fleischlicher Weise als zuk¸nftig beanspruchen, in geistlicher<br />

Weise schon eingetroffen ist, damit wir nicht angesichts derartiger Erz‰hlungen oder<br />

schier unbeantwortbarer apostolischer Fragestellungen gezwungen sind, j¸disch zu<br />

denken.ì ñ ÑPrudens et christianus lector hanc habeat repromissionum prophetalium<br />

regulam, ut quaea ludaei et nostri, immo non nostri ludaizantes, carnaliter futura<br />

contendunt, nos spiritaliter iam transacta doceamus, ne per occasionem istiusmodi<br />

fabularum et inextricabilium iuxta apostolorum quaestionum iudaizare cogamur.ì<br />

Commentarius in Esaiam IV [407/408], zu Jes ll,15ff.: CChr.SL 73, Turnhout 1963,<br />

157, 43ñ48.<br />

6


EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />

so dar: Juden sind aufs intensivste der Hoffnung verschworen, w‰hrend<br />

f¸r Christen die Hoffnung ein Ausblick ihres Glaubens ist, nicht<br />

weniger, aber auch nicht mehr. Ihr Blick ist haupts‰chlich auf die<br />

Geschichte Jesu Christi gerichtet und damit in erster Linie auf etwas,<br />

das ein f¸r allemal geschehen ist: ÑEs ist vollbracht!ì, ruft Jesus am<br />

Kreuz aus (Joh 19,30). 6<br />

Dieses Kontrastschema wurde popul‰r, und es geistert durch<br />

Selbst- und Fremdbilder in Judentum und Christentum, durch Bilder<br />

von sich selber und vom Anderen, auch durch Bilder, die differenzierter<br />

ausfallen. Mit diesem Schema mˆchte ich mich in einem ersten<br />

Durchgang auseinandersetzen.<br />

1.1 Zuteil gewordene Erlˆsung ñ ein Trennungszeichen?<br />

Drei repr‰sentative Zitaten mˆgen das Schema erl‰utern. Die ersten<br />

beiden stammen aus dem denkw¸rdigen Zwiegespr‰ch Martin Bubers<br />

mit dem Bonner Neutestamentler Karl Ludwig Schmidt im J¸dischen<br />

Lehrhaus in Stuttgart am 14. Januar 1933. Buber zeichnet sein Bild<br />

von der christlichen Kirche so:<br />

ÑDie Kirche steht auf dem Glauben an das Gekommensein Christi,<br />

als an die der Menschheit durch Gott zuteil gewordene Erlˆsung. Wir<br />

Israel vermˆgen das nicht zu glauben. [Ö] Wir sp¸ren die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it<br />

der Welt. Eben dieses unser Sp¸ren kann oder mufl die Kirche als<br />

das Bewufltsein unserer Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it verstehen. Aber wir wissen es<br />

anders.<br />

Erlˆsung der Welt ist unverbr¸chlich eins mit der Vollendung der<br />

Schˆpfung, mit der Aufrichtung einer durch nichts mehr behinderten,<br />

keinen Widerspruch mehr erleidenden, in all der Vielf‰ltigkeit der<br />

Welt verwirklichten Einheit, eins mit dem erf¸llten Kˆnigtum Gottes.<br />

Eine Vorwegnahme der vollzogenen Welterlˆsung zu irgend einem<br />

6 Karl Barth versteht das Eschaton und damit ÑErlˆsungì und ÑHoffnungì von<br />

Joh 19,30 her, so in einem Brief an Helmut Gollwitzer vom 7. November 1967:<br />

Karl Barth, Briefe 1961ñ1968, hg. von J¸rgen Fangmeier und Hinrich Stoevesandt,<br />

Z¸rich 1975, 445. In seiner ÑKirchlichen Dogmatikì hebt Barth hervor, dafl die<br />

Versˆhnung Gottes Ñein f¸r allemalì (Rom 6,10; Hebr 7,27; 9,12) f¸r alle Menschen<br />

aller Zeiten geschehen sei. Vgl. Gotthard Oblau, Gotteszeit und Menschenzeit.<br />

Eschatologie in der Kirchlichen Dogmatik von Karl Barth (NBST 6), Neukirchen-<br />

Vluyn 1988, bes. 178ñ195, Zitat: 178.<br />

7


GERHARD SAUTER<br />

Teil, etwa ein Schonerlˆstsein der Seele, vermˆgen wir nicht zu fassen,<br />

wiewohl sich auch uns, in unsern sterblichen Stunden Erlˆsen<br />

und Erlˆstwerden kundtut. Eine Z‰sur nehmen wir in der Geschichte<br />

nicht wahr. Wir kennen [in] ihr keine Mitte, sondern nur ein Ziel, das<br />

Ziel des Weges Gottes, der nicht inneh‰lt auf seinem Weg.ì 7<br />

Buber r¸ckt diese Unterscheidung in den Mittelpunkt, obwohl dies<br />

mit den Kennworten Thema des Dialogs ÑKirche, Staat, Volk, Judentumì<br />

so nicht vorgesehen war.<br />

Schmidt antwortete: Auch wir Christen sehen Ñwie die Juden auf<br />

das Ende. Aber wir wagen das nur auf Grund der Tatsache, dafl Gott<br />

in Jesus Christus das Ende schon heraufgefuhrt hat. Von der Ankunft<br />

Jesu Christi am Ende der Tage sprechen wir nur als von einer zweiten<br />

Ankunft, seiner Wiederkunft.ì 8<br />

Leider beschr‰nkt Schmidt sich hier auf ein Geschichtsbild: Jesus<br />

Christus als Ende oder Wende der Geschichte; dies ist eine Redeweise,<br />

die in neuzeitlicher christlicher Theologie gel‰ufig geworden ist. 9<br />

Hier tritt die Erwartung Jesu Christi als des ÑKommendenì merkw¸rdig<br />

zur¸ck. Ist diese Hoffnung in Kirche und Theologie ¸berhaupt<br />

noch lebendig?<br />

Unvergefllich bleibt mir ein Gespr‰ch mit dem Philosophen Ernst<br />

Bloch, der mich 1963 fragte, warum j¸ngere Theologen (er erw‰hnte<br />

J¸rgen Moltmann und Wolfhart Pannenberg) sich so sehr mit der<br />

Auferstehung Jesu besch‰ftigten und sich darum k¸mmerten, wie das<br />

7 Kirche, Staat, Volk, Judentum: Karl Ludwig Schmidt, Neues Testament ñ Judentum-Kirche.<br />

Kleine Schriften, hg. von Gerhard Sauter (TB 69), M¸nchen 1981,<br />

149ñ165, Zitate: 158f.<br />

8 A.a.O. 164.<br />

9 Zum Beispiel: Rudolf Bultmann, Geschichte und Eschatologie, T¸bingen 1958,<br />

49: ÑÖdie Geschichte hat ihr Ende erreicht, weil Christus das Ende des Gesetzes ist<br />

(Rom 10,4).ì ñ Friedrich Gogarten, Jesus Christus Wende der Welt. Grundfragen zur<br />

Christologie, T¸bingen 1966.<br />

Die Auffassung, Jesus Christus sei das Ende der Geschichte, bezieht sich dagegen<br />

in der Heilsgeschichtlichen Theologie des 19. Jahrhunderts (J. C. K. von Hofmann,<br />

C.E. Luthardt, J.T. Beck, C. A. Auberlen u. a.) grunds‰tzlich auf die erwartete Parusie<br />

Christi; faktisch herrscht allerdings auch dort die Anschauung vor, die gesamte<br />

Zeitspanne seit dem Kommen Christi in die Welt und vor seiner Wiederkunft sei als<br />

ÑZeit der Kircheì die Endzeit. Mit diesem Zeit- und Geschichtsverst‰ndnis wenden<br />

sich eine Generation sp‰ter namhafte Dogmatiker verschiedener <strong>the</strong>ologischer Richtungen<br />

(z. B. I. A. Dorner, J. Kaftan) ausdr¸cklich gegen das (alttestamentliche)<br />

Judentum.<br />

8


EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />

Ostergeschehen wirkungsgeschichtlich nachgewiesen werden kˆnne.<br />

Zu seiner Studienzeit h‰tten die f¸hrenden Theologen (Bloch dachte<br />

vor allem an Adolf von Harnack und Ernst Troeltsch) viel eher die<br />

Frage nach dem historischen Jesus im Visier gehabt. Beides aber, so<br />

fuhr Bloch fort, ¸berzeuge ihn ¸berhaupt nicht. Viel entscheidender<br />

sei doch, ob Jesus von Nazareth als der Kommende erwartet w¸rde<br />

und wie sich diese Hoffnung zeige.<br />

Seit zwei, drei Jahrzehnten hat sich in dieser Hinsicht manches<br />

ver‰ndert, allerdings nicht f¸r die Erwartung Jesu Christi, aber in<br />

einer Ann‰herung von Christologie und Messianismus, der Hoffnung<br />

auf eine k¸nftige Erlˆsung. 10 Dem Kreuzesruf Jesu entgegen heiflt es<br />

auf dem Kreuzweg von Menschen: ÑEs ist noch nicht vollbracht.ì 11<br />

Darauf m¸ssen wir zur¸ckkommen.<br />

Lassen wir uns von Martin Buber daran erinnern, dafl sich an dem<br />

Kennwort ÑErlˆsungì Juden und Christen scheiden, und zwar nicht<br />

nur in ihrer Sicht der Geschichte, sondern in ihrer Hoffnung auf die<br />

Vollendung der Schˆpfung. 12<br />

1.2 Eine Rekonstruktion der Ñmessianischen Idee im Judentumì<br />

Ein Vierteljahrhundert sp‰ter r¸ckt der j¸dische Religionssoziologe<br />

Gershom Scholem das Verst‰ndnis von ÑErlˆsungì als Trennungselement<br />

in den Vordergrund:<br />

ÑDas Judentum hat, in allen seinen Formen und Gestaltungen, stets<br />

an einem Begriff von Erlˆsung festgehalten, der sie als einen Vorgang<br />

auffaflte, welcher sich in der ÷ffentlichkeit vollzieht, auf dem Schauplatz<br />

der Geschichte und im Medium der Gemeinschaft, kurz, der<br />

sich entscheidend in der Welt des Sichtbaren vollzieht und ohne solche<br />

Erscheinung im Sichtbaren nicht gedacht werden kann. Demgegen¸ber<br />

steht im Christentum eine Auffassung, welche die Erlˆsung<br />

10 Bei J¸rgen Moltmann, Der Weg Jesu Christi. Christologie in messianischen<br />

Dimensionen, M¸nchen 1989, fehlt jeder Hinweis auf Joh 19,30. ñ Moltmann mˆchte<br />

von der ÑWiedergeburt des messianischen Denkens im Judentumì ausgehen:<br />

Ders., Das Kommen Gottes. Christliche Eschatologie, G¸tersloh 1995,47ñ64.<br />

11 Zum Beispiel: Es ist noch nicht vollbracht. Werkbuch zum Jugendkreuzweg, hg.<br />

von Peter Bleeser, Uwe Seidel und Hans-Georg Ziebertz, D¸sseldorf 1987.<br />

12 Kirche, Staat, Volk, Judentum: a.a.O. 158.<br />

9


GERHARD SAUTER<br />

als einen Vorgang im geistigen 13 Bereich und im Unsichtbaren ergreift,<br />

der sich in der Seele, in der Welt jedes einzelnen, abspielt, und<br />

der eine geheime Verwandlung bewirkt, der nichts ƒufleres in der<br />

Welt entsprechen mufl.ì 14<br />

Dies d¸rfte ein typisches Beispiel f¸r Selbstbild und Bild des Fremden<br />

sein, das eine als Gegenbild des Anderen. Auf welche Ph‰nomene<br />

bezieht sich dieses Bild des Anderen? Inwiefern wird aus der<br />

Selbstwahrnehmung das, was in ihr verneint und aus ihr ausgegrenzt<br />

werden soll, auf den Anderen projiziert? Oder umgekehrt: Was am<br />

Anderen gesehen wird, kann derart anziehend erscheinen, dafl es zu<br />

einer neuen Selbstbestimmung herangezogen wird. So wird heute die<br />

messianische Auffassung der ÑErlˆsung auf dem Schauplatz der Geschichte<br />

und im Medium der Gemeinschaftì von vielen Theologen<br />

und Theologinnen im christlich-j¸dischen Gespr‰ch der eigenen<br />

Eschatologie einverleibt, um sich auf eine gemeinsame Basis zu st¸tzen.<br />

Zugleich soll dies von dem Vorwurf befreien, gegen die Hoffnung<br />

auf Welterlˆsung geglaubt und dadurch der Unterdr¸ckung und<br />

sogar der Vernichtung von Juden Vorschub geleistet zu haben.<br />

Scholem sieht den wesenhaften Unterschied zwischen Juden und<br />

Christen im Verh‰ltnis von Individuum und Gemeinschaft. Der Christ<br />

brauche sich letztlich um nichts mehr zu k¸mmern, was in der sozialen<br />

Welt vor sich geht, jedenfalls betreffe dies nichts, was seine Erlˆsung<br />

angeht ñ die j¸dische Erwartung kenne dagegen keine individuelle<br />

Rettung bei Fortbestand einer verkehrten Welt, und das bedeutet:<br />

solange das j¸dische Volk noch leiden mufl, noch kein endg¸ltiges<br />

Heimatrecht gefunden hat, noch immer nicht sein soziales Leben<br />

ungestˆrt, allein von Gott her ordnen kann. Das Schema lautet jetzt:<br />

÷ffentlich-Volk-Sichtbar versus Geistig(geistlich)-Individuum (Seele)-Unsichtbar.<br />

Zwischen den ersten beiden ƒuflerungen aus dem Zwiegespr‰ch<br />

zwischen Martin Buber und Karl Ludwig Schmidt und dem Diktum<br />

13 In einem Wiederabdruck des in Anm. 14 zitierten Aufsatzes (Ders., ‹ber einige<br />

Grundbegriffe des Judentums [edition suhrkamp 414], Frankfurt a. M. 1970, 121)<br />

‰ndert Scholem Ñgeistigì in Ñgeistlichì, versteht dies allerdings als Phrase.<br />

14 Zum Verst‰ndnis der messianischen Idee im Judentum: Ders., Judaica I, Frankfurt<br />

a.M. 1963, 7ñ74, Zitat: 7f.<br />

10


EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />

Gershom Scholems sind nur 26 Jahre vergangen, doch der Tonfall hat<br />

sich entscheidend ver‰ndert. 15<br />

Sch¸lern blickt auf die Gr¸ndung des Staates Israel zur¸ck, die<br />

von vielen Juden und J¸dinnen als Erlˆsung erlebt und auch so zur<br />

Sprache gebracht wurde: Die Zeit der Zerstreuung des j¸dischen Volkes,<br />

der Diaspora, ist zu Ende. Arnold Schˆnberg hat in seiner Vertonung<br />

von PS 130 (De Profundis, op. 50b) den Schluflvers: ÑJa, er wird<br />

Israel erlˆsen von allen seinen S¸ndenì (V. 8) nicht mehr als Verheiflung<br />

verstanden (eine Verheiflung, die auch in der Ank¸ndigung der<br />

Geburt Jesu bei Mt 1,21 aufgenommen wird). Bei Schˆnberg lautet<br />

der Vers: ÑEr erlˆst Israelì, denn die Verheiflung erscheint in der<br />

Gr¸ndung des Staates Israel als erf¸llt. Erlˆsung ist geschehen und<br />

kann nun geradezu triumphal erklingen. Damit wird evident, wie ÑErlˆsungì<br />

aufgefaflt werden soll: gehˆrt mit einem Jubelton dar¸ber,<br />

dafl ein jahrhundertelanges Leben in der Hoffnung zum Ziel gekommen<br />

und damit ein neuer Anfang geschafft worden ist. Scholem deu-<br />

15 Auf weitere Differenzen zwischen Buber und Scholem kann hier nur anmerkungsweise<br />

hingewiesen werden. Vgl. dazu Klaus Samuel Davidowicz, Gershom<br />

Scholem und Martin Buber. Die Geschichte eines MiflVerst‰ndnisses (NTDH 5),<br />

Neukirchen-Vluyn 1993. Gemeinsam ist Buber und Scholem ein zionistischer Hintergrund<br />

(22ñ69) sowie ihr ausgepr‰gtes Interesse an mystischen Strˆmungen im<br />

Judentum (Kabbala) (70ñ103), mehr noch der ÑKampf gegen das Dogma eines klar<br />

definierten ÇWesensë des Judentumsì (1), also die Bem¸hung, das Judentum aus<br />

schematischen Wahrnehmungen gerade zu befreien, auch wenn sich Spuren dieser<br />

Schemata gerade noch bei Buber und Scholem selbst finden. Das illustriert nicht<br />

zuletzt, wie tief solche Schemata festsitzen und wie schwierig ihre ‹berwindung<br />

ist. Differenzen zwischen Buber und Scholem bestehen in verschiedener Hinsicht.<br />

(1.) Methodisch: W‰hrend Buber sein eigenes Denken oft mit den Stoffen der Bearbeitung<br />

verwob, schuf Scholem durch die Anwendung philologischer Methoden<br />

eine Distanz zu den Gegenst‰nden, die er untersuchte. ÑAn die Stelle des traditionellen<br />

Kommentators tritt nun der Historiker.ì (148) (2.) Zeitgeschichtlich: Scholem<br />

analysiert die gegen¸ber der Vorkriegszeit ver‰nderte zeitgeschichtliche Situation,<br />

indem er 1961 anl‰fllich des Abschlusses der Buberschen ÑBibel-Verdeutschungì<br />

dieser eine geringe Wirkung im Judentum vorhersagt: ÑDie Juden, f¸r die Sie ¸bersetzt<br />

haben, gibt es nicht mehr. Die Kinder derer, die diesem Grauen entronnen sind,<br />

werden nicht mehr Deutsch lesen.ì (Scholem, An einem denkw¸rdigen Tage, 215;<br />

zitiert nach Davidowicz, 151) Und nach dem Tod Bubers erkl‰rt Scholem 1966 die<br />

tats‰chlich fast ausgebliebene Wirkung auf das Judentum so: ÑDenn der Apostel<br />

Israels sprach eine Sprache, die allen verst‰ndlicher war als den Juden selber.ì<br />

(Scholem, Martin Bubers Auffassung, 136; zititiert nach Davidowicz, 150) (3.)<br />

Theologisch: Scholem kritisierte Bubers von Chassidismus und Existentialismus<br />

gepr‰gte Auffassung von Schˆpfung und Erlˆsung, die er mit dessen Abneigung<br />

gegen die Apokalyptik in Verbindung bringt (156f.).<br />

11


GERHARD SAUTER<br />

tet allerdings auch an, Ñdafl die aus Grauen und Untergang geborene<br />

Bereitschaft, die die j¸dische Geschichte erst in unserer Generation<br />

gefunden hatì 16 , ein gef‰hrliches Risiko auf sich nehmen muflte: Nun<br />

gilt es, nicht mehr nur in der Hoffnung zu leben, sondern den Anspruch<br />

auf das eigene Land, den eigenen Staat als realisierte Erwartung<br />

einzulˆsen.<br />

Was wird dies fortan f¸r den Charakter j¸discher Hoffnung bedeuten:<br />

mehr und anderes als das Beharren auf einem staatspolitischen<br />

Status quol Dies ist ein Problem, welches die christlichen Kirchen im<br />

Verh‰ltnis zur politischen Verfassung ihrer Umwelt immer wieder<br />

bedr‰ngt hat. Ich erinnere nur an die Idee des christlichen Staates im<br />

19. Jahrhundert 17 und an Hegels Staats- und Religionsphilosophie.<br />

Es d¸rfte kein Zufall sein, wie Hegel hier das Judentum verzeichnete:<br />

ÑDas j¸dische Volk ist es, das sich Gott als den alten Schmerz der<br />

Welt aufbewahrt hatì 18 , Hegel hielt dem Judentum vor, in einem<br />

unversˆhnten Status der Welt verblieben zu sein, indem es annahm,<br />

dafl Gott in Distanz zur Welt verharre. Dagegen verstehe sich das<br />

Christentum aus der Versˆhnung Gottes mit der Welt in Jesus Christus.<br />

Den Ñalten Schmerz der Weltì habe die Versˆhnung ein f¸r allemal<br />

¸berwunden, und dieser ¸berwundene Schmerz konnte in der<br />

christlich gepr‰gten Geistesgeschichte zum Zuge kommen. Diese<br />

Geschichte sei ein Kampf um die Erhaltung der Versˆhnung in allen<br />

Lebensbereichen. 19 Hegel leitet daraus in seiner Religions-, Rechtsund<br />

Staatsphilosophie die Aufgaben ab, die geistig, ethisch und politisch<br />

zu erf¸llen seien. In seinen Fr¸hschriften hatte Hegel als Gegenbild<br />

die j¸dische Religion als Typus eines falschen, weil unversˆhnten<br />

Bewufltseins geschildert, das auf die verkehrte Welt starrt. 20 Dies ist<br />

16 A. a. O. 74.<br />

17 Vertreten vor allem von Friedrich Julius Stahl, Philosophie des Rechts, 3 Bde.,<br />

Heidelberg 1830 ñ1837, 3 1878 = Darmstadt 1963.<br />

18 Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel, Vorlesungen ¸ber die Philosophie der Religion<br />

II: Ders., Werke, hg. von Eva Moldenhauer und Karl Markus Michel, Bd. 17, Frankfurt<br />

am Main 1969, 184.<br />

19 Weiteres dazu bei Peter Cornehl, Die Zukunft der Versˆhnung. Eschatologie und<br />

Emanzipation in der Aufkl‰rung, bei Hegel und in der Hegeischen Schule, Gˆttingen<br />

1971. ñ J¸rgen Gebhardt, Politik und Eschatologie, 1963.<br />

20 Vgl. H. J. Zeller, Religionsphilosophische Studien zur Kontinuit‰t des Problems<br />

der Negativit‰t als geschichtliche Erfahrung, philosophische Dissertation Kˆln<br />

1975.<br />

12


EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />

ein weiteres Wahrnehmungsmuster, das wir kritisch durchleuchten<br />

m¸ssen. Es hat dazu beigetragen, das Judentum zur Vorstufe zum<br />

Christentum herabzusetzen.<br />

Was ist sei<strong>the</strong>r geschehen! Das christliche Selbstbewufltsein, wie<br />

es sich bei Hegel und Gleichgesinnten aussprach, ist weithin einer<br />

Resignation oder zumindest der Skepsis gewichen. Was im letzten<br />

Jahrhundert Juden angetan wurde, himmelschreiend in Auschwitz<br />

und an anderen Orten, erscheint als un¸berhˆrbarer Widerspruch gegen<br />

eine bereits geschehene Versˆhnung, und Christen haben diesen<br />

Widerspruch zumindest nicht verhindert, wenn sie ihn nicht gar befˆrderten.<br />

Die Fronten erscheinen nun vertauscht: Das Judentum blickt auf<br />

eine Wende zur¸ck, auf das Ende einer unheilvollen Epoche seiner<br />

Volksgeschichte. Nunmehr kann ÑIsraelì zum eschato-logischen<br />

Licht f¸r die Vˆlker werden, weil sein Staatswesen die Erfahrungen<br />

vieler, vieler leidgepr¸fter Generationen in Solidarit‰t, Toleranz und<br />

kulturelle Vielfalt umzupr‰gen vermag. Der Christenheit wird vorgehalten,<br />

ein politisches mangelhaftes oder zumindest wirkungsloses<br />

Erlˆsungsverst‰ndnis zu pflegen, sich womˆglich in eine Innerlichkeit<br />

zu verkriechen, die sich mit Hafl auf alles Andersartige verb¸nden<br />

kann oder die Ausgrenzung Anderer in mitschuldigem Verschweigen<br />

hinnimmt. Der Anspruch, bereits erlˆst zu sein, habe sich mit<br />

dem geschichtlichen Versagen des Christentums von selber erledigt.<br />

Darauf haben viele Christinnen und Christen mit wachsender<br />

Empfindlichkeit f¸r die Schw‰chen einer verinnerlichten Erlˆsung<br />

reagiert. Die Einsicht in eigene Mitschuld an menschheitsgeschichtlichen<br />

Katastrophen lˆste ein Umdenken aus, das weiteres Fehlverhalten<br />

vermeiden sollte. Beispielsweise trat Helmut Gollwitzer unerm¸dlich<br />

daf¸r ein, die vielberufene und vielgescholtene Ñchristliche<br />

Innerlichkeitì zugunsten der t‰tigen Hoffnung auf Welterlˆsung abzusch¸tteln.<br />

Und weil er diese Umorientierung auf dem Vormarsch in<br />

evangelischer Kirche und Theologie sah, nannte er Scholems Zeichnung<br />

christlicher Theologie ein Zerrbild, das jedenfalls heute nicht<br />

mehr zutreffe. Scholem erwidert ihm, das Schon-Erlˆstsein der Seele<br />

sei jahrhundertelang den Juden von Christen als Trennungszeichen<br />

vorgehalten worden. Diese Auffassung habe nachweislich christliches<br />

Denken gepr‰gt, zumal das anmaflende Verhalten gegen¸ber Ju-<br />

13


GERHARD SAUTER<br />

den, wie es gerade auch in der Theologie verbreitet gewesen sei.<br />

Wenn christliche Theologen dies nun nicht mehr so sehen wollten<br />

und sogar die j¸dische Auffassung von Erlˆsung ¸bern‰hmen, sei<br />

dies ñ so fahrt Scholem fort ñ zwar schˆn und gut. Seien sich christliche<br />

Theologen aber ¸ber die Konsequenzen wirklich im klaren? Die<br />

ÑFormeln und Sentenzen, mit denen man den Juden so lange auf den<br />

Leib ger¸ckt istì, w¸rden Ñan ihrer eigenen Dialektik zerplatzenì 21 . ñ<br />

Wie dies zu verstehen ist, f¸hrt Scholem nicht weiter aus. Aus seiner<br />

Bewertung l‰flt sich schlieflen, dafl die Selbstbehauptung einer Ñwesentlich<br />

innerlichen Çgeistlichenë Natur der Erlˆsungì 22 an der historischen<br />

Realit‰t scheitert. Auch eine dialektische Theologie, die jeden<br />

Stolz auf menschliches Erlˆstsein radikal ablehnt, werde unter<br />

ihren eigenen Widerspr¸chen zusammenbrechen, weil sie der Erlˆsungsbed¸rftigkeit<br />

der Welt nicht Rechnung trage. 23 Denn sie verzichte<br />

darauf, sich auf Gedeih und Verderb f¸r die Erlˆsung einzusetzen,<br />

die nur gemeinschaftlich und geschichtlich erreicht werden<br />

kˆnne.<br />

21 G. Scholem, Nachbemerkung. Aus einem Brief an einen protestantischen Theologen:<br />

‹ber einige Grundbegriffe des Judentums, 169ñ170, Zitat: 170. H. Gollwitzer<br />

wird zwar nicht genannt, meine Vermutung, dafl er gemeint gewesen sei, ist<br />

mir aber von Gollwitzer best‰tigt worden. ñ Vgl. dazu auch Friedrich-Wilhelm<br />

Marquardt, Hermeneutik des christlichj¸dischen Verst‰ndnisses. ‹ber Helmut Gollwitzers<br />

Arbeit an der ÑJudenfrageì: Richte unsere F¸fle auf den Weg des Friedens<br />

(FS Helmut Gollwitzer), hg. von Andreas Baudis, Dieter Clausert, Volkhard Schliski<br />

und Bernhard Wegener unter Mitarbeit von Klaus Geyer und Friedrich-Wilhelm<br />

Marquardt, M¸nchen 1979, 138ñ154, Zitat: 143 mit Anm. 15.<br />

22 A. a. O. 169.<br />

23 Als ein Beleg kˆnnte genannt werden: Rudolf Bultmann, Geschichte und<br />

Eschatologie, 180f.: ÑEs ist die Paradoxie der christlichen Verk¸ndigung bzw. des<br />

christlichen Glaubens, dafl das eschatologische Geschehen nicht echt in seinem<br />

eigentlichen Sinne verstanden ist [Ö], wenn es als ein Geschehen aufgefaflt wird,<br />

das der sichtbaren Welt ihr Ende setzt in einer kosmischen Katastrophe, sondern dafl<br />

es ein Geschehen innerhalb der Geschichte ist, anhebend mit dem Auftreten Jesu<br />

von Nazareth, sich weiter vollziehend im Laufe der Geschichte,†ñ aber nicht als eine<br />

historisch festzustellende Entwicklung, sondern jeweils Ereignis werdend in Verk¸ndigung<br />

und Glaube.ì Bultmanns doppelbˆdiger Geschichtsbegriff d¸rfte ein<br />

Musterbeispiel f¸r eine Selbstwahrnehmung sein, die durch das Fremdbild der Auffassung<br />

eines Eschaton, das historisch festzustellen w‰re, mitgepr‰gt ist.<br />

14


EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />

2 Wandlungen in der Auffassung von ÇErlˆsungë<br />

In einem zweiten Durchgang mˆchte ich zeigen, wie tiefgreifend<br />

die Auffassung von ÑErlˆsungì sich auf christlicher Seite zu wandeln<br />

beginnt. Die Hoffnung auf Erlˆsung soll uns bewegen, sich nicht<br />

mehr mit der unerlˆsten Welt abzufinden, sondern sie umzugestalten,<br />

indem Frieden und Gerechtigkeit verwirklicht und die Schˆpfung<br />

bewahrt wird.<br />

2.1 Hoffnung auf Weltvollendung<br />

In diesem Sinne erweitert die Landessynode der Evangelischen Kirche<br />

im Rheinland am 10. Januar 1996 ihre Kirchenordnung um die<br />

S‰tze:<br />

ÑSie [die Evangelische Kirche im Rheinland] bezeugt die Treue<br />

Gottes, der an der Erw‰hlung seines Volkes Israel festh‰lt. Mit Israel<br />

hofft sie auf einen neuen Himmel und eine neue Erde.ì 24<br />

ÑMit Israel hoffenì bedeutet: zusammen gehen im Blick auf die<br />

Weltvollendung. Sie bildet das Ziel gemeinsamer Hoffnung.<br />

2.2 Die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt<br />

Beherrschend geworden hat sich der Eindruck der Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der<br />

Welt. Dazu haben sich k¸rzlich vier prominente j¸dische Historiker<br />

und Theologen aus den USA und Kanada ge‰uflert. In ihrem ÑStatement<br />

on Christians and Christianityì Dabru Emet (Redet Wahrheit),<br />

verˆffentlicht im August 2000, lautet der letzte Gesichtspunkt 25 :<br />

24 Verhandlungen der 45. ordentlichen rheinischen Landessynode, Tagung vom<br />

7. bis 11. Januar 1996 in Bad Neuenahr, statt Handschrift gedruckt, o. O. o. J. [B¸ro<br />

der Landessynode, 1996], 88ñ94. ñ Wieder abgedruckt: Katja Kriener/Johann Michael<br />

Schmidt (Hg.), Gottes Treue ñ Hoffnung von Christen und Juden. Die Auseinandersetzung<br />

um die Erg‰nzung des Grundartikels der Kirchenordnung der Evangelischen<br />

Kirche im Rheinland, Neukirchen-Vluyn 1998, 81.<br />

25 ÑJews and Christians must work toge<strong>the</strong>r for justice andpeace. Jews and<br />

Christians, each in <strong>the</strong>ir own way, recognize <strong>the</strong> unredeemed state of <strong>the</strong> world ‰s<br />

reflected in <strong>the</strong> persistence of persecution, poverty, and human degradation and<br />

misery. Although justice and peace are fmally Godís, our joint efforts, toge<strong>the</strong>r<br />

with those of o<strong>the</strong>r faith communities, will help bring <strong>the</strong> kingdom of God for<br />

which we hope and long. Separately and toge<strong>the</strong>r, we must work to bring justice<br />

15


GERHARD SAUTER<br />

ÑJuden und Christen m¸ssen f¸r Gerechtigkeit und Frieden zusammenarbeiten.<br />

Juden und Christen erkennen, jede auf ihre Weise,<br />

die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt, wie sie sich in fortdauernder Verfolgung,<br />

Armut, Erniedrigung und Verelendung von Menschen zeigt. Obwohl<br />

Gerechtigkeit und Frieden letzten Endes Gottes Sache sind, werden<br />

unsere gemeinsamen Anstrengungen, zusammen mit denen anderer<br />

Glaubensgemeinschaften, dazu verhelfen, das Reich Gottes herbeizuf¸hren,<br />

das wir erhoffen und ersehnen. Jeder f¸r sich und gemeinsam<br />

m¸ssen wir daran arbeiten, Gerechtigkeit und Frieden in unsere<br />

Welt zu bringen. In dieser Aufgabe werden wir durch die Vision der<br />

israelischen Propheten geleitet:<br />

ÇEs wird geschehen in den letzten Tagen, da wird der Berg mit<br />

dem Hause des Herrn festgegr¸ndet stehen an der Spitze der Berge<br />

und die H¸gel ¸berragen; und alle Vˆlker werden zu ihm hinstrˆmen,<br />

und viele Nationen werden sich aufmachen und sprechen: Kommt,<br />

laflt uns hinaufziehen zum Berge des Herrn, zu dem Hause des Gottes<br />

Jakobs, dafl er uns seine Wege lehre und wir wandeln auf seinen<br />

Pfaden.ë (Jes 2,2ñ3).ì 26<br />

Die Zionsverheiflung begr¸ndet also die gemeinsame Hoffnung<br />

and peace to our world. In this enterprise, we are guided <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> vision of <strong>the</strong><br />

prophets of Israel:<br />

It shall come to pass in <strong>the</strong> end of days that <strong>the</strong> mountain of <strong>the</strong> Lordís house shall<br />

be established at <strong>the</strong> top of <strong>the</strong> mountains and be exalted above <strong>the</strong> h¸ls, and <strong>the</strong><br />

nations shall flow unto itÖ and many peoples shall go and say, ëCome ye and let us<br />

go up to <strong>the</strong> mountain of <strong>the</strong> Lord to <strong>the</strong> house of <strong>the</strong> God of Jacob and He will teach<br />

us of His ways and we will walk in his paths.í (Isaiah 2:2ñ3)î<br />

26 Die Zeitschrift Zeitzeichen hat im Heft 7/2001 unter der Rubrik ÇDokumentationë<br />

eine die Erkl‰rung Dabru Emet deutlich k¸rzende ‹bersetzung von Christoph M¸nz<br />

abgedruckt. Der letzte Vergleichspunkt liest sich dort so:<br />

ÑJuden und Christen m¸ssen sich gemeinsam f¸r Gerechtigkeit und Frieden einsetzen.<br />

Getrennt und vereint m¸ssen wir daran arbeiten, unserer Welt Gerechtigkeit<br />

und Frieden zu bringen. In dieser Bem¸hung leitet uns die Vision der Propheten<br />

Israelsì [folgt Jes 2,2f.].ì (Eine j¸dische Stellungnahme zu Christen und Christentum:<br />

Zeitzeichen 2 [7/2001] 43)<br />

Obwohl andere Auslassungen in der ‹bersetzung an sechs Stellen gekennzeichnet<br />

sind, wird die Auslassung des zweiten und dritten Satzes des letzten Punktes der<br />

Erkl‰rung nicht gekennzeichnet.<br />

Selbst wenn man editorische Zw‰nge veranschlagt (der Text sollte offensichtlich die<br />

L‰nge einer Druckseite nicht ¸berschreiten), ist diese unausgewiesene K¸rzung doch<br />

Anlafl, nicht nur ein Versehen zu vermuten, das allerdings signifikant genug w‰re,<br />

sondern auch eine inhaltliche R¸ckfrage zu stellen: Ist die Notwendigkeit zur<br />

ethischen Zusammenarbeit so evident, dafl der Hinweis auf die je eigene Wahrnehmung<br />

der Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt bzw. auf die cooperatio Gottes und der Menschen<br />

16


EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />

von Juden und Christen, bezogen darauf, dafl beide Religionsgemeinschaften,<br />

Ñjede auf ihre Weiseì, die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt erkennen<br />

und sich ihr stellen.<br />

Die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt in Unterdr¸ckung von Menschlichkeit,<br />

in Ausgrenzung von Anderen, in Miflachtung elementarer Lebensbed¸rfnisse<br />

und in mannigfachen Formen von Unversˆhnlichkeit: dies<br />

ist heutzutage eine weitverbreitete Sicht, nicht nur f¸r Juden und Christen.<br />

Dafl diese Verfehlungen mit allen Kr‰ften ¸berwunden werden<br />

m¸ssen, sollte keine Frage mehr sein. Und diese moralische Verpflichtung<br />

sollte auch hinreichen, um gemeinsam f¸r dieses Ziel zu wirken.<br />

Wieviel wiegen dann noch die Motivationen, die auf j¸discher und<br />

christlicher Seite verschieden lauten und notfalls auch unterschiedlich<br />

gepr‰gt sind, wenn die Handlungen auf ein und dasselbe Hoffnungsziel<br />

hinauslaufen?<br />

Dies sind jedoch nicht die Fragen, die ñ wenn ich recht sehe ñ zum<br />

Gespr‰ch von Juden und Christen anstehen: Was heiflt ÑErlˆsungì?<br />

Was bedeutet, ihrer gew‰rtig zu sein? Vor allem: Wer kann erlˆsen?<br />

Ich kann hier nur versuchen, einige Gesichtspunkte zu nennen, die<br />

f¸r christliche Theologie maflgebend sind und maflgebend bleiben<br />

sollten.<br />

Von ÑErlˆsungì kann sie nicht sprechen, ohne auf Jesus Christus<br />

als den Erlˆser zu blicken: In seiner Gestalt werden wir ÑErlˆsungì<br />

gewahr: sie zeigt sein Gesicht. Wir kennen keine ÑGestaltenì, keine<br />

Konfigurationen, der Erlˆsung abgesehen von seiner Gestalt: anders<br />

als im Gedenken an das, was er vollbracht hat, und in der Erwartung<br />

dessen, was er zu vollbringen verheiflen hat. Insofern d¸rfen wir ñ<br />

jedenfalls als Christen ñ nicht ÑErlˆsungì vom ÑErlˆserì trennen.<br />

Denn dies w¸rde bedeuten, das Handeln Jesu Christi von ihm als<br />

Person abzulˆsen.<br />

Wenn Jesus ausruft: ÑEs ist vollbrachtì, dann ist dies sein letzter<br />

Ruf auf dem Weg seines Gehorsams. Damit zieht er nicht die Summe<br />

seines Lebenswerkes. Was hat Jesus Ñgeschafftì? Er hat ÑGehorsam<br />

vollbrachtì. Der Weg des Gehorsam war es, Gottes Willen geschehen<br />

zu lassen, ihm Raum zu lassen, und zwar entgegen menschlichem<br />

¸berfl¸ssig erscheint, ja vielleicht sogar stˆren kˆnnte? Welche Funktion erh‰lt der<br />

biblische Text in diesem neu geschaffenen Zusammenhang, in dem von Erlˆsung,<br />

von Gott und Gottes Handeln ¸berhaupt nicht mehr gesprochen wird?<br />

17


GERHARD SAUTER<br />

Eigensinn, und sei dieser noch so fromm und seiner religiˆsen Ziele<br />

gewifl. Solch menschlicher Eigenwille, der zu wissen meint, was Gott<br />

im Sinn hat und was demzufolge auszuf¸hren ist, hat Jesus von Nazareth<br />

ans Kreuz gebracht. Jesus Christus hat die Unterscheidung (nicht<br />

die Trennung!) von Gottes Willen und menschlichem Wollen vollbracht.<br />

Sein Gehorsam hat keinen gˆttlich gegebenen Handlungsplan<br />

ausgef¸hrt. Erlˆsung am Kreuz auf Golgatha heiflt: sich Gottes Handeln<br />

gefallen lassen.<br />

Die Geschichte der Kirche ist ein unaufhˆrliches ñ und oft gescheitertes<br />

ñ Bem¸hen darum, sich an Jesus Christus als Erlˆser in<br />

allen Lebenssituationen zu halten, sich von der Erlˆsung, die er vollbracht<br />

hat, umfangen zu lassen und ihm auf dem Weg seines Gehorsams<br />

zu folgen. Das Leben in der Kraft des Erlˆsers und mit ihm<br />

bleibt aber Hoffnung auf die ÑErlˆsung des Leibesì, wie Paulus sagt<br />

(Rom 8,23): nicht die Erlˆsung vom Leibe, von den kˆrperlichen<br />

Daseinsbedingungen, sondern die Verwandlung der Leiblichkeit in<br />

Gottes Doxa, die Strahlkraft seines himmlischen Glanzes. F¸r dieses<br />

Leben Ñzwischen den Zeitenì (oder, wie Paulus formuliert: Ñim Geistì<br />

Gottes, dem Unterpfand der erhofften Erlˆsung) hat sich in der<br />

christlichen Theologie die Bezeichnung ÑVersˆhnungì eingeb¸rgert.<br />

Auch ÑVersˆhnungì ist kein innerer oder ‰uflerer Zustand, sondern<br />

Gottes Werk in Jesus Christus (2. Kor 5,19). Mit ihm hat Gott ein<br />

durch Menschen heillos zerstˆrtes Verh‰ltnis wieder aufgerichtet: und<br />

zwar so, dafl Menschen im Namen Christi gebeten werden, sich mit<br />

Gott versˆhnen zu lassen (2. Kor 5,20) und daraufhin auch miteinander<br />

versˆhnt werden. Versˆhnung ist auf die eschatolo-gische Erlˆsung<br />

ausgerichtet. Als Versˆhner steht Jesus Christus zwischen Christen<br />

und Juden ñ aber nicht, um sie voneinander zu trennen.<br />

Wie werden Juden der Erlˆsung gewahr, wie sie sich ñ so deutete<br />

Martin Buber an ñ sich ihnen kundtut? Aus seiner Skizze ist zu ersehen,<br />

dafl das Kˆnigtum Gottes, sein Reich, sich bereits Bahn bricht,<br />

zwar nicht, um eine Entwicklung zu einer besseren Willen anzubahnen,<br />

sondern indem Menschen einwilligen in Gottes Gerechtigkeit<br />

und den Frieden, der Gottes Sache ist und bleibt. In Gottes Willen<br />

einzuwilligen: dies ist es doch, was Juden und Christen zusammenfuhren<br />

kˆnnte. Denn ihre gemeinsame Hoffnung h‰ngt an Gottes<br />

Barmherzigkeit und an seiner Treue zu seinen Verheiflungen.<br />

18


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM:<br />

FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY<br />

TO THE TALMUDSí RELIGION<br />

Jacob Neusner, New York<br />

I. Rabbinic Judaism<br />

From late antiquity, literary evidence, in <strong>the</strong> form of well-crafted,<br />

systematic and coherent documents, presents us with a Judaism called<br />

ìRabbinic,î <strong>by</strong> reason of <strong>the</strong> title of honor accorded many of its<br />

principal authorities, or ìclassicalî or ìnormative,î <strong>by</strong> reason of its<br />

later standing, or ìTalmudic,î because of its final and definitive statement,<br />

in <strong>the</strong> Talmud of Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia. Its governing myth, <strong>the</strong> story of<br />

how at Sinai God revealed <strong>the</strong> Torah to Moses in two media, written<br />

and oral, with <strong>the</strong> oral part finally given written articulation in <strong>the</strong><br />

Mishnah (ca. 200 C. E.) through <strong>the</strong> Talmud of Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia<br />

(ca. 600 C. E.) and associated writings of rabbis <strong>the</strong>mselves, contributes<br />

<strong>the</strong> title, ìJudaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah.î<br />

The history of that particular Judaism as it took over and defined<br />

<strong>the</strong> life of <strong>the</strong> Jews in <strong>the</strong> first six centuries of <strong>the</strong> Common Era<br />

cannot be recovered. We have no evidence about <strong>the</strong> state of affairs<br />

for <strong>the</strong> Jews in general, such as would tell us how that Judaic system<br />

came to dictate <strong>the</strong> character of <strong>the</strong> Jewsí social world and culture.<br />

One may argue that <strong>the</strong> evidence driving from synagogues, not that<br />

reaching us from <strong>the</strong> limited circles of learned sages, tells us about<br />

<strong>the</strong> common practices of <strong>the</strong> time. But what sort of religious system<br />

emerges out of <strong>the</strong> material evidence remains to be determined.<br />

How <strong>the</strong> Judaic system set forth in <strong>the</strong> Rabbinic writings related to<br />

<strong>the</strong> religious life of Jews beyond <strong>the</strong> circles of sages, <strong>the</strong> ways in<br />

which <strong>the</strong> particular way of life and world view set forth <strong>by</strong> that<br />

system came to define <strong>the</strong> actual character of <strong>the</strong> ìIsraelî to which<br />

that Judaism spoke ñ <strong>the</strong>se are historical questions we cannot answer.<br />

19


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

The books tell us what <strong>the</strong>ir writers and compilers thought, but not<br />

about <strong>the</strong> world beyond <strong>the</strong>ir circle and its view of matters. And what<br />

we learn about ìJudaismî from o<strong>the</strong>r than Judaic sources, for instance,<br />

pagan and Christian and Zoroastrian writers about Judaism,<br />

tells us no more than we know about Judaism from <strong>the</strong> written Torah.<br />

Christian writers about Judaism, for example, utilize <strong>the</strong> Hebrew<br />

Scriptures for <strong>the</strong>ir picture of <strong>the</strong> Judaism that <strong>the</strong>y criticize.<br />

II. From Philosophy to Religion<br />

But a different sort of history of Judaism in late antiquity emerges<br />

from <strong>the</strong> Rabbinic documents. It is <strong>the</strong> documentary history of <strong>the</strong><br />

ideas that inform <strong>the</strong> religious system of Rabbinic Judaism. For if we<br />

follow <strong>the</strong> unfolding of <strong>the</strong> documents of that Judaism, Stated in<br />

documentary terms, <strong>the</strong> formative history of Judaism tells a story in<br />

<strong>the</strong>se sentences.<br />

[1] It shows, first, how <strong>the</strong> Judaic system emerged in <strong>the</strong> Mishnah,<br />

ca. 200 C. E., and its associated Midrash-compilations, ca. 200ñ300<br />

C. E., as [1] a philosophical structure comprising a politics, philosophy,<br />

economics. These categories were defined as philosophers in<br />

general understood <strong>the</strong>m: a <strong>the</strong>ory of legitimate violence, an account<br />

of knowledge gained through <strong>the</strong> methods of natural history, and<br />

a <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> rational disposition (and increase) of scarce resources.<br />

[2] This philosophical system <strong>the</strong>n was turned <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Talmud of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Land of Israel and related Midrash-compilations, ca. 400ñ500<br />

C. E., into [2] a religious system. The system was effected through<br />

<strong>the</strong> formation of counterpart categories: an anti-politics of weakness,<br />

an anti-economics of <strong>the</strong> rational utilization of an infinitely renewable<br />

resource, a philosophy of truth revealed ra<strong>the</strong>r than rules discovered.<br />

The first stage in <strong>the</strong> documentary history takes up <strong>the</strong> urgent questions<br />

precipitated <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> political calamities of <strong>the</strong> first and second<br />

centuries, <strong>the</strong> destruction of <strong>the</strong> Temple, <strong>the</strong> paganization of Jerusalem,<br />

and <strong>the</strong> chaos following <strong>the</strong> Bar Kokhba disaster. The second<br />

stage responds to <strong>the</strong> issues made urgent <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> political triumph of<br />

Christianity and <strong>the</strong> consequent challenge to <strong>the</strong> situation of Israel as<br />

20


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

Jews read Scriptureís account of <strong>the</strong>ir particular Israel. To <strong>the</strong> extent<br />

that <strong>the</strong> documentary history corresponds to <strong>the</strong> major turnings in<br />

political history, we may reconstruct not only <strong>the</strong> unfolding of ideas,<br />

but <strong>the</strong> relationship between ideas and <strong>the</strong> social world of <strong>the</strong> people<br />

that held those ideas, that <strong>the</strong> history of a religion proposes to narrate.<br />

III. The Crisis of 70 and <strong>the</strong> Mishnaic Stage in <strong>the</strong> Formation of<br />

Rabbinic Judaism<br />

The temple in Jerusalem, where sacrifices were offered to God, constituted<br />

<strong>the</strong> focus of Pentateuchal Judaism. Indeed, <strong>the</strong> cycle of holy<br />

time was marked <strong>by</strong> sacrifice. Thus <strong>the</strong> lives of <strong>the</strong> patriarchs repeatedly<br />

drew <strong>the</strong>m into relationship with <strong>the</strong> sacrificial cult in various<br />

holy places, but especially in Jerusalem, and <strong>the</strong> laws of <strong>the</strong> Torah<br />

dealt in detail with <strong>the</strong> sacrifices, <strong>the</strong> priests, <strong>the</strong> maintenance of <strong>the</strong><br />

priestly caste, and o<strong>the</strong>r cultic matters. So <strong>the</strong> power of <strong>the</strong> Torah<br />

composed in this time lay in its focus on <strong>the</strong> Temple. This central<br />

Temple cult, with its total exclusion of <strong>the</strong> non-Israelite raised high<br />

those walls of separation we have talked about between Jew and<br />

ìo<strong>the</strong>r.î They underlined such distinctiveness as already existed. What<br />

made Israel Israel was <strong>the</strong> center, <strong>the</strong> altar; <strong>the</strong> life of Israel flowed<br />

from <strong>the</strong> altar. But in 70 C. E., in <strong>the</strong> course of a war fought <strong>by</strong> Jews<br />

against Roman rule in <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel, Jerusalem fell and <strong>the</strong> Temple,<br />

except for <strong>the</strong> Western wall of <strong>the</strong> platform on which it stood,<br />

was destroyed.<br />

How <strong>the</strong>n, are we to define <strong>the</strong> urgent question and self-evident<br />

Answer of <strong>the</strong> Judaic System of <strong>the</strong> Dual Torah, Oral and Written that<br />

emerged in <strong>the</strong> Mishnah? The principal question formulated <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

sages who produced writings beyond 70 ñ writings that ultimately<br />

were portrayed as <strong>the</strong> oral part of <strong>the</strong> one whole Torah of Moses, ìour<br />

lordî our rabbenu ñ centered upon <strong>the</strong> sanctification of Israel now<br />

that <strong>the</strong> Temple, <strong>the</strong> locus of holiness, lay in ruins and <strong>the</strong> cult was no<br />

more. The Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah set forth a twin-ideal: [1] sanctification<br />

of <strong>the</strong> everyday life in <strong>the</strong> here and now, which when fully<br />

realized would lead to [2] salvation of all Israel in <strong>the</strong> age to come.<br />

But what remained to be sanctified, as <strong>the</strong> Temple had been sanctified<br />

21


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

through its cult, now that <strong>the</strong> Temple was gone? One locus of sanctification<br />

endured beyond 70: <strong>the</strong> holy people itself. That peopleís life<br />

would be made holy ñ in <strong>the</strong> holy land at first, but later, as this<br />

Judaism spread across <strong>the</strong> world through exile in <strong>the</strong> Diaspora, everywhere<br />

<strong>the</strong> people lived. Holy of course meant separate and distinct<br />

from <strong>the</strong> ordinary, and <strong>the</strong> chronic question of who is a Jew and what<br />

is Israel would find its self-evident response in <strong>the</strong> same categories as<br />

<strong>the</strong> Pentateuchal system had defined for itself.<br />

The stress of <strong>the</strong> Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah, of <strong>the</strong> post-Temple<br />

sages or rabbis who constructed it, on <strong>the</strong> sanctification of <strong>the</strong> home<br />

and <strong>the</strong> paradigmatic power of <strong>the</strong> Temple for <strong>the</strong> home points to<br />

a more extreme position within <strong>the</strong> priestly paradigm than that of <strong>the</strong><br />

priests who wrote parts of Exodus, Leviticus and Numbers. What <strong>the</strong><br />

priests wanted for <strong>the</strong> Temple, <strong>the</strong> dual Torahís sages wanted for <strong>the</strong><br />

community, Israel, at large. The premise of <strong>the</strong> written Torah, we<br />

recall, rested on a simple allegation: if Israel observes <strong>the</strong> terms of <strong>the</strong><br />

covenant, leading a sanctified life, Israel will enjoy prosperity in<br />

a serene land, a national life outside of history. The traumatic event of<br />

annihilation and rebirth, of death and resurrection of <strong>the</strong> nation (as<br />

manifested in <strong>the</strong> reworking of ancient Israelite writings into <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch)<br />

brought about yearning for one thing above all: no more.<br />

The picture of what had happened presented solace ñ that is why<br />

people wanted to accept <strong>the</strong> portrait of <strong>the</strong>ir world. The restoration<br />

gave Israel a second chance at life, but Israel also could rely on its<br />

knowledge of <strong>the</strong> rules that governed its national life, those of <strong>the</strong><br />

Torah and its repeated allegations of an agreement, or covenant, between<br />

Israel and God, to make certain <strong>the</strong>re would be no more experiences<br />

of exile and alienation (whe<strong>the</strong>r or not followed <strong>by</strong> reconciliation<br />

and restoration). This same paradigm governed in <strong>the</strong> framing<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah. What shifted was <strong>the</strong> redefinition of<br />

salvation from <strong>the</strong> here and now to <strong>the</strong> end of time. And that change,<br />

of course, was not only plausible, it also was necessary in light of <strong>the</strong><br />

destruction of <strong>the</strong> Temple in 70.<br />

The reason for <strong>the</strong> transfer of <strong>the</strong> hope for salvation from now to<br />

<strong>the</strong> end of time derives from a political event in some ways bearing<br />

greater weight than <strong>the</strong> destruction of <strong>the</strong> Temple in 70. This event is<br />

<strong>the</strong> failure to recover <strong>the</strong> city and rebuild <strong>the</strong> Temple through war<br />

22


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

three generations later. Had <strong>the</strong> war been successful, it could have<br />

replicated <strong>the</strong> events that began in 586 and ended in 450. That is, it<br />

could have restored <strong>the</strong> people to <strong>the</strong> land and <strong>the</strong> government and<br />

temple to Jerusalem. Indeed, when <strong>the</strong> war broke out in 132, <strong>the</strong> Jews<br />

evidently expected that after three generations, God would call an<br />

end to <strong>the</strong> punishment as God had done <strong>by</strong> restoring <strong>the</strong> Temple some<br />

ìseventy yearsî after its first destruction (586). But that did not happen.<br />

Israel again suffered defeat ñ a defeat worse than before. The<br />

Temple now lay in permanent ruins; Jerusalem became a forbidden<br />

city for Jews. So Israel, <strong>the</strong> Jewish people, necessarily set out to<br />

assimilate enduring defeat.<br />

IV. The Mishnahís Judaism of Sanctification without <strong>the</strong> Temple<br />

The Mishnah manifests <strong>the</strong> Judaism that took shape in <strong>the</strong> aftermath<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Jewsí defeat in this Second War against Rome, fought from<br />

132 through 135. Although later considered <strong>the</strong> written manifestation<br />

of <strong>the</strong> oral tradition that formed part of <strong>the</strong> Torah received <strong>by</strong><br />

Moses at Sinai, and accorded proportionate status, <strong>the</strong> Mishnah was<br />

in fact a philosophical system in <strong>the</strong> form of a law code that responded<br />

to problems arising from <strong>the</strong> destruction of <strong>the</strong> Temple and<br />

Bar Kokhbaís subsequent defeat. When in <strong>the</strong> aftermath of <strong>the</strong> destruction<br />

in C. E. 70 and <strong>the</strong> still more disheartening defeat of 135 <strong>the</strong><br />

Mishnahís sages worked out a Judaism without a Temple and a cult,<br />

<strong>the</strong>y produced in <strong>the</strong> Mishnah a system of sanctification focused on<br />

<strong>the</strong> holiness of <strong>the</strong> priesthood, <strong>the</strong> cultic festivals, <strong>the</strong> Temple and its<br />

sacrifices, and on <strong>the</strong> rules for protecting that holiness from Levitical<br />

uncleanness. Four of <strong>the</strong> six divisions of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah expound on<br />

this single <strong>the</strong>me.<br />

In an act of supererogatory imagination, defying <strong>the</strong> facts of <strong>the</strong><br />

circumstance of a defeated nation, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís system-builders<br />

composed a world at rest, perfect and complete, made holy because it<br />

is complete and perfect. In mythic terms, <strong>the</strong> Mishnah reaches back<br />

to creation to interpret <strong>the</strong> world of destruction round about. The<br />

system of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah confronts <strong>the</strong> fall from Eden with Eden, <strong>the</strong><br />

world in time beyond <strong>the</strong> closure of Jerusalem to Israel with <strong>the</strong><br />

23


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

timeless world on <strong>the</strong> eve of <strong>the</strong> Sabbath of Creation: ìThus <strong>the</strong> heavens<br />

and <strong>the</strong> earth were finished and all <strong>the</strong> host of <strong>the</strong>m. And on <strong>the</strong><br />

seventh day God finished his work which he had done, and he rested<br />

on <strong>the</strong> seventh day from all his work which he had done. So God<br />

blessed <strong>the</strong> seventh day and hallowed it, because on it God rested<br />

from all his work which he had done in creationî (Gen. 2:1ñ3).<br />

The Mishnahís framers posited an economy embedded in a social<br />

system awaiting <strong>the</strong> seventh day, and that dayís divine act of sanctification<br />

which, as at <strong>the</strong> creation of <strong>the</strong> world, would set <strong>the</strong> seal of<br />

holy rest upon an again-complete creation. That would be a creation<br />

that was well ordered, with all things called <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir rightful names,<br />

in <strong>the</strong>ir proper classification, from <strong>the</strong> least to <strong>the</strong> greatest, and from<br />

<strong>the</strong> many to <strong>the</strong> One. There is no place for action and actors when<br />

what is besought is no action whatsoever, but only unchanging perfection.<br />

There is room only for a description of how things are, for<br />

<strong>the</strong> present tense, for a sequence of completed statements and static<br />

problems. All <strong>the</strong> action lies within, in how <strong>the</strong>se statements are made.<br />

Once <strong>the</strong>y stand fully expressed, when nothing remains to be said,<br />

nothing remains to be done. There is no need for actors, whe<strong>the</strong>r<br />

political entities such as king, scribes, priests, or economic entities,<br />

householders.<br />

That is why <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís framers invented a utopia, one that<br />

exists nowhere in particular, a fantasy related to whom it may concern.<br />

The politics of Judaism began in <strong>the</strong> imagination of a generation<br />

of intellectuals who, in <strong>the</strong> aftermath of <strong>the</strong> Jerusalem governmentís<br />

and Templeís destruction (70) and <strong>the</strong> military defeat Jews<br />

suffered three generations later (132ñ135), had witnessed <strong>the</strong> end of<br />

<strong>the</strong> political system and structure that <strong>the</strong> Jews had known for <strong>the</strong><br />

preceding millennium. The political <strong>the</strong>ory of Judaism laid out political<br />

institutions and described how <strong>the</strong>y should work. In that way<br />

<strong>the</strong>se intellectuals, who enjoyed no documented access to power of<br />

any kind and who certainly were unable to coerce many people to do<br />

very much, sorted out issues of power. They took account, in mind at<br />

least, of <strong>the</strong> issues of legitimate coercion within Israel, <strong>the</strong> holy people,<br />

which <strong>the</strong>y considered more than a voluntary association, more<br />

than a community formed around a cult.<br />

The Mishnahís principal message, which makes <strong>the</strong> Judaism of<br />

24


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

this document and of its social components distinctive and cogent, is<br />

that man is at <strong>the</strong> center of creation, <strong>the</strong> head of all creatures upon<br />

earth, corresponding to God in heaven, in whose image man is made.<br />

The way in which <strong>the</strong> Mishnah makes this simple and fundamental<br />

statement is to impute power to man to inaugurate and initiate those<br />

corresponding processes, sanctification and uncleanness, which play<br />

so critical a role in <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís account of reality. The will of man,<br />

expressed through <strong>the</strong> deed of man, is <strong>the</strong> active power in <strong>the</strong> world.<br />

Will and deed constitute those actors of creation which work upon<br />

neutral realms, subject to ei<strong>the</strong>r sanctification or uncleanness: <strong>the</strong><br />

Temple and table, <strong>the</strong> field and family, <strong>the</strong> altar and hearth, woman,<br />

time, space, transactions in <strong>the</strong> material world and in <strong>the</strong> world above<br />

as well. An object, a substance, a transaction, even a phrase or a<br />

sentence is inert but may be made holy, when <strong>the</strong> interplay of <strong>the</strong> will<br />

and deed of man arouses or generates its potential to be sanctified.<br />

Each may be treated as ordinary or (where relevant) made unclean <strong>by</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> neglect of <strong>the</strong> will and inattentive act of man. Just as <strong>the</strong> entire<br />

system of uncleanness and holiness awaits <strong>the</strong> intervention of man,<br />

which imparts <strong>the</strong> capacity to become unclean upon what was formerly<br />

inert, or which removes <strong>the</strong> capacity to impart cleanness from<br />

what was formerly in its natural and puissant condition, so in <strong>the</strong><br />

o<strong>the</strong>r ranges of reality, man is at <strong>the</strong> center on earth, just as is God in<br />

heaven. Man is counterpart and partner and creation, in that, like God<br />

he has power over <strong>the</strong> status and condition of creation, through his<br />

intentionality putting everything in its proper place, through <strong>the</strong> exercise<br />

of his will calling everything <strong>by</strong> its rightful name. The goal <strong>the</strong>n<br />

was <strong>the</strong> restoration of creation to its original perfection. Then it was<br />

that God ceased from labor, blessed creation, and sanctified it.<br />

V. The Talmudsí Judaism of Sanctification and Salvation<br />

The Mishnah enjoyed two centuries of study and amplification. Indeed,<br />

a massive system deriving from and connecting with <strong>the</strong><br />

Mishnahís but essentially distinct from it emerged in <strong>the</strong> Talmud of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Land of Israel (closed ca. 400). The urgent question that predominates<br />

in that enormous document, and that takes <strong>the</strong> form of an ex-<br />

25


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

tended elaboration of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah, is salvation: when and why will it<br />

come, and, above all, how long must it be postponed? The urgency of<br />

<strong>the</strong> issue derived from two events that we have already touched upon.<br />

First of all, in 312 Constantine legalized Christianity, and in <strong>the</strong> course<br />

of <strong>the</strong> next three generations, <strong>the</strong> state became officially Christian. In<br />

<strong>the</strong> course of suppressing paganism, <strong>the</strong> Christian state adopted rules<br />

that for <strong>the</strong> first time since <strong>the</strong> Maccabees, in <strong>the</strong> second century<br />

B. C., denied <strong>the</strong> licit practice of Judaism. That trauma was intensified<br />

<strong>by</strong> a brief moment of relief, when one of <strong>the</strong> heirs of Constantine,<br />

Julian, left Christianity, reaffirmed paganism and, in 361 proposed to<br />

discredit Christianity <strong>by</strong> permitting <strong>the</strong> Jews to rebuild <strong>the</strong> Temple in<br />

Jerusalem. Unfortunately, he died soon afterward and nothing came<br />

of <strong>the</strong> project.<br />

The urgency with which <strong>the</strong> Jews pursued <strong>the</strong> question of salvation<br />

is hardly a surprising. Consider that from <strong>the</strong>ir own political<br />

triumph and <strong>the</strong> Jewsí deep disappointment <strong>by</strong> Julianís failed scheme,<br />

<strong>the</strong> Christians claimed that <strong>the</strong> political shifts in <strong>the</strong> standing of Christianity<br />

and Judaism confirmed <strong>the</strong> truth of Christianity and underlined<br />

<strong>the</strong> falsity of Judaism. In particular, Christianity stressed <strong>the</strong><br />

falsity of <strong>the</strong> Jewsí hope for a coming messiah. It argued that <strong>the</strong> Jews<br />

had been saved in <strong>the</strong> time of <strong>the</strong> return to Zion (450 B. C. E.). That<br />

return, Christians claimed, fulfilled <strong>the</strong> Old Testament prophecies of<br />

Israelís salvation. But from that moment, <strong>by</strong> rejecting <strong>the</strong> messiahship<br />

of Jesus, Jews had lost all fur<strong>the</strong>r standing in <strong>the</strong> divine scheme for<br />

saving humanity. So <strong>the</strong> question of salvation turned from a chronic<br />

concern to an acute crisis for <strong>the</strong> Jews ñ in positive and negative<br />

ways. And predictably, it was addressed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> sages who revised <strong>the</strong><br />

Mishnah <strong>by</strong> setting forth <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel.<br />

Two hundred years after that Talmud took shape, (ca. 400), a second<br />

one, <strong>the</strong> Talmud of Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia, recast matters in a permanent<br />

and authoritative form (ca. 600). From <strong>the</strong>n to <strong>the</strong> present, ì<strong>the</strong> Talmud,î<br />

meaning <strong>the</strong> Talmud of Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia, toge<strong>the</strong>r with its commentaries,<br />

codes of laws deriving from it, and institutions of autonomous<br />

administration resting on it, has defined <strong>the</strong> life of most Jews and <strong>the</strong><br />

Judaic system that prevailed as normative. Its successful definition of<br />

<strong>the</strong> essentials of Judaism for Jews living in Christian and <strong>the</strong> Muslim<br />

worlds depends on <strong>the</strong> compelling power of its account of who is<br />

26


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

a Jew, what it means to be Israel, and how <strong>the</strong> holy people must work<br />

out its life in <strong>the</strong> here and now so as to attain salvation at <strong>the</strong> end of<br />

time. This was, <strong>the</strong>n, a Judaism intersecting with <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís but<br />

essentially asymmetrical with. It was a system for salvation focused<br />

on <strong>the</strong> salvific power of <strong>the</strong> sanctification of <strong>the</strong> holy people.<br />

What <strong>the</strong> Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah as portrayed in <strong>the</strong> two Talmuds<br />

did was shift <strong>the</strong> focus from <strong>the</strong> Temple and its supernatural<br />

history to <strong>the</strong> people Israel and its natural, this-worldly history. Once<br />

Israel, holy Israel, had come to form <strong>the</strong> counterpart to <strong>the</strong> Temple<br />

and its supernatural life, that o<strong>the</strong>r history ñ Israelís ñ would stand at<br />

<strong>the</strong> center of things. Accordingly, a new sort of memorable event<br />

came to <strong>the</strong> fore in <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel. It was <strong>the</strong> story<br />

of Israelís suffering ñ remembrance of that suffering on <strong>the</strong> one side,<br />

and an effort to explain events of such tragedy on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r. And that<br />

story enjoyed <strong>the</strong> standing of self-evident, indeed self-validating truth<br />

because Jews found that it corresponded to and satisfactorily explained<br />

<strong>the</strong> powerless political situation <strong>the</strong>y found <strong>the</strong>mselves in.<br />

VI. Characterizing Documents [1]: The Mishnah: Judaism as<br />

a Philosophy in <strong>the</strong> First and Second Centuries<br />

From this brief account of <strong>the</strong> unfolding, in response to historical<br />

crises, of <strong>the</strong> Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah, let us turn to <strong>the</strong> intellectual<br />

characterization of each of its stages, with stress on <strong>the</strong> shift from<br />

philosophy to religion. The Mishnah presents a philosophical <strong>the</strong>ory<br />

of <strong>the</strong> social order, a system of thought that, in <strong>the</strong> context of <strong>the</strong><br />

same time and place, people generally deemed philosophers will have<br />

recognized as philosophical. The Mishnahís method of hierarchical<br />

classification in important ways is like that of <strong>the</strong> natural history of<br />

Aristotle, and <strong>the</strong> central component of its message proves congruent<br />

to that of neo-Platonism.<br />

Specifically, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís Judaic system sets forth in stupefying<br />

detail a version of one critical proposition of neo-Platonism, demonstrated<br />

through a standard Aristotelian method. The repeated proof<br />

through <strong>the</strong> Aristotelian method of hierarchical classification demonstrates<br />

in detail that many things really form a single thing, many<br />

27


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

species, a single genus, many genera, an encompassing and well-<br />

-crafted, cogent whole. Every time we speciate, ñ and <strong>the</strong> Mishnah is<br />

a mass of speciated lists ñ we affirm that position; each successful<br />

labor of forming relationships among species, e.g., making <strong>the</strong>m into<br />

a genus, or identifying <strong>the</strong> hierarchy of <strong>the</strong> species, proves it again.<br />

Not only so, but when we can show that many things are really one,<br />

or that one thing yields many (<strong>the</strong> reverse and confirmation of <strong>the</strong><br />

former), we say in a fresh way a single immutable truth, <strong>the</strong> one of<br />

this philosophy concerning <strong>the</strong> unity of all being in an orderly composition<br />

of all things within a single taxon. Accordingly, this Judaismís<br />

initial system, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís, finds its natural place within<br />

philosophy because it appeals to <strong>the</strong> Aristotelian methods and medium<br />

of natural philosophy ñ classification, comparison and contrast,<br />

expressed in <strong>the</strong> forms of Listenwissenschaft ñ to register its position,<br />

which is an important one in Middle Platonism and later (close to<br />

a century after <strong>the</strong> closure of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah) would come to profound<br />

expression in Plotinus.<br />

The philosophical Judaism moreover utilized economics ñ <strong>the</strong> rational<br />

disposition of scarce resources ñ in order to set forth a systemic<br />

statement of fundamental importance. Entirely congruent with <strong>the</strong><br />

philosophical economics of Aristotle, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís economics answered<br />

<strong>the</strong> same questions concerning <strong>the</strong> definition of wealth, property,<br />

production and <strong>the</strong> means of production, ownership and control<br />

of <strong>the</strong> means of production, <strong>the</strong> determination of price and value and<br />

<strong>the</strong> like. And that fact signifies that <strong>the</strong> Judaic system to which <strong>the</strong><br />

Mishnah attests is philosophical not only in method and message but<br />

in its very systemic composition. The principal components of its<br />

<strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> social order, its account of <strong>the</strong> way of life of its Israel<br />

and its picture of <strong>the</strong> conduct of <strong>the</strong> public policy of its social entity, ñ<br />

all of <strong>the</strong>se in detail correspond in <strong>the</strong>ir basic definitions and indicative<br />

traits with <strong>the</strong> economics and <strong>the</strong> politics of Greco-Roman philosophy<br />

in <strong>the</strong> Aristotelian tradition. Specifically, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís economics,<br />

in general in <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> rational disposition of scarce<br />

resources and of <strong>the</strong> management and increase <strong>the</strong>reof, and specifically<br />

in its definitions of wealth and ownership, production and consumption,<br />

point <strong>by</strong> point, corresponds to that of Aristotle.<br />

The power of economics as framed <strong>by</strong> Aristotle, <strong>the</strong> only eco-<br />

28


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

nomic <strong>the</strong>orist of antiquity worthy of <strong>the</strong> name, was to develop <strong>the</strong><br />

relationship between <strong>the</strong> economy to society as a whole. And <strong>the</strong><br />

framers of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah did <strong>the</strong> same when <strong>the</strong>y incorporated issues<br />

of economics at a profound <strong>the</strong>oretical level into <strong>the</strong> system of society<br />

as a whole that <strong>the</strong>y proposed to construct. That is why <strong>the</strong> authorship<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah will be seen as attacking <strong>the</strong> problem of<br />

manís livelihood within a system of sanctification of a holy people<br />

with a radicalism of which no later religious thinkers about utopias<br />

were capable. None has ever penetrated deeper into <strong>the</strong> material organization<br />

of manís life under <strong>the</strong> aspect of Godís rule. In effect, <strong>the</strong>y<br />

posed, in all its breadth, <strong>the</strong> question of <strong>the</strong> critical, indeed definitive<br />

place occupied <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> economy in society under Godís rule. The<br />

points in common between Aristotleís and <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís economics<br />

in detail prove no less indicative. Both Aristotle and <strong>the</strong> Mishnah<br />

presented an anachronistic system of economics. The <strong>the</strong>ory of both<br />

falls into <strong>the</strong> same classification of economic <strong>the</strong>ory, that of distributive<br />

economics, familiar in <strong>the</strong> Near and Middle East from Sumerian<br />

times down to, but not including, <strong>the</strong> age of Aristotle (let alone that of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Mishnah five centuries later). But market-economics had been<br />

well-established prior to Aristotleís time. Aristotleís economics is<br />

distributive for systemic reasons, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís replicates <strong>the</strong> received<br />

principles of <strong>the</strong> economics planned <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Temple priests and<br />

set forth in <strong>the</strong> Priestly Code of <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch, Leviticus in particular.<br />

The result ñ fabricated or replicated principles ñ was <strong>the</strong> same.<br />

Both systems ñ <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís and Aristotleís ñ in vast detail expressed<br />

<strong>the</strong> ancient distributive economics, in <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>the</strong>ories of fixed<br />

value and conception of <strong>the</strong> distribution of scarce resources <strong>by</strong> appeal<br />

to o<strong>the</strong>r than <strong>the</strong> rationality of <strong>the</strong> market. The <strong>the</strong>ory of money characteristic<br />

of Aristotle (but not of Plato) and of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah for instance<br />

conforms to that required <strong>by</strong> distributive economics; exchange<br />

takes place through barter, not through <strong>the</strong> abstract price-setting mechanism<br />

represented <strong>by</strong> money. Consequently, <strong>the</strong> representation of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Mishnah as a philosophical Judaism derives from not only general<br />

characteristics but very specific and indicative traits held in common<br />

with <strong>the</strong> principal figure of <strong>the</strong> Greco-Roman philosophical tradition<br />

in economics.<br />

There was a common social foundation for <strong>the</strong> economic <strong>the</strong>ory of<br />

29


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

both systems. Both Aristotle and <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís framers deemed <strong>the</strong><br />

fundamental unit of production to be <strong>the</strong> household, and <strong>the</strong> larger<br />

social unit, <strong>the</strong> village, composed of households, marked <strong>the</strong> limits of<br />

<strong>the</strong> social entity. The Mishnahís economic tractates, such as <strong>the</strong> tractates<br />

on civil law, invariably refer to <strong>the</strong> householder, making him <strong>the</strong><br />

subject of most predicates; where issues o<strong>the</strong>r than economics are in<br />

play, e.g., in <strong>the</strong> political tractates such as Sanhedrin, <strong>the</strong> householder<br />

scarcely appears as a social actor. Not only so, but both Aristotle and<br />

<strong>the</strong> authorship of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah formed <strong>the</strong> conception of ìtrue value,î<br />

which maintained that something ñ an object, a piece of land ñ possessed<br />

a value extrinsic to <strong>the</strong> market and intrinsic to itself, such that,<br />

if a transaction varied from that imputed true value <strong>by</strong> (in <strong>the</strong> case of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Mishnah) 18%, <strong>the</strong> exchange was null. Not only so, but <strong>the</strong> sole<br />

definition of wealth for both Aristotleís and <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís economics<br />

was real estate, only land however small. Since land does not<br />

contract or expand, of course, <strong>the</strong> conception of an increase in value<br />

through o<strong>the</strong>r than a steady-state exchange of real value, ìtrue value,î<br />

between parties to a transaction lay outside of <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ory of economics.<br />

Therefore all profit, classified as usury, was illegitimate and must<br />

be prevented.<br />

The Mishnahís politics ñ its <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> legitimate use of violence<br />

and <strong>the</strong> disposition of power in society, ñ describes matters in<br />

a manner that is fundamentally philosophical in <strong>the</strong> Aristotelian context.<br />

Israel forms a political entity, fully empowered in an entirely<br />

secular sense, just as Scripture had described matters. To political<br />

institutions of <strong>the</strong> social order, king, priest, and court or civil administration,<br />

each in its jurisdiction, is assigned <strong>the</strong> right legitimately to<br />

exercise violence here on earth, corresponding to, and shared with,<br />

<strong>the</strong> same empowerment accorded to institutions of Heaven. These<br />

institutions moreover are conceived permanently to ration and rationalize<br />

<strong>the</strong> uses of that power. The picture, of course, is this-worldly,<br />

but, not distinguishing crime from sin, it is not secular, since <strong>the</strong> same<br />

system that legitimates king, high priest, and court posits in Heaven<br />

a corresponding politics, with God and <strong>the</strong> court on high exercising<br />

jurisdiction for some crimes or sins, <strong>the</strong> king, priesthood, or court<br />

down below for o<strong>the</strong>rs. Three specific traits, direct our attention toward<br />

<strong>the</strong> philosophical classification for <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics in<br />

30


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

framing a systemic composition, even though, to be sure, <strong>the</strong> parallels<br />

prove structural and general, ra<strong>the</strong>r than detailed and doctrinal as<br />

was <strong>the</strong> case with economics.<br />

First, like <strong>the</strong> politics of Plato and Aristotle, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics<br />

describes only a utopian politics, a structure and system of a fictive<br />

and a fabricated kind: intellectualsí conception of a politics. Serving<br />

<strong>the</strong> larger purpose of system-construction, politics of necessity emerges<br />

as invention, e.g., <strong>by</strong> Heaven or in <strong>the</strong> model of Heaven, not as<br />

a secular revision and reform of an existing system. While in <strong>the</strong><br />

middle second-century Rome incorporated <strong>the</strong>ir country, which <strong>the</strong>y<br />

called <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel and <strong>the</strong> Romans called Palestine, into its<br />

imperial system, denying Jews access to <strong>the</strong>ir capital, Jerusalem, permanently<br />

closing <strong>the</strong>ir cult-center, its Temple, <strong>the</strong> authorship of <strong>the</strong><br />

Mishnah described a government of a king and a high priest and an<br />

administration fully empowered to carry out <strong>the</strong> law through legitimate<br />

violence. So <strong>the</strong> two politics ñ <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís, <strong>the</strong> Greco-Roman<br />

tradition represented <strong>by</strong> Platoís and Aristotleís ñ share in common<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir origins in intellectualsí <strong>the</strong>oretical and imaginative life and form<br />

an instance, within that life, of <strong>the</strong> concrete realization of a larger<br />

<strong>the</strong>ory of matters. In strange and odd forms, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics<br />

falls into <strong>the</strong> class of <strong>the</strong> Staatsroman, <strong>the</strong> classification that encompasses,<br />

also, Platoís Republic and Aristotleís Politics. But, admittedly,<br />

<strong>the</strong> same may be said for <strong>the</strong> strange politics of <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch.<br />

Second and more to <strong>the</strong> point, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís sages stand well<br />

within <strong>the</strong> philosophical mode of political thought that begins with<br />

Aristotle, who sees politics as a fundamental component of his system<br />

when he says, ìpolitical scienceÖlegislates as to what we are to<br />

do and what we are to abstain from;î and, as to <strong>the</strong> institutionalization<br />

of power, one cannot imagine a more ample definition of <strong>the</strong><br />

Mishnahís systemís utilization of politics than that. While that statement,<br />

also, applies to <strong>the</strong> Pentateuchal politics, <strong>the</strong> systemic message<br />

borne <strong>by</strong> politics within <strong>the</strong> Pentateuchal system and that carried <strong>by</strong><br />

politics in <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís system do not correspond in any important<br />

ways. Aristotle and <strong>the</strong> philosophers of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah utilize politics to<br />

make systemic statements that correspond to one ano<strong>the</strong>r, in that both<br />

comparison and contrast prove apt and pointed. Both spoke of an<br />

empowered social entity; both took for granted that on-going institu-<br />

31


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

tions legitimately exercise governance in accord with a rationality<br />

discerned <strong>by</strong> distinguishing among those empowered to inflict sanctions.<br />

Both see politics as a medium for accomplishing systemic<br />

goals, and <strong>the</strong> goals derive from <strong>the</strong> larger purpose of <strong>the</strong> social order,<br />

to which politics is subordinated and merely instrumental.<br />

But, third, <strong>the</strong> comparison also yields a contrast of importance.<br />

Specifically, since political analysis comes only after economic analysis<br />

and depends upon <strong>the</strong> results of that prior inquiry into a social<br />

systemís disposition of scarce resources and <strong>the</strong>ory of control of<br />

means of production, we have no choice but to follow up <strong>the</strong> results<br />

of <strong>the</strong> preceding chapter and compare <strong>the</strong> politics of Aristotle and <strong>the</strong><br />

politics of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah, just as we did <strong>the</strong> economics of each system.<br />

For when we know who commands <strong>the</strong> means of production, we turn<br />

to inquire about who tells whom what to do and why: who legitimately<br />

coerces o<strong>the</strong>rs even through violence. And here <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís<br />

system decisively parts company with that of <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch and also<br />

with that of Aristotle. As to <strong>the</strong> former, <strong>the</strong> distributive economics of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Pentateuch, in <strong>the</strong> Priestly stratum at <strong>the</strong> foundations, assigns<br />

both economic and political privilege to <strong>the</strong> same class of persons,<br />

<strong>the</strong> priesthood, effecting distributive economics and distributive politics.<br />

But that is not <strong>the</strong> way things are in <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics,<br />

which distinguishes <strong>the</strong> one in control of <strong>the</strong> means of production<br />

from <strong>the</strong> one control of <strong>the</strong> right legitimately to commit violence. The<br />

former, <strong>the</strong> householder, is not a political entity at all, and, dominant<br />

as <strong>the</strong> subject of most sentences in <strong>the</strong> economic tractates, he never<br />

appears in <strong>the</strong> political ones at all.<br />

The point of difference from Aristotle is to be seen only within <strong>the</strong><br />

context of <strong>the</strong> similarity that permits comparison and contrast. While<br />

<strong>the</strong> economics of Aristotle and <strong>the</strong> economics of Judaism commence<br />

with <strong>the</strong> consideration of <strong>the</strong> place and power of <strong>the</strong> person (ìclass,î<br />

ìcaste,î economic interest) in control of <strong>the</strong> means of production, <strong>the</strong><br />

social metaphors that animate <strong>the</strong> politics of <strong>the</strong> two systems part<br />

company. Aristotle in his Politics is consistent in starting with that<br />

very same person (ìclassî) when he considers issues of power, producing<br />

a distributive politics to match his distributive economics. But<br />

<strong>the</strong> Mishnahís philosophers build <strong>the</strong>ir politics on with an altoge<strong>the</strong>r<br />

different set of building blocks. The simple fact is that <strong>the</strong> house-<br />

32


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

holder, fundamental to <strong>the</strong>ir economics, does not form a subject of<br />

political discourse at all and in no way constitutes a political class or<br />

caste. When <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís writers speak of economics, <strong>the</strong> subject of<br />

most active verbs is <strong>the</strong> householder; when <strong>the</strong>y speak of politics, <strong>the</strong><br />

householder never takes an active role or even appears as a differentiated<br />

political class. In this sense, <strong>the</strong> economics of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah<br />

is disembedded from its politics, and <strong>the</strong> politics from its economics.<br />

By contrast <strong>the</strong> economics and politics of Aristotleís system are deeply<br />

embedded within a larger and nurturing, wholly cogent <strong>the</strong>ory of<br />

political economy.<br />

VII. Characterizing Documents [2]: The Yerushalmiís<br />

Transformation of Philosophy into Religion<br />

The successor-system, represented <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel<br />

and related writings, ca. 400ñ450, presented a <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> social<br />

order lacking any <strong>the</strong>ory politics, philosophy, and economics of<br />

a conventional order. Now that we have seen <strong>the</strong> philosophical character<br />

of <strong>the</strong> initial systemís world-view, way of life, and <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong><br />

social entity, that is, its philosophy, economics, and politics, we ask<br />

how <strong>the</strong>se same categories fared in <strong>the</strong> successor-systemís documentary<br />

evidence. As a matter of simple fact, while sharing <strong>the</strong> goal of<br />

presenting a <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> social order, as to <strong>the</strong>ir categorical formations<br />

and structures, <strong>the</strong> initial, philosophical Judaic system and <strong>the</strong><br />

successor system differ in a fundamental way. Stated very simply,<br />

what happened is that <strong>the</strong> successor-system held up a mirror to <strong>the</strong><br />

received categories and so redefined matters that everything was reversed.<br />

Left became right, down, up, and, as we shall see, in a very<br />

explicit transvaluation of values, power is turned into weakness,<br />

things of real value is transformed into intangibles. This transvaluation,<br />

yielding <strong>the</strong> transformation of <strong>the</strong> prior system altoge<strong>the</strong>r, is<br />

articulated and not left implicit; it is a specific judgment made concrete<br />

through mythic and symbolic revision <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> later authorships<br />

<strong>the</strong>mselves. A free-standing document, received with reverence, served<br />

to precipitate <strong>the</strong> transvaluation of all of <strong>the</strong> values of that documentís<br />

initial statement.<br />

33


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

What <strong>the</strong> philosophical Judaism kept apart, <strong>the</strong> religious Judaism<br />

portrayed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel and related writings<br />

now joined toge<strong>the</strong>r, and it is just <strong>the</strong>re, at that critical joining, that<br />

we identify <strong>the</strong> key to <strong>the</strong> system: its reversal of a received point of<br />

differentiation, its introduction of new points of differentiation altoge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

The source of generative problems for <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics<br />

is simply not <strong>the</strong> same as <strong>the</strong> source that served <strong>the</strong> successor-systemís<br />

politics, and, systemic analysis being what it is, it is <strong>the</strong><br />

union of what was formerly asunder that identifies for us in quite<br />

objective terms <strong>the</strong> critical point of tension, <strong>the</strong> sources of problems,<br />

<strong>the</strong> centerpiece of systemic concern throughout. Let me show how<br />

this process of reintegration was worked out in <strong>the</strong> categorical reformation<br />

underway in <strong>the</strong> Yerushalmi and related writings.<br />

We begin with <strong>the</strong> shift from philosophy to Torah-study, that is<br />

from abstract reflection to concrete text-exegesis and digression out<br />

of sacred scripture; philosophy yields accurate and rational understanding<br />

of things; knowledge of <strong>the</strong> Torah, <strong>by</strong> contrast, yields power<br />

over this world and <strong>the</strong> next, capacity to coerce to <strong>the</strong> sageís will <strong>the</strong><br />

natural and supernatural worlds alike, on that account. The Torah is<br />

thus transformed from a philosophical enterprise of <strong>the</strong> sifting and<br />

classification of <strong>the</strong> facts of this world into a Gnostic process of<br />

changing persons through knowledge. It is on that basis that in <strong>the</strong><br />

Yerushalmi and related writings we find in <strong>the</strong> Torah <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category<br />

to philosophy in <strong>the</strong> Mishnah. Now we deal with a new<br />

intellectual category: Torah, meaning, religious learning in place of<br />

philosophical learning. What is <strong>the</strong> difference between <strong>the</strong> one and<br />

<strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r? First comes appeal to revealed truth as against perceived<br />

facts of nature and <strong>the</strong>ir regularities, second, <strong>the</strong> conception of an<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r-worldly source of explanation and <strong>the</strong> development of a propositional<br />

program focused upon not nature but Scripture, not <strong>the</strong><br />

nations in general but Israel in particular, and third, <strong>the</strong> Gnosticization<br />

of knowledge in <strong>the</strong> conception that knowing works salvation.<br />

What was to change, <strong>the</strong>refore, was not <strong>the</strong> mode of thought. What<br />

was new, ra<strong>the</strong>r, was <strong>the</strong> propositions to be demonstrated philosophically,<br />

and what made <strong>the</strong>se propositions new was <strong>the</strong> focus of interest,<br />

on <strong>the</strong> one side, and data assembled <strong>by</strong> way of demonstrating<br />

<strong>the</strong>m, on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r. From a philosophical proposition within <strong>the</strong><br />

34


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

framework of free-standing philosophy of religion and metaphysics<br />

that <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís system aimed to establish, we move to religious<br />

and even <strong>the</strong>ological propositions within <strong>the</strong> setting of contingent<br />

exegesis of Scripture. Then how do we know that what was changing<br />

was not merely topical and propositional but categorical in character?<br />

The answer lies in <strong>the</strong> symbolic vocabulary that would be commonly<br />

used in <strong>the</strong> late fourth and fifth century writings but not at all,<br />

or not in <strong>the</strong> same way, in <strong>the</strong> late second century ones. When people<br />

select data not formerly taken into account and represent <strong>the</strong> data <strong>by</strong><br />

appeal to symbols not formerly found evocative or expressive, or not<br />

utilized in <strong>the</strong> way in which <strong>the</strong>y later on were used, <strong>the</strong>n we are<br />

justified in raising questions about category-formation and <strong>the</strong> development<br />

of new categories alongside, or instead, of <strong>the</strong> received ones.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> case at hand, <strong>the</strong> character of <strong>the</strong> transformation we witness is<br />

shown <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> formation of a symbol serving to represent a category.<br />

To signal what is to come, we shall find <strong>the</strong> quite bald statement<br />

that, in <strong>the</strong> weighing of <strong>the</strong> comparative value of capital, which in<br />

this time and place meant land or real property, and Torah, Torah was<br />

worthwhile, and land was not ñ a symbolic syllogism that is explicit,<br />

concrete, repeated, and utterly fresh for <strong>the</strong> documents we consider.<br />

On <strong>the</strong> basis of that quite explicit symbolic comparison we speak of<br />

transformation ñ symbolic and <strong>the</strong>refore categorical transformation,<br />

not merely <strong>the</strong>matic shifts in emphasis or even propositional change.<br />

Here we witness in <strong>the</strong> successor-writings <strong>the</strong> formation of a system<br />

connected with, but asymmetrical to, <strong>the</strong> initial, philosophical one.<br />

Then for <strong>the</strong> world-view of <strong>the</strong> transformed Judaism, <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category<br />

to philosophy is formulated <strong>by</strong> appeal to <strong>the</strong> symbolic<br />

medium for <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological message, and it is <strong>the</strong> category, <strong>the</strong> Torah,<br />

expressed, as a matter of fact, <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> symbol of Torah.<br />

Philosophy sought <strong>the</strong> generalizations that cases might yield. So<br />

too did religion (and, in due course, <strong>the</strong>ology would too). But <strong>the</strong><br />

range of generalization vastly differed. Philosophy spoke of <strong>the</strong> nature<br />

of things, while <strong>the</strong>ology represented <strong>the</strong> special nature of Israel<br />

in particular. Philosophy <strong>the</strong>n appealed to <strong>the</strong> traits of things, while<br />

<strong>the</strong>ology to <strong>the</strong> special indicative qualities of Israel. What of <strong>the</strong><br />

propositional program that <strong>the</strong> document sets forth? The philosophical<br />

proposition of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah demonstrated from <strong>the</strong> facts and traits<br />

35


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

of things <strong>the</strong> hierarchical order of all being, with <strong>the</strong> obvious if merely<br />

implicit proposition that God stands at <strong>the</strong> head of <strong>the</strong> social order.<br />

The religious propositions of <strong>the</strong> successor-documents speak in o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

words of o<strong>the</strong>r things, having simply nothing in common with <strong>the</strong><br />

propositional program of <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís philosophy.<br />

The shift in economics is no less striking. Consideration of <strong>the</strong><br />

transvaluation of value brings us to <strong>the</strong> successor-systemís counterpart<br />

category, that is, <strong>the</strong> one that in context forms <strong>the</strong> counterpart to<br />

<strong>the</strong> Mishnahís concrete, this-worldly, material and tangible definition<br />

of value in conformity with <strong>the</strong> familiar, philosophical economics.<br />

We have now to ask, what, in place of <strong>the</strong> received definition of value<br />

and <strong>the</strong> economics <strong>the</strong>reof, did <strong>the</strong> new system set forth? The transformation<br />

of economics involved <strong>the</strong> redefinition of scarce and valued<br />

resources in so radical a manner that <strong>the</strong> concept of value, while<br />

remaining material in consequence and character, none<strong>the</strong>less took<br />

on a quite different sense altoge<strong>the</strong>r. The counterpart category of <strong>the</strong><br />

successor-system concerned <strong>the</strong>mselves with <strong>the</strong> same questions as<br />

did <strong>the</strong> conventional economics, presenting an economics in function<br />

and structure, but one that concerned things of value o<strong>the</strong>r than those<br />

identified <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> initial system. So indeed we deal with an economics,<br />

an economics of something o<strong>the</strong>r than real estate.<br />

But it was an economics just as profoundly embedded in <strong>the</strong> social<br />

order, just as deeply a political economics, just as pervasively a systemic<br />

economics, as <strong>the</strong> economics of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah and of Aristotle.<br />

Why so? Because issues such as <strong>the</strong> definition of wealth, <strong>the</strong> means<br />

of production and <strong>the</strong> meaning of control <strong>the</strong>reof, <strong>the</strong> disposition of<br />

wealth through distributive or o<strong>the</strong>r media, <strong>the</strong>ory of money, reward<br />

for labor, and <strong>the</strong> like ñ all <strong>the</strong>se issues found <strong>the</strong>ir answers in <strong>the</strong><br />

counterpart-category of economics, as much as in <strong>the</strong> received and<br />

conventional philosophical economics. The new ìscarce resourceî<br />

accomplished what <strong>the</strong> old did, but it was a different resource, a new<br />

currency. At stake in <strong>the</strong> category meant to address <strong>the</strong> issues of <strong>the</strong><br />

way of life of <strong>the</strong> social entity, <strong>the</strong>refore, were precisely <strong>the</strong> same<br />

considerations as confront economics in its (to us) conventional and<br />

commonplace, philosophical sense. But since <strong>the</strong> definition of wealth<br />

changes, as we have already seen, from land to Torah, much else<br />

would be transformed on that account.<br />

36


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

Land produced a living; so did Torah. Land formed <strong>the</strong> foundation<br />

of <strong>the</strong> social entity, so did Torah. The transvaluation of value was<br />

such that an economics concerning <strong>the</strong> rational management and increase<br />

of scarce resources worked itself out in such a way as to answer,<br />

for quite different things of value from real property or from<br />

capital such as we know as value, precisely <strong>the</strong> same questions that<br />

<strong>the</strong> received economics addressed in connection with wealth of a real<br />

character: land and its produce. Systemic transformation comes to<br />

<strong>the</strong> surface in articulated symbolic change. The utter transvaluation<br />

of value finds expression in a jarring juxtaposition, an utter shift of<br />

rationality, specifically, <strong>the</strong> substitution of Torah for real estate. We<br />

recall how in a successor-document (but in none prior to <strong>the</strong> fifth<br />

century compilations) Tarfon thought wealth took <strong>the</strong> form of land,<br />

while Aqiba explained to him that wealth takes <strong>the</strong> form of<br />

Torah-learning. That <strong>the</strong> sense is material and concrete is explicit:<br />

land for Torah, Torah for land. Thus, to repeat <strong>the</strong> matter of how<br />

Torah serves as an explicit symbol to convey <strong>the</strong> systemic worldview,<br />

let us note <strong>the</strong> main point of this passage:<br />

Leviticus Rabbah XXXIV:XVI<br />

1. B. R. Tarfon gave to R. Aqiba six silver centenarii, saying<br />

to him, ìGo, buy us a piece of land, so we can get a living<br />

from it and labor in <strong>the</strong> study of Torah toge<strong>the</strong>r.î<br />

C. He took <strong>the</strong> money and handed it over to scribes,<br />

Mishnah-teachers, and those who study Torah.<br />

D. After some time R. Tarfon met him and said to him, ìDid<br />

you buy <strong>the</strong> land that I mentioned to you?î<br />

E. He said to him, ìYes.î<br />

F. He said to him, ìIs it any good?î<br />

G. He said to him, ìYes.î<br />

H. He said to him, ìAnd do you not want to show it to me?î<br />

I. He took him and showed him <strong>the</strong> scribes, Mishnah teachers,<br />

and people who were studying Torah, and <strong>the</strong> Torah<br />

that <strong>the</strong>y had acquired.<br />

J. He said to him, ìIs <strong>the</strong>re anyone who works for nothing?<br />

Where is <strong>the</strong> deed covering <strong>the</strong> field?î<br />

K. He said to him, ìIt is with King David, concerning whom<br />

37


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

it is written, ëHe has scattered, he has given to <strong>the</strong> poor,<br />

his righteousness endures foreverí (Ps. 112:9).î<br />

The successor-system has its own definitions not only for learning,<br />

symbolized <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> word Torah but also for wealth, expressed in<br />

<strong>the</strong> same symbol. Accordingly, <strong>the</strong> category-formation for<br />

worldview, Torah in place of philosophy, dictates, as a matter of fact,<br />

a still more striking category-reformation, in which <strong>the</strong> entire matter<br />

of scarce resources is reconsidered, and a counterpart-category set<br />

forth.<br />

Philosophical politics tells who may legitimately do what to whom.<br />

When a politics wants to know who ought not to be doing what to<br />

whom, we find in hand <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category to <strong>the</strong> received politics<br />

ñ anti-politics, a <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> illegitimacy of power, <strong>the</strong> legitimacy<br />

of being victim. The received category set forth politics as <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>ory of legitimate violence, <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category, politics as <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>ory of illegitimate violence. The received politics had been one of<br />

isolation and interiority, portraying Israel as sui generis and autocephalic<br />

in all ways. The portrait in <strong>the</strong> successor-documents is<br />

a politics of integration among <strong>the</strong> nations; a perspective of exteriority<br />

replaces <strong>the</strong> inner-facing one of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah, which recognized no<br />

government of Israel but Godís ñ and <strong>the</strong>n essentially ab initio. The<br />

issues of power had found definition in questions concerning who<br />

legitimately inflicts sanctions upon whom within Israel. They now<br />

shift to give an account of who illegitimately inflicts sanctions upon<br />

(ìpersecutesî) Israel. So <strong>the</strong> points of systemic differentiation are<br />

radically revised, and <strong>the</strong> politics of <strong>the</strong> successor-system becomes<br />

not a revision of <strong>the</strong> received category but a formation that in many<br />

ways mirrors <strong>the</strong> received one: once more a counterpart-category.<br />

Just as, in <strong>the</strong> definition of scarce resources, Torah-study has replaced<br />

land, so now weakness forms <strong>the</strong> focus in place of strength, illegitimacy<br />

in place of legitimacy. Once more <strong>the</strong> mirror-image of <strong>the</strong> received<br />

category presents <strong>the</strong> perspective of <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category.<br />

Now we find <strong>the</strong> answers to <strong>the</strong>se questions: to whom is violence<br />

illegitimately done, and also, who may not legitimately inflict violence?<br />

With <strong>the</strong> move from <strong>the</strong> politics of legitimate to that of illegitimate<br />

power, <strong>the</strong> systemic interest now lies in defining not <strong>the</strong> who<br />

38


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

legitimately does what, but ra<strong>the</strong>r, <strong>the</strong> to whom, against whom, is<br />

power illegitimately exercised. And this movement represents not <strong>the</strong><br />

revision of <strong>the</strong> received category, but its inversion. For thought on<br />

legitimate violence is turned on its head. A new category of empowerment<br />

is worked out alongside <strong>the</strong> old. The entity that is victim of<br />

power is at <strong>the</strong> center, ra<strong>the</strong>r than <strong>the</strong> entity that legitimately exercises<br />

power. That entity is now Israel en masse, ra<strong>the</strong>r than <strong>the</strong> institutions<br />

and agencies of Israel on earth, Heaven above ñ a very considerable<br />

shift in thought on <strong>the</strong> systemic social entity. Israel as disempowered,<br />

ra<strong>the</strong>r than king, high priest, and sage as Israelís media of empowerment,<br />

defines <strong>the</strong> new systemís politics. The upshot is that <strong>the</strong> successor-system<br />

has reconsidered not merely <strong>the</strong> contents of <strong>the</strong> received<br />

structure, but <strong>the</strong> composition of <strong>the</strong> structure itself. In place of its<br />

philosophy, we have now a new medium for <strong>the</strong> formulation of<br />

a world-view; in place of a way of life formulated as an economics,<br />

a new valuation of value, in place of an account of <strong>the</strong> social entity<br />

framed as a politics, a new conception of legitimate violence. So<br />

much for <strong>the</strong> formation of counterpart categories.<br />

VIII. From Philosophy to Religion. Systemic Integration<br />

What holds <strong>the</strong> system toge<strong>the</strong>r identifies <strong>the</strong> critical question that<br />

<strong>the</strong> system as a whole means to answer, its aspect of self-evidence.<br />

Seeing <strong>the</strong> whole all at once, we may <strong>the</strong>n undertake that work of<br />

comparison and contrast that produces connections from system to<br />

system. How <strong>the</strong>n may we characterize <strong>the</strong> shift from a philosophical<br />

to a religious system? The answer derives from our choice of <strong>the</strong><br />

systemic center, e.g., a symbol that captures <strong>the</strong> whole, that holds <strong>the</strong><br />

whole toge<strong>the</strong>r. Certainly, <strong>the</strong> integration of <strong>the</strong> philosophical system<br />

is readily stated in a phrase: <strong>the</strong> philosophical Judaism set forth<br />

a system of hierarchical classification. Having emphasized <strong>the</strong> succession<br />

ñ philosophy out, Torah in ñ one may ask whe<strong>the</strong>r for <strong>the</strong><br />

religious system of Judaism, <strong>the</strong> systemic center is captured <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

symbol of <strong>the</strong> Torah ñ focused on <strong>the</strong> holy man sanctified through<br />

mastery of revelation. The answer is negative, because, as a matter of<br />

fact, knowledge of <strong>the</strong> Torah forms a way-station on a path to a more<br />

39


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

distant, more central goal, it is a dependent variable, contingent and<br />

stipulative. Then wherein lies <strong>the</strong> systemic center? It is <strong>the</strong> quest for<br />

zekhut, properly translated as ì<strong>the</strong> heritage of virtue and its consequent<br />

entitlements.î It is <strong>the</strong> simple fact that Torah-study is one means<br />

of attaining access to that heritage, of gaining zekhut ñ and <strong>the</strong>re are<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r equally suitable means. The zekhut gained <strong>by</strong> Torah-study is no<br />

different from <strong>the</strong> merit gained <strong>by</strong> acts of supererogatory grace. So<br />

we must take seriously <strong>the</strong> contingent status, <strong>the</strong> standing of a dependent<br />

variable, accorded to Torah-study in such stories as <strong>the</strong> following:<br />

Y. Taanit 3:11. IV<br />

C. There was a house that was about to collapse over <strong>the</strong>re<br />

[in Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia], and Rab set one of his disciples in <strong>the</strong><br />

house, until <strong>the</strong>y had cleared out everything from <strong>the</strong><br />

house. When <strong>the</strong> disciple left <strong>the</strong> house, <strong>the</strong> house collapsed.<br />

D. And <strong>the</strong>re are those who say that it was R. Adda bar<br />

Ahwah.<br />

E. Sages sent and said to him, ìWhat sort of good deeds are<br />

to your credit [that you have that much merit]?î<br />

F. He said to <strong>the</strong>m, ìIn my whole life no man ever got to<br />

<strong>the</strong> synagogue in <strong>the</strong> morning before I did. I never left<br />

anybody <strong>the</strong>re when I went out. I never walked four cubits<br />

without speaking words of Torah. Nor did I ever<br />

mention teachings of Torah in an inappropriate setting.<br />

I never laid out a bed and slept for a regular period of<br />

time. I never took great strides among <strong>the</strong> associates.<br />

I never called my fellow <strong>by</strong> a nickname. I never rejoiced<br />

in <strong>the</strong> embarrassment of my fellow. I never cursed my<br />

fellow when I was lying <strong>by</strong> myself in bed. I never walked<br />

over in <strong>the</strong> marketplace to someone who owed me<br />

money.<br />

G. ìIn my entire life I never lost my temper in my household.î<br />

H. This was meant to carry out that which is stated as follows:<br />

ìI will give heed to <strong>the</strong> way that is blameless. Oh<br />

40


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

when wilt thou come to me? I will walk with integrity of<br />

heart within my houseî (Ps. 101:2).<br />

What is striking in this story is that mastery of <strong>the</strong> Torah is only<br />

one means of attaining <strong>the</strong> zekhut that had enabled <strong>the</strong> sage to keep<br />

<strong>the</strong> house from collapsing. And Torah-study is not <strong>the</strong> primary means<br />

of attaining zekhut. The question at E provides <strong>the</strong> key, toge<strong>the</strong>r with<br />

its answer at F. For what <strong>the</strong> sage did to gain such remarkable zekhut<br />

is not to master such-and-so many tractates of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah. It was<br />

ra<strong>the</strong>r acts of courtesy, consideration, gentility, restraint. These produced<br />

zekhut, all of <strong>the</strong>m acts of self-abnegation or <strong>the</strong> avoidance of<br />

power over o<strong>the</strong>rs and <strong>the</strong> submission to <strong>the</strong> will and <strong>the</strong> requirement<br />

of self-esteem of o<strong>the</strong>rs. Torah-study is simply an item on a list of<br />

actions or attitudes that generate zekhut.<br />

Here, in a moral setting, we find <strong>the</strong> politics replicated: <strong>the</strong> form of<br />

power that <strong>the</strong> system promises derives from <strong>the</strong> rejection of power<br />

that <strong>the</strong> world recognizes ñ legitimate violence replaced <strong>by</strong> legitimation<br />

of <strong>the</strong> absence of <strong>the</strong> power to commit violence or of <strong>the</strong> failure<br />

to commit violence. And, when we ask, whence that sort of power?<br />

<strong>the</strong> answer lies in <strong>the</strong> gaining of zekhut in a variety of ways, not in <strong>the</strong><br />

acquisition of zekhut through <strong>the</strong> study of <strong>the</strong> Torah solely or even<br />

primarily. But, we note, <strong>the</strong> story at hand speaks of a sage in particular.<br />

He has gained zekhut <strong>by</strong> not acting <strong>the</strong> way sages are commonly<br />

assumed to behave but in a humble way.<br />

Ordinary folk, not disciples of sages, have access to zekhut entirely<br />

outside of study of <strong>the</strong> Torah. In stories not told about rabbis,<br />

a single remarkable deed, exemplary for its deep humanity, sufficed<br />

to win for an ordinary person <strong>the</strong> zekhut ñ ì<strong>the</strong> heritage of virtue and<br />

its consequent entitlementsî ñ that elicits <strong>the</strong> same marks of supernatural<br />

favor enjoyed <strong>by</strong> some rabbis on account of <strong>the</strong>ir Torah-study.<br />

Accordingly, <strong>the</strong> systemic centrality of zekhut in <strong>the</strong> structure, <strong>the</strong><br />

critical importance of <strong>the</strong> heritage of virtue toge<strong>the</strong>r with its supernatural<br />

entitlements ñ <strong>the</strong>se emerge in a striking claim. It is framed in<br />

extreme form ñ ano<strong>the</strong>r mark of <strong>the</strong> unique place of zekhut within <strong>the</strong><br />

system. Even though a man was degraded, one action sufficed to win<br />

for him that heavenly glory to which rabbis in lives of Torah-study<br />

aspired.<br />

41


JACOB NEUSNER<br />

The mark of <strong>the</strong> systemís integration around zekhut lies in its insistence<br />

that all Israelites, not only sages, could gain zekhut for <strong>the</strong>mselves<br />

(and <strong>the</strong>ir descendants). A single remarkable deed, exemplary<br />

for its deep humanity, sufficed to win for an ordinary person <strong>the</strong><br />

zekhut that elicits supernatural favor enjoyed <strong>by</strong> some rabbis on account<br />

of <strong>the</strong>ir Torah-study. The centrality of zekhut in <strong>the</strong> systemic<br />

structure, <strong>the</strong> critical importance of <strong>the</strong> heritage of virtue toge<strong>the</strong>r<br />

with its supernatural entitlements <strong>the</strong>refore emerge in a striking claim.<br />

Even though a man was degraded, one action sufficed to win for him<br />

that heavenly glory to which rabbis in general aspired. The rabbinical<br />

storyteller whose writing we shall consider assuredly identifies with<br />

this lesson, since it is <strong>the</strong> point of his story and its climax.<br />

Zekhut serves, in particular, that counterpart category that speaks<br />

of not legitimate but illegitimate violence, not power but weakness.<br />

In context, time and again, we observe that zekhut is <strong>the</strong> power of <strong>the</strong><br />

weak. People who through <strong>the</strong>ir own merit and capacity can accomplish<br />

nothing, can accomplish miracles through what o<strong>the</strong>rs do for<br />

<strong>the</strong>m in leaving a heritage of zekhut.. And, not to miss <strong>the</strong> stunning<br />

message of <strong>the</strong> triplet of stories cited above, zekhut also is what <strong>the</strong><br />

weak and excluded and despised can do that outweighs in power<br />

what <strong>the</strong> great masters of <strong>the</strong> Torah have accomplished. In <strong>the</strong> context<br />

of a system that represents Torah as supernatural, that claim of priority<br />

for zekhut represents a considerable transvaluation of power, as<br />

much as of value. And, <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> way, zekhut also forms <strong>the</strong> inheritance<br />

of <strong>the</strong> disinherited: what you receive as a heritage when you have<br />

nothing in <strong>the</strong> present and have gotten nothing in <strong>the</strong> past, that scarce<br />

resource that is free and unearned but much valued. So let us dwell<br />

upon <strong>the</strong> definitive character of <strong>the</strong> transferability of zekhut in its<br />

formulation, zekhut abot, <strong>the</strong> zekhut handed on <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> ancestors, <strong>the</strong><br />

transitive character of <strong>the</strong> concept and its standing as a heritage of<br />

entitlements.<br />

So zekhut forms <strong>the</strong> political economy of <strong>the</strong> religious system of<br />

<strong>the</strong> social order put forward <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel and<br />

related writings. Here we find <strong>the</strong> power that brought about <strong>the</strong> transvaluation<br />

of value, <strong>the</strong> reversal of <strong>the</strong> meaning of power and its legitimacy.<br />

Zekhut expresses and accounts for <strong>the</strong> economic valuation of<br />

<strong>the</strong> scarce resource of what we should call moral authority. Zekhut<br />

42


THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />

stands for <strong>the</strong> political valorization of weakness, that which endows<br />

<strong>the</strong> weak with a power that is not only <strong>the</strong>ir own but <strong>the</strong>ir ancestorsí.<br />

It enables <strong>the</strong> weak to accomplish goals through not <strong>the</strong>ir own power,<br />

but <strong>the</strong>ir very incapacity to accomplish acts of violence ñ a transvaluation<br />

as radical as that effected in economics. And zekhut holds<br />

toge<strong>the</strong>r both <strong>the</strong> economics and <strong>the</strong> politics of this Judaism: it makes<br />

<strong>the</strong> same statement twice. Zekhut as <strong>the</strong> power of <strong>the</strong> powerless, <strong>the</strong><br />

riches of <strong>the</strong> disinherited, <strong>the</strong> valuation and valorization of <strong>the</strong> will of<br />

those who have no right to will. In that conception <strong>the</strong> politics, social<br />

order, and <strong>the</strong>ology of Rabbinic Judaism came toge<strong>the</strong>r. For <strong>the</strong> millennium<br />

and a half that would follow, this is <strong>the</strong> Judaism that governed.<br />

43


EINE J‹DISCH-DEUTSCHE HANDSCHRIFT<br />

DES BUCHDRUCKERS UND KONVERTITEN<br />

JOHANNES HELICZ, BRESLAU 1537<br />

Martin Rothkegel, Praha<br />

Der (vom Namen der ostgalizischen Stadt Halicz abgeleitete) Familienname<br />

Helicz ist indirekt mit der Kralitzer Bibel, der ber¸hmten<br />

Bibel¸bersetzung der Bˆhmischen Br¸der, verbunden. Die Kralitzer<br />

Bibel entstand in den Jahren 1579ñ1594 als kollektive Arbeit einer<br />

Kommission von br¸derischen Gelehrten an der Br¸derschule Eibenschitz<br />

(IvanËice) in M‰hren. Zu den ‹bersetzern gehˆrte zeitweilig<br />

Lukas Helicz, ein Hebraist j¸discher Herkunft, der 1564 der polnischen<br />

Unit‰t beigetreten war, 1575 in Posen (PoznaÒ) br¸derischer<br />

Diakon wurde und 1581 in Eibenschitz zum Br¸derpriester geweiht<br />

wurde. Er war 1589 Rektor der deutschen Br¸derschule und deutscher<br />

Prediger in Fulnek, bis er sich, offenbar im Unfrieden mit der<br />

m‰hrischen Unit‰t, wieder nach Polen wandte. 1<br />

Lukas Helicz stammte aus der ersten j¸dischen Druckerfamilie<br />

Polens. Die drei Br¸der Samuel, Asser und Eljakim ben Chajim<br />

Helicz hatten um 1534 in Krakau die erste hebr‰ische Buchdruckerei<br />

des Kˆnigreiches begr¸ndet. Ihre Erzeugnisse, die heute zu den typographischen<br />

Seltenheiten gehˆren, waren durchweg gelehrten und<br />

religiˆsen Inhalts. Einer der drei Br¸der, Samuel Helicz, druckte<br />

aufler in Krakau auch im schlesischen Oels (nachweisbar ist ein Siddur<br />

von 1536), jedoch wurde die Oelser Werkstadt 1536 von einem<br />

1 Vgl. J. Th. M¸ller, Geschichte der Bˆhmischen Br¸der, Bd. 3: Die polnische<br />

Unit‰t 1548ñ1793. Die bˆhmisch-m‰hrische Unit‰t 1575ñ1781, S. 291f.; J. Fiedler<br />

(Hg.), Todtenbuch der Geistlichkeit der Bˆhmischen Br¸der, Wien 1863 (Fontes<br />

rerum Austriacarum I/5, S. 213ñ310), S. 281; Fr. Hrejsa, SborovÈ Jednoty bratrskÈ,<br />

VIII.: Zpr·vy o sborech bratrsk˝ch a o brat¯Ìch v PrusÌch, Polsku, na Slovensku<br />

a†v†cizinÏ, in: RefomaËnÌ sbornÌk 7 (1939), S. 10ñ114, dort S. 50; J. VolfÇ N·boûenskÈ<br />

h·d·nÌ Luk·öe Helice ve Fulneku r. 1589, in: »asopis vlasteneckÈho spolku<br />

musejnÌho v Olomouci 36 (1925), S. 75ñ82.<br />

44


EINE J‹DISCH-DEUTSGHE HANDSCHRIFT DES BUCHDRUCKERS UND KONVERTITEN Ö<br />

Unwetter zerstˆrt. 2 Im Februar und M‰rz 1537 traten Samuel, Eljakim,<br />

Asser und noch ein vierter Bruder zusammen mit ihrer Groflmutter,<br />

ihrem Vater Chajim Helicz und ihrer Schwester zum Christentum<br />

¸ber. Die Gr¸nde f¸r die Konversion sind nicht bekannt. Es<br />

f‰llt aber auf, dafl es gerade unter hebr‰ischen Druckern, Setzern und<br />

Korrektoren des 16. Jhs. in mehreren F‰llen zu ‹bertritten zum Christentum<br />

kam.<br />

Samuel nannte sich nach der Taufe Andreas (1), ein weiterer Bruder<br />

ebenso, d. h. Andreas (2), die beiden andern Johannes und Paulus.<br />

Samuel-Andreas (1) und wohl auch Johannes empfingen die Taufe<br />

in Breslau. Die Krakauer Druckerei fuhr zun‰chst mit der<br />

Produktion j¸discher B¸cher in hebr‰ischer Sprache fort (noch 1539<br />

druckte Johannes Helicz religiˆse j¸dische Texte), jedoch verloren<br />

die Gebr¸der Helicz ihre gesamte j¸dische Kundschaft, f¸r die die<br />

Erzeugnisse der von der j¸dischen Religion abtr¸nnigen Buchdrukker<br />

aus religionsgesetzlichen Gr¸nden untauglich geworden war.<br />

Trotz der Anstrengungen des polnischen Kˆnigs, die polnischen<br />

Judengemeinden durch Dekrete vom 28. M‰rz und 16. Juni 1537 zum<br />

Kauf der von der Offizin Helicz gedruckten hebr‰ischen B¸cher zu<br />

zwingen, muflten die Br¸der die Produktion von j¸dischen religiˆsen<br />

Texten in der Folgezeit aufgeben und ihre gemeinsame Firma auflˆsen.<br />

Die durch ein kˆnigliches Dekret vom 31. Dezember 1539 eingesetzten<br />

Konkursverwalter stellten einen unverk‰uflichen Bestand<br />

von 3350 B‰nden fest, den sie auf 1600 fl. sch‰tzten. Die polnische<br />

Judenschaft wurde verpflichtet, diese Summe in mehreren Raten zu<br />

erlegen und das gesamte B¸cherlager zu ¸bernehmen. In den folgenden<br />

drei Jahrzehnten ruhte in Krakau der hebr‰ische Buchdruck. 3<br />

Die Wege der Br¸der trennten sich bereits vor der Liquidierung<br />

der Firma. Andreas (1) blieb nach seiner Taufe am 11. M‰rz 1537 im<br />

evangelischen Breslau, liefl sich dort als Buchbinder nieder und erhielt<br />

am 29. Januar 1538 das B¸rgerrecht. Um 1551 floh er jedoch in<br />

das Osmanische Reich, um wieder zum Judentum zur¸ckzukehren.<br />

2 Zur Offizin Helicz vgl. M. Balaban, Zur Geschichte der hebr‰ischen Druckereien<br />

in Polen, in: Soncino-Bl‰tter 3 (1929/30), S. 1ñ50, dort 1ñ9. Siehe auch Art. Halicz,<br />

in: Encyclopaedia Judaica, Bd. 7, Berlin 1931, Sp. 871f.; Art. Halicz, in:<br />

Encyclopaedia Judaica, Bd. 7, Jerusalem 1971, Sp. 1189ñ1191.<br />

3 Vgl. Balaban, Geschichte, S. 2ñ5 und 36, 41ñ 44, Dok. Nr. IñIII.<br />

45


MARTIN ROTHKEGEL<br />

Der Breslauer Chronist Nikolaus Pol berichtet ¸ber ihn: Ñ1537, am<br />

Sontag Laetare, [Ö] zu St. Elisabeth [Ö] zur vesper ward ein Jude<br />

Andreas getaufft. Hielt sich eine zeitlang ehrlich und from, da ihm<br />

aber die leute viel getrauet und er einen statlichen handel f¸hrete und<br />

man am wenigsten auff ihn gedancken hatte, ist er auffgestanden, hat<br />

die leute betrogen, weib und kinder sitzen lassen.ì 4 Hans Dernschwamm,<br />

Mitglied einer kaiserlichen Gesandtschaft an die Pforte,<br />

traf den aus Breslau geflohenen Andreas 1553 in Konstantinopel an,<br />

wo dieser unter seinem Geburtsnamen Samuel b. Chajim Helic eine<br />

hebr‰ische Druckerei betrieb. Andreas (2) wurde dagegen B¸rger und<br />

Kaufmann in Krakau und starb zwischen 1557 und 1565. 5<br />

Paulus hielt sich nach seiner Taufe vor¸bergehend in Posen auf,<br />

wo der Posener Wojwode Lukasz GÛrka bei der Taufe seines Sohnes,<br />

des sp‰teren Br¸derpriesters Lukas, Pate stand (bei dieser Taufe, die<br />

der katholische Bischof von Posen vollzog, wurden insgesamt 14 j¸dische<br />

Personen getauft). Beseelt von Missionseifer druckte Paulus<br />

Helicz 1540/41 in Krakau das Neue Testament in der deutschen ‹bersetzung<br />

Martin Lu<strong>the</strong>rs mit hebr‰ischen Lettern. Das Werk ist in einer<br />

1541 datierten Dedikationsepistel dem Bischof von Krakau und<br />

Erzbischof-Primas von Gnesen, Petrus Gamrat, einem heftigen Gegner<br />

der Reformation, gewidmet. Helicz berichtet in dieser Widmungsvorrede,<br />

dafl die Rabbiner in ihren H‰user zwar sehr wohl das Neue<br />

Testament besitzen und lesen, es aber vor dem Volk verbergen, daher<br />

m¸sse es den Juden zum Zweck ihrer Bekehrung in ihrer Alltagssprache<br />

zug‰nglich gemacht werden. (Dafl Lu<strong>the</strong>rs Bibel¸bersetzung in<br />

dieser Gestalt im katholischen Krakau unter bischˆflichem Schutz im<br />

Druck erschien, darf als Kuriosum gelten.) 6 Auch Paulus Helicz liefl<br />

4<br />

Nikolaus Pol, Hemerologion Silesiacum Vratislaviense [Ö] Leiptzig [Ö] Anno<br />

M. DC. XII., S. 97. Eine handschriftliche Breslauer Chronik in der Universit‰tsbiblio<strong>the</strong>k<br />

Breslau, Sign. IV F 121, f¸gt hinzu, dafl Andreas Ñmit dreyen seinen<br />

kindernì die Taufe empfing.<br />

5 Balaban, Geschichte, S. 5, 32, 50.<br />

6 Ebd. S. 7ñ9. Das Titelblatt des seltenen Druckes ist bei Balaban, Geschichte,<br />

S. 38, nach einem Exemplar der Jagiellonischen Biblio<strong>the</strong>k in Krakau (non vidi)<br />

reproduziert und lautet:<br />

èøòÔ àã ñàã ´ èðòîéèñòè Öåð ñàã<br />

óÕà èùéà ñàã ´ ïåàéìòéðÏáò èðòðéâ<br />

êÖìâ ´ èÏôùèàá éÏëéìàøå ïÖà ùèÖåã<br />

äáåè äøåùÒá ïùòÖøéáò íéà éÔ<br />

Gedrukt zu krokau durch Paul helic im Iar M. D. XXXX.<br />

46


EINE J‹DISCH-DEUTSGHE HANDSCHRIFT DES BUCHDRUCKERS UND KONVERTITEN Ö<br />

sich im evangelischen Breslau nieder. 1543 druckte er im Breslauer<br />

Vorort Hundsfeld ein praktisches Lehrbuch der j¸disch-deutschen<br />

Sprache und Schrift f¸r christliche Leser, insbesondere Kaufleute,<br />

die gesch‰ftlich mit Juden zu tun hatten. 7 In Breslau besafl er bis<br />

1548 auch ein Haus, mit dessen Verkauf sich seine Spur verliert. 8<br />

Der vierte Bruder, Johannes, kehrte nach dreij‰hrigem Aufenthalt<br />

in Breslau nach Krakau zur¸ck und druckte dort 1540 sieben lateinische<br />

christliche Schriften. Auch an einem Krakauer lateinischen<br />

Druck von 1561 war er anscheinend noch beteiligt. 9<br />

Eine interessante Erg‰nzung zu den sp‰rlichen Nachrichten ¸ber<br />

die spektakul‰re Konversion der Familie Helicz ist eine Handschrift<br />

des Johannes Helicz von 1537, die aus der Biblio<strong>the</strong>k des Franziskanerklosters<br />

in Skalitz an der March (Skalica na Slovensku)<br />

stammt 10 und sich heute in der Slowakischen Nationalbiblio<strong>the</strong>k in<br />

Martin befindet. 11 Der wohlerhaltene Band umfaflt 196 Papierbl‰tter<br />

im Format 210 x 150 mm. Der gesamte enthaltene Text ist von derselben,<br />

gleichm‰fligen und sorgf‰ltigen Hand in schwarzer und roter<br />

Tinte in einer aschkenasischen Halbkursive (Raschi-Schrift) geschrieben.<br />

Daneben ist f¸r ‹berschriften und Initialen, gelegentlich auch<br />

f¸r hervorzuhebende Worte im Text, Quadratschrift verwendet. Die<br />

Handschrift hat einen schˆnen Renaissance-Ledereinband, wohl ein<br />

Werk der Breslauer Buchbinderwerkstatt des Samuel-Andreas Helicz,<br />

mit reicher Blindpr‰gung. Auf der Vorderseite ist mit groflen lateinischen<br />

und hebr‰ischen Drucklettern folgende Aufschrift mit einem<br />

7 Der Titel lautet: Elemental / oder leseb¸chlen / Doraus meniglich / mit gutem<br />

grund vnderwisen wirt : wie man de˘tsche b¸chlen / Missiuen oder Sendbriue /<br />

Schuldbriue / so mit ebreischen / ader J¸dischen buchstaben geschriben werden :<br />

Auch die Zal / Jar / Monad / vnd anders zu gehˆrig: lesen vnd versten sol. Jtzt<br />

ne˘lich an tag geben. Gedruckt zum hundesfeld. d˘rch paul helicz. M. D. XXXX iij.<br />

Exemplar: Universit‰tsbiblio<strong>the</strong>k Breslau, Sign. 4 E 263. Von diesem Druck erschien<br />

ein Faksimile mit einem Vorwort von Max Silberberg, Breslau 1929 (non<br />

vidi). Vgl. M. Brann, Geschichte der Juden in Schlesien, Breslau 1910, S. 167ñ173;<br />

N. Shtif, Paul Helitz: ÑElemental oder Leseb¸chlein:ì (Hundsfeld 1543), in: Studies<br />

in Philology 3 (1929), Sp. 515ñ524; J. Benzing, Die Buchdrucker des 16. und<br />

17. Jahrhunderts im deutschen Sprachgebiet, 2. Aufl., Wiesbaden 1982 (Beitr‰ge<br />

zum Buch- und Biblio<strong>the</strong>kswesen, 12), S. 199f.<br />

8 Balaban, Geschichte, S. 9.<br />

9 Balaban, Geschichte, S. 5ñ7.<br />

10 Zur Biblio<strong>the</strong>k der Skalitzer Franziskaner und ihrer Liquidierung im Jahr 1950<br />

vgl. º. KoöÌk, Z duchovnÈho dediËstva Skalice, Skalica 1996, S. 29ff.<br />

11 Martin, Slovensk· n·rodn· kniûnica, ArchÌv literat˙ry a umenia, Sign. J 2870.<br />

47


MARTIN ROTHKEGEL<br />

hebr‰ischen Motto aus Ps. 19,8 eingepreflt: ÑDAS NEVE TESTA-<br />

MENT / ùôð úáéùî äîéîú ´ä úøåú / MDXXXVII.ì Auf dem Buchr¸cken<br />

ist die Aufschrift çéùîä úøåú (Gesetz Christi) zu lesen, ein naheliegendes<br />

hebr‰isches ƒquivalent f¸r ÑEvangeliumì, das sich auch bei<br />

dem zeitgenˆssischen christlichen Hebraisten Sebastian M¸nster findet,<br />

der seiner hebr‰ischen Ausgabe des Matth‰us-Evangeliums (Basel<br />

1537) den Titel çéùîä úøåú gab. 12<br />

Die Handschrift enth‰lt auf Bl. 3 a bis 158 a die vier Evangelien in<br />

der deutschen ‹bersetzung Martin Lu<strong>the</strong>rs in hebr‰ischer Schrift.<br />

Der zugrundeliegende Lu<strong>the</strong>rtext ist, wie Stichproben ergeben, derjenige<br />

der 1534 in Wittenberg erschienenen Gesamtausgabe der Lu<strong>the</strong>rbibel.<br />

Die Marginalien der Lu<strong>the</strong>rbibel sind in roter Schrift als Erl‰uterungen<br />

neben die entsprechenden Textabschnitte gestellt. Um den<br />

Lu<strong>the</strong>rtext der j¸disch-deutschen Mundart n‰herzubringen, sind gewisse<br />

lexikalische ƒnderungen vorgenommen worden. Die vier Evangelien<br />

werden abgeschlossen mit einem auf Jes. 40,29 anspielenden<br />

Lobspruch auf Bl. 158 a : äáøé äîöò íéðåà ïéàìå çë óòéì ïúðä êåøá.<br />

Es folgt, nach mehreren leeren Seiten, auf Bl. 161 a bis 194 b der<br />

bekannte mittelalterliche Missionstraktat ÑSendbrief des Rabbi Samuel<br />

von Marokkoì, transkribiert nach einem Druck der ‹bersetztung<br />

des Lu<strong>the</strong>raners Wenzeslaus Linck (gedruckt in Zwickau<br />

1524). Dafl Helicz diesen Text in seine persˆnliche Evangelienhandschrift<br />

einf¸gte, ist eine rezeptionsgeschichtlich interessante Tatsache,<br />

zeigt sie doch, dafl dieser in der modernen Forschung wenig<br />

gesch‰tzte Traktat (offenbar eine Mystifikation eines dominikanischen<br />

Verfassers des 14. Jhs.) 13 auch bei Lesern, die, wie die Gebr¸der<br />

Helicz, zur j¸dischen intellektuellen Elite des 16. Jahrhunderts zu<br />

z‰hlen sind, eine positive Aufnahme finden konnte.<br />

Am Ende des Bandes findet sich auf Bl. 194 b ein Kolophon mit<br />

12 çéùîä úøåú Evangelium secundum Matthaeum in lingua Hebraica cum versione<br />

Latina atque succinctis annotationibus Sebastiani Munsteri [Ö] Opus antiquum,<br />

sed iam recens ex officina Henrici Petri typis evulgatum. Basileae Anno restitutae<br />

salutis MDXXXVII Mense Martio. (Exemplar: Wolfenb¸ttel, Herzog August Biblio<strong>the</strong>k,<br />

Sign. G 209 Helmst. 2∞ [2]).<br />

13 Vgl. O. Limor, The Epistle of Rabbi Samuel of Marocco: A Best-Seller in <strong>the</strong><br />

World of Polemics, in: Contra Iudaeos: Ancient and Medieval Polemics between<br />

Christians and Jews, ed. <strong>by</strong> O. Limor and G. Stroumsa, T¸bingen 1996 (Texts and<br />

Studies in Medieval and Early Modern Judaism, 10), S. 177ñ194.<br />

48


EINE J‹DISCH-DEUTSGHE HANDSCHRIFT DES BUCHDRUCKERS UND KONVERTITEN Ö<br />

den Angaben von Ort und Datum der Fertigstellung (Breslau, 25. Juli<br />

1537) in J¸disch-Deutsch und Latein. Der j¸disch-deutsche Wortlaut<br />

sei hier als eine Probe der von Helicz verwandten Sprachform und<br />

Orthographie wiedergegeben:<br />

:èðàðéâ êéà ïéá õéìòä ñéðäé:èðä øéðÖî èÏôéøù àéã èñéà ñàã<br />

:âè ñáå÷àé è÷ðàñ ïéâéìÖä íòã ïà èòãðòìåÏô :àìñòøá èàèù øòã ïéà ïòáéøùéâ àéä<br />

:øàé âéñÖøã ´ðåà ïòáéæ ´ðåà èøãðåä óðéÏô èðòæéåè:ñåèñéøä÷ èøåáéâ øòã êàð èìéö ïî àæ<br />

:ïòÏôåàÔ ÷éöðòÔö ´ðåà àÖÔö èøåá øòãéÔ øéðÖî êàð ´ðåà<br />

:èåä èòðéÏôåàéâ õøòä ´ðåà ïéâéåà ïÖî øéî øòã èåâ øòã ´ðåà<br />

:ïòìòãðÔ åö êàð èøàÔ ïéëéìèåâ íéðÖæ<br />

:óìéä ´ðåà ãàðéâ ïòäÖìøÏô øòèÖÔ ìéÔ èåâ áåà øéî ìåæ øòã<br />

:èñéøä÷ åæòé øòèñåøè ïòøòæðåà ïà ïòáéåìéâ ïòèñòÏô ïÖà ´ðåà<br />

14 :ïîà éäé ïë:ïàî ïéâéáéåìéâ èñéø÷ íòçéìèéà íéðÖà ´ðåà øéî<br />

Es folgt in zierlicher und ge¸bter lateinischer Handschrift ein lateinisches<br />

Kolophon: ÑHic liber scriptus a Iohanne Helicz anno recuperatae<br />

salutis 1537 die divi Iacobi, quo cum ei, tum aviae meae et<br />

sorori eius ac parenti meo, fratribus eius etc., stella et lux verbi Dei<br />

in tenebris (scilicet in Iudaismo) apparuit, qua duce ad Dominum<br />

Christum, regem et salvatorem eius, mera gratia adducti perque baptismum<br />

regenerati, cui cum Patre et Spiritu Sancto gloria in saecula<br />

saeculorum, Amen. 2. Pet. 1d. Johann. 6. Hese. 11.36.ì Gewifl war<br />

der Schreiber dieser Zeilen (trotz gewisser Schwierigkeiten beim Gebrauch<br />

der lateinischen Pronomina) bereits l‰ngst vor seiner? bei der<br />

Niederschrift nur wenige Monate zur¸ckliegenden? Taufe mit der<br />

lateinischen Sprache vertraut, was auch f¸r die Bildungsgeschichte<br />

der Krakauer Juden dieser Zeit von Interesse ist. Leider erfahren wir<br />

nichts ¸ber die n‰heren Umst‰nde, unter denen dem Konvertiten, wie<br />

er sich ausdr¸ckte, Ñder Stern und das Licht des Wortes Gottes in der<br />

Dunkelheit erschienenì und die ihn veranlaflten, mit seinen Verwand-<br />

14 ÑDas ist die schrift meiner hand, Johannes Helicz bin ich genannt. Hie geschrieben<br />

in der stadt Breslau, vollendet an dem heiligen Sankt Jakobs tag, so man z‰hlt<br />

nach der geburt Christus tausendf¸nfhundert und siebenunddreiflig jahr, und nach<br />

meiner wiederburt zweiundzwanzig wochen. Und der Gott, der mir mein augen und<br />

herz geˆffnet hat, seinem gˆttlichen wort nachzuwandelen, der soll mir (ob Gott<br />

will) weiter verleihen genad und hilf und ein festen gelauben an unseren trˆster Jesu<br />

Christ, mir und einem jedlichem christgel‰ubigen mann. Ken j e hi [= so gesche es],<br />

Amen.ì<br />

49


MARTIN ROTHKEGEL<br />

ten die Taufe zu empfangen, in deren Folge die ganze Familie ihre<br />

wirtschaftliche Existenzgrundlage verlieren sollte. Johannes Helicz<br />

besafl die Handschrift mindestens bis zum Jahr 1543. Damals trug er<br />

auf Bl. 1 a folgenden Besitzvermerk mit einem Zitat aus 1. Kor. 1,23<br />

in deutscher Kursivschrift ein: ÑInn dem namen der ungeteylten heyligen<br />

Dreyfeldigkeyth, Amen. 1.5.4.3. Der liebe Paulus schreybth in<br />

seiner epistel: Cristus predigenn ist denn heyden eyn schpˆtth, den<br />

Judenn eyn lachenn, unnd uns eynn ebige seligkeyth. Ü Amen Ü Hanns<br />

Helicz. H Ü H.ì<br />

Von sp‰teren Besitzern des 16. und fr¸hen 17. Jhs. stammen einige<br />

Notizen und Federproben in polnischer und j¸disch-deutscher<br />

Sprache auf den urspr¸nglich leeren Seiten 195 b ñ196 b und auf der<br />

Innenseite des hinteren Buchdeckels. Von Interesse ist die Eintragung<br />

auf Bl. 194 b : ÑEx libris Ladislai de Rewa, anno 1643.ì Die ungewˆhnliche<br />

Handschrift ist demnach durch den magyarischen Baron<br />

RÈvay L·szlÛ (*1600, Ü 1667), 15 der, protestantisch erzogen, 1627<br />

zum Katholizismus ¸bertrat, in das Gebiet der heutigen Slowakei und<br />

sp‰ter in die Skalitzer Franziskanerbiblio<strong>the</strong>k gelangt.<br />

15 Vgl. Art. ÑRÈvai, Ladislavì, in: Slovensk˝ biografick˝ slovnÌk, Bd. 5, Martin<br />

1992, S. 75f.<br />

50


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH<br />

BRETHREN IN THE YEARS PRIOR TO THE<br />

THIRTY YEARS WAR<br />

OR ON THE USEFULNESS OF PERSECUTION<br />

Jind¯ich Halama, Praha<br />

1. In <strong>the</strong> World but not of <strong>the</strong> World. The Alternative Nature of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Union.<br />

The Union of Brethren (Unitas fratrum) came into being at a time<br />

when <strong>the</strong> echoes of <strong>the</strong> turbulent period of <strong>the</strong> Hussite wars were<br />

slowly fading and in a situation in which social structures in <strong>the</strong> land<br />

had been considerably damaged. The views of <strong>the</strong> first generation of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Brethren were clearly influenced <strong>by</strong> this fact. The way Brethren<br />

saw <strong>the</strong> social existence of human beings was something <strong>the</strong>y inherited<br />

from <strong>the</strong> Taborite wing of <strong>the</strong> Hussites. The Brethren drew upon<br />

Hussite <strong>the</strong>ology from <strong>the</strong> very beginning, at first in a sharply polemic<br />

way, refusing violence in any form, rejecting <strong>the</strong> world and<br />

holding moralist positions to a large extent. Their <strong>the</strong>ology was shaped<br />

under <strong>the</strong> influence of <strong>the</strong> last echo of <strong>the</strong> imminent eschatological<br />

expectations of <strong>the</strong> Hussite revolution. The expectation of<br />

<strong>the</strong> end of times leads to questioning and even refusing <strong>the</strong> prevailing<br />

social values and structures. The result was a negative attitude towards<br />

<strong>the</strong> world. Mainly due to <strong>the</strong> influence of <strong>the</strong> thought of Peter<br />

ChelËick˝ <strong>the</strong> world was regarded as a profoundly sinful place, ruled<br />

<strong>by</strong> evil and falling into perdition. There was no sense in trying to find<br />

orientation and to distinguish some better or worse possibilities in<br />

this sinful world. 1 To be Christian is to be separate from <strong>the</strong> world<br />

and follow not human rules but <strong>the</strong> law of God.<br />

1 A strong eschatological emphasis regularly appears in church history in connection<br />

with social and political crises. The unbridgeable gap between <strong>the</strong> biblical<br />

ìcommunity of <strong>the</strong> saintsî and <strong>the</strong> particular human community becomes very<br />

51


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

The Brethren found this law of God in <strong>the</strong> biblical witness and <strong>the</strong><br />

way <strong>the</strong>y interpreted it led <strong>the</strong>m to a firm conviction that <strong>the</strong> social<br />

aspect forms an inevitable part of <strong>the</strong> Christian message. The Gospel,<br />

being an inner power transforming human life, is not and cannot be<br />

a private matter. Christians are not situated in <strong>the</strong> world as isolated<br />

individuals but as a community of new relationships determined <strong>by</strong><br />

love and selfless service. The world, governed <strong>by</strong> evil, cannot accept<br />

such a community. That is why <strong>the</strong> Brethren strove to form a society<br />

of <strong>the</strong>ir own, an alternative society governed exclusively <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> word<br />

of God without making concessions to or compromising with <strong>the</strong><br />

sinful earthly dominion.<br />

But it soon became apparent that this way, which was supposed to<br />

lead to Christian perfection, did not bring <strong>the</strong> desired fruit. The separatism<br />

of it led <strong>the</strong> Brethren communities into isolation, <strong>the</strong> dogmatism<br />

in interpreting <strong>the</strong> law made unrealisable demands on people<br />

and it was unable to solve <strong>the</strong> emerging discrepancies. That was why<br />

a different perspective, more critical towards ChelËick˝ and reclaiming<br />

more of <strong>the</strong> Taborite <strong>the</strong>ology, came to <strong>the</strong> fore in <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ology of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Brethren. It seems to have been present in a latent form perhaps<br />

from <strong>the</strong> very beginnings of <strong>the</strong> Union but we can hear of it only after<br />

<strong>the</strong> death of Bro<strong>the</strong>r Gregory (1478), especially in <strong>the</strong> work of Bro<strong>the</strong>r<br />

Thomas. 2 At <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> 15 th century, after a few yearsí struggle,<br />

this new view came to dominate. Bro<strong>the</strong>r Luke, in his writings, shaped<br />

this new orientation into a coherent teaching. In this view <strong>the</strong> world is<br />

no more a space plunged to perdition, a place to be avoided, but<br />

a place where Christian hope, known only to <strong>the</strong> elect but intended<br />

for all, should be verified and tested. Christians should not escape<br />

from <strong>the</strong> world to create an alternative society of <strong>the</strong>ir own and to<br />

wait for rescue. They are to witness to <strong>the</strong>ir hope <strong>by</strong> an active life in<br />

critical solidarity with o<strong>the</strong>r people.<br />

The church is still understood as an alternative community, alternative<br />

to <strong>the</strong> prevailing way of life and administration in <strong>the</strong> society.<br />

apparent in times of crisis. It is hardly an accident that <strong>the</strong> first edition of Barthís<br />

Letter to <strong>the</strong> Romans (1919) brings a damning critique of politics that is a dirty<br />

struggle for power. ÑEs lohnt sich nicht zu unterscheiden.ì (Barth, K. Gesamtausgabe.<br />

II. Akademische Werke. Der Rˆmerbrief 1919. Z¸rich 1985, p. 503).<br />

2 See e. g. Peschke, E. Kirche und Welt in der Theologie der Bˆhmischen Br¸der.<br />

Berlin 1981. p. 101ñ120.<br />

52


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />

However, <strong>the</strong> mission of <strong>the</strong> church is not to be an island where<br />

people can find rescue from perdition but to be an example of <strong>the</strong><br />

possibility of organising human community and its relationships differently<br />

from <strong>the</strong> logic of power. Christians, who enter into daily<br />

relations, vocations and functions in society, are to be in <strong>the</strong>se places<br />

a constant reminder of this alternative possibility, shaped <strong>by</strong> mutual<br />

love, forgiveness and awareness that all people are completely equal<br />

before <strong>the</strong> authority of <strong>the</strong> word of God. In <strong>the</strong> light of <strong>the</strong> Gospel<br />

every authority or power is an entrusted responsibility enabling us to<br />

serve according to <strong>the</strong> pattern of Christ, to live not for ourselves but<br />

for o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />

This new shape of <strong>the</strong> Brethren teaching was in a way more socially<br />

subversive than <strong>the</strong> original separatism. The opinion that <strong>the</strong><br />

worldly power need not necessarily be evil <strong>by</strong> its nature, that it can be<br />

used well, does not blunt <strong>the</strong> edge of <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís profound critique<br />

of worldly dominion. On <strong>the</strong> contrary, while <strong>the</strong> initial refusal of <strong>the</strong><br />

world led to indifference in regard to <strong>the</strong> differences in <strong>the</strong> ways<br />

social relations were shaped, now <strong>the</strong> whole society and its structures<br />

are measured <strong>by</strong> criteria which qualify ìexceeding righteousnessî<br />

according to <strong>the</strong> Gospel. The Brethren observe carefully not only<br />

how far <strong>the</strong> life of <strong>the</strong> members of <strong>the</strong> Union, both common and<br />

noble, corresponds with <strong>the</strong>se criteria but <strong>the</strong>y also evaluate in this<br />

light <strong>the</strong> life of <strong>the</strong> whole society. The first generation demanded <strong>the</strong><br />

transformation of <strong>the</strong> organisation of society according to <strong>the</strong> Gospel<br />

but at <strong>the</strong> same time <strong>the</strong>y considered it as unrealisable in this world.<br />

Now <strong>the</strong> Brethren tried to apply <strong>the</strong>se claims in <strong>the</strong>ir relationship<br />

with society and tried to work for its enforcement <strong>by</strong> persuasion and<br />

personal example. In this way <strong>the</strong> existing orders are put under question<br />

more effectively than through <strong>the</strong> original rejection. As <strong>the</strong> Brethren<br />

entered public life and <strong>the</strong> influence of <strong>the</strong>ir teaching began to<br />

grow it became more and more apparent that <strong>the</strong>y formed a foreign<br />

body in society, a community that could threaten some of <strong>the</strong> established<br />

and accepted orders and practices. This was without doubt one<br />

of <strong>the</strong> reasons why <strong>the</strong> opposition against <strong>the</strong> Brethren streng<strong>the</strong>ned<br />

to <strong>the</strong> point when, on St. Jamesís Day 1508, a royal Mandate was<br />

issued against <strong>the</strong>m, where<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>y were outlawed.<br />

The Union lived in <strong>the</strong> Czech kingdom under <strong>the</strong> threat of this<br />

53


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

mandate for a whole century. During <strong>the</strong> time <strong>the</strong> mandate was not<br />

lifted: on <strong>the</strong> contrary, it was several times reinforced. The reason is<br />

not to be found in <strong>the</strong> simple fact that <strong>the</strong> Brethren were <strong>the</strong> heirs of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Hussites. So were <strong>the</strong> Czech Utraquists who, never<strong>the</strong>less, became<br />

a Reformation church during <strong>the</strong> 16 th century and used <strong>the</strong><br />

fragile but recognised protection of <strong>the</strong> Reformation confession defended<br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> members of <strong>the</strong> nobility. The reason why <strong>the</strong> Union<br />

was outlawed and was unable to escape this position, in spite of repeated<br />

efforts made especially <strong>by</strong> its noble members and adherents,<br />

is to be found in <strong>the</strong> very teaching of <strong>the</strong> Union, predominantly in its<br />

social dimension.<br />

2. Characteristic Features of <strong>the</strong> Social Teachings of <strong>the</strong> Brethren<br />

Throughout <strong>the</strong> time of its existence <strong>the</strong> Union of Brethren insisted<br />

on certain principles that inevitably caused problems in relation to<br />

society. Consequent separation of secular and spiritual power was<br />

one those principles, order and discipline in <strong>the</strong> church was <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

At <strong>the</strong> time of Bro<strong>the</strong>r Luke <strong>the</strong>y came to <strong>the</strong> conviction that <strong>the</strong><br />

church is not a tool for rescuing people from <strong>the</strong> world but a community<br />

sent to <strong>the</strong> world as a witness and example. This community<br />

must share in <strong>the</strong> effort to shape <strong>the</strong> worldís structures and relationships<br />

in a more just way. At <strong>the</strong> same time <strong>the</strong>y declared clearly and<br />

firmly that <strong>the</strong> church is not and must not be a part of <strong>the</strong> structures of<br />

<strong>the</strong> world. It must be nei<strong>the</strong>r subject to any power manipulation nor<br />

dependent on human authorities, however favourably inclined to <strong>the</strong><br />

church <strong>the</strong>y may be.<br />

The second characteristic feature, emphasis on order and discipline<br />

as an indispensable mark of a Christian community, is understood<br />

as <strong>the</strong> result of <strong>the</strong> authority of Godís word in human life and<br />

any responsible ministry of <strong>the</strong> church is unthinkable without it. The<br />

Brethren expressed <strong>the</strong>ir concern for order in <strong>the</strong> church during <strong>the</strong><br />

negotiations with <strong>the</strong> Czech <strong>Protestant</strong>s concerning <strong>the</strong> Czech Confession<br />

3 as well as in <strong>the</strong> negotiations following <strong>the</strong> Letter of Majesty<br />

3 Hrejsa, F. »esk· konfesse. JejÌ vznik, podstata a dÏjiny. Praha 1912. p. 156n.<br />

54


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />

of Rudolf II. And even as late as 1619 we can read in a writing of<br />

some Brethren priests: ìregard is to be paid to order and discipline<br />

which is <strong>the</strong> foremost treasure of <strong>the</strong> Unionî. 4 The writing shows at<br />

<strong>the</strong> same time what <strong>the</strong> main features of <strong>the</strong> order and discipline look<br />

like:<br />

ñ that <strong>the</strong> priests would have <strong>the</strong> power and duty of chastening and<br />

excommunicating those who sin;<br />

ñ that <strong>the</strong>y would not administer [<strong>the</strong> Eucharist] commonly to anybody<br />

but only to those whose conscience <strong>the</strong>y know;<br />

ñ that <strong>the</strong> administration of <strong>the</strong> priests would belong to <strong>the</strong> Elders<br />

or Deans or Superintendents ra<strong>the</strong>r than to <strong>the</strong>ir Collators [owners of<br />

estates] so that those who violate <strong>the</strong> order could be punished <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

Elders;<br />

ñ that <strong>the</strong> Elders would have <strong>the</strong> authority to establish priests in<br />

parishes;<br />

ñ that some godly, honourable persons would be established as<br />

helpers to <strong>the</strong> priests to help <strong>the</strong> priests in supervising <strong>the</strong> Christian<br />

people. The nobility would help <strong>by</strong> turning <strong>the</strong>ir hands to this task. 5<br />

We can see that this document counts on <strong>the</strong> hand of <strong>the</strong> secular<br />

authorities but <strong>the</strong> principles mentioned say that such authority is<br />

bound to ensure that <strong>the</strong> church would have <strong>the</strong> freedom to administer<br />

its own affaurs. It means that <strong>the</strong> authority is to look after itself,<br />

not to intervene into church matters. The Brethren insist until <strong>the</strong> last<br />

moment both on <strong>the</strong> autonomy of <strong>the</strong> church administration (where<br />

<strong>the</strong> secular power has no right whatever to intervene and act) and on<br />

<strong>the</strong> authority of <strong>the</strong> church discipline (which does not care for any<br />

social differences but places all equally before <strong>the</strong> claim of Godís<br />

word, his judgement and grace). The Brethren kept <strong>the</strong>se central principles<br />

of <strong>the</strong>ir understanding of <strong>the</strong> Gospel even in <strong>the</strong> last years<br />

when some voices appeared in <strong>the</strong> Union pointing to <strong>the</strong> large <strong>Protestant</strong><br />

churches and <strong>the</strong>ir teaching. That is why A. Moln·r was able to<br />

state that ìthroughout <strong>the</strong> whole period of its historical existence<br />

from <strong>the</strong> mid-15 th century to <strong>the</strong> mid-17 th century <strong>the</strong> Union of Breth-<br />

4 Spis mlad˝ch knÏûÌ bratrsk˝ch v markrabstvÌ MoravskÈm staröÌm jejich p¯edloûen˝<br />

etc. In M¸ller, J. T. (ed.). Spisy J. A. KomenskÈho, ËÌslo 3. Praha 1898,<br />

pp. 41ñ51. Quotation from p. 50.<br />

5 Op. cit., p. 49.<br />

55


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

ren on <strong>the</strong> whole remained faithful to <strong>the</strong> narrow path of confessors,<br />

undeterred <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> violent persecution from <strong>the</strong> Catholic rulers or <strong>by</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> disgrace of <strong>the</strong> Utraquists and not allured <strong>by</strong> a desire for peace<br />

guaranteed <strong>by</strong> some diplomatic concessionsî. 6 The social teaching of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Brethren from <strong>the</strong> beginning to <strong>the</strong> end represents an alternative<br />

model different both from <strong>the</strong> majority norms of society and from <strong>the</strong><br />

attitudes of o<strong>the</strong>r Reformation churches. Though <strong>the</strong>y accepted <strong>the</strong><br />

responsibility for and participation in <strong>the</strong> social and political life <strong>the</strong><br />

Brethren attitudes show an apparent critical distance that repeatedly<br />

prevents <strong>the</strong> Brethren from consenting to some solutions or at least<br />

from approving <strong>the</strong>m without reservations.<br />

It is <strong>the</strong> norm of Godís word, <strong>the</strong> fundamental agent of <strong>the</strong> origin<br />

and <strong>the</strong> continuation of <strong>the</strong> Brethren community that keeps on challenging<br />

and questioning <strong>the</strong> efforts (humanly understandable) to find<br />

a less demanding way of existence, to use diplomatic tools and strategies<br />

to attain a safer and more comfortable position in society at <strong>the</strong><br />

cost of compromising and making concessions to some principles.<br />

We do not say that nothing of that kind happened in <strong>the</strong> Union. Some<br />

examples of such compromising can be found and <strong>the</strong>y were slowly<br />

growing in number in <strong>the</strong> course of time. Moln·r expressed this fact<br />

<strong>by</strong> an impressive image saying that <strong>the</strong> Union ìdid not avoid inner<br />

bleedingî in its relationship to <strong>the</strong> world. 7 Never<strong>the</strong>less, <strong>the</strong> Brethren<br />

teaching insisted on <strong>the</strong> attitude that <strong>the</strong> truth of <strong>the</strong> Gospel, which is<br />

to be witnessed to <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> church, is and will ever be in tension with<br />

<strong>the</strong> desires for wealth, power and glory that are connected almost<br />

inseparably with worldly rule.<br />

Even in <strong>the</strong> Union itself a growing tension can be traced. It was<br />

a tension between <strong>the</strong> settled principles of Brethren social teaching<br />

and <strong>the</strong> practical problems of everyday life in Brethren congregations.<br />

The life of faith according to <strong>the</strong> Brethren rules was so demanding<br />

that certain tension between <strong>the</strong> demands and <strong>the</strong> reality<br />

continually existed. As soon as 1510, after <strong>the</strong> St. Jamesís Day Mandate<br />

(1508), <strong>the</strong> Brethren called for general introspection, pondering<br />

6 Moln·r, A. Eschatologick· nadÏje ËeskÈ reformace. In Od reformace k†zÌt¯ku.<br />

Praha 1956, p. 64.<br />

7 Moln·r, A. K ot·zce bratrskÈ odpovÏdnosti za svÏt. In CÌrkev ve svÏtÏ. Praha<br />

1977, p. 48.<br />

56


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />

<strong>the</strong> mistakes and trespasses and rectification of <strong>the</strong> ways. 8 The inconsistency<br />

of <strong>the</strong> practice with <strong>the</strong> Brethren teachings becomes more<br />

frequent and apparent from about <strong>the</strong> 1550ís and it developed into<br />

a serious and perennial problem. When asking for <strong>the</strong> causes of this<br />

situation we come across a paradox, that <strong>the</strong> growing problems to<br />

keep <strong>the</strong> Brethren principles and traditions are connected with <strong>the</strong><br />

spread of <strong>the</strong> Reformation. As <strong>the</strong> Brethren got to know <strong>the</strong> Reformation<br />

movements, and made contacts with <strong>the</strong>m in Poland and as <strong>the</strong><br />

Reformation gained ground among <strong>the</strong> population of Bohemia and<br />

Moravia, <strong>the</strong> Brethren had to ask if <strong>the</strong>ir way was not too narrow, too<br />

moralistic and excessively exclusive. Compared to Lu<strong>the</strong>ranism and<br />

Calvinism it appeared to be so.<br />

Taking <strong>the</strong> Union of Brethren as a movement belonging to <strong>the</strong><br />

European Reformation, we must ask <strong>the</strong> question raised <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> contemporaries<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Brethren, <strong>the</strong> representatives of <strong>the</strong> European Reformation<br />

movements. Why did <strong>the</strong>y differ in a visible, deliberate and<br />

to a certain extent controversial way? Why did <strong>the</strong>y insist on emphases<br />

taken for unimportant or irrelevant for Christian life <strong>by</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

Reformation movements? If we use <strong>the</strong> classification of different Reformation<br />

movements given <strong>by</strong> A. Moln·r 11? it can help us to find<br />

a possible answer to <strong>the</strong> question.<br />

Moln·r marked <strong>the</strong> reform movements of <strong>the</strong> 14 th and 15 th centuries,<br />

especially <strong>the</strong> Valdensians and Hussites, as <strong>the</strong> First Reformation<br />

in opposition to <strong>the</strong> 16 th century European Reformation that he<br />

calls <strong>the</strong> Second Reformation. The First Reformation is characterised<br />

<strong>by</strong> its concentration on <strong>the</strong> story of Jesus, on <strong>the</strong> gospels and especially<br />

on <strong>the</strong> Sermon on <strong>the</strong> Mount as <strong>the</strong> source of rules for Christian<br />

life. It is connected with a strong emphasis on Godís law and with<br />

more imminent expectation of <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> times, i.e., a strong<br />

eschatological perspective. That is why <strong>the</strong> First Reformation is socially<br />

very sensitive, stressing <strong>the</strong> almost revolutionary nature of bib-<br />

8 ìFor we have too freely and comfortably settled in <strong>the</strong> world, made ourselves at<br />

home and peacefully fallen asleep. And many have intermingled into worldly matters<br />

or even defected to <strong>the</strong>mÖî wrote <strong>the</strong> Elders. List Brat¯Ì StaröÌch 1510. In<br />

ÿÌËan, R. Zpr·vy, nauËenÌ a napomenutÌ Jednoty bratrskÈ. Unpublished manuscript<br />

in <strong>the</strong> library of UK ETF. p. 114.<br />

57


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

lical justice, looking for its coming and striving to materialise it in its<br />

communities as far as possible.<br />

The focus of <strong>the</strong> Second Reformation is on <strong>the</strong> message of justification<br />

as expressed in <strong>the</strong> Pauline letters of <strong>the</strong> New Testament. Grace<br />

and liberty are stressed more than demands. The interpretation of <strong>the</strong><br />

Scriptures is more careful, possibly <strong>the</strong> whole range of <strong>the</strong> scriptural<br />

witness is taken into consideration and exaggerated emphases are to<br />

be avoided. It goes hand in hand with a less imminent eschatological<br />

accent and <strong>the</strong>refore also a less sensitive perception of <strong>the</strong> social<br />

consequences of <strong>the</strong> Gospel. The attention is directed more to <strong>the</strong><br />

spiritual life of <strong>the</strong> believer.<br />

The different accents of <strong>the</strong>se two types of Reformation conditioned<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir attitudes toward society and, consequently, <strong>the</strong> place <strong>the</strong>y<br />

took in <strong>the</strong> social structure. In Moln·rís words: ìThe First Reformation<br />

was popular in <strong>the</strong> broadest sense of <strong>the</strong> word. It ga<strong>the</strong>red adherents<br />

mostly from <strong>the</strong> lowest social levels. It was socially disturbing<br />

and sometimes revolutionary. The Second Reformation found an echo<br />

primarily in <strong>the</strong> young bourgeois groups at <strong>the</strong> time of <strong>the</strong> beginning<br />

of capitalism and <strong>the</strong> subsequent decline of feudalism. Socially it was<br />

conservative.î 9<br />

The fact that <strong>the</strong> main stream of <strong>the</strong> European Reformation looked<br />

for political protection and support from <strong>the</strong> secular power and found<br />

it and connected itself with <strong>the</strong> social power structures is regarded <strong>by</strong><br />

Moln·r as a problematic feature and mistake of <strong>the</strong> Reformation<br />

movement. It happened due to <strong>the</strong> fact ìthat in political issues <strong>the</strong><br />

Reformers allowed <strong>the</strong>mselves to be misled <strong>by</strong> ideas not proceeding<br />

from <strong>the</strong>ir understanding of Godís wordî. 10 The result was that <strong>the</strong><br />

European Reformation returned to <strong>the</strong> medieval concept of <strong>the</strong> Christian<br />

society where church and society merge toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

If it was refusing this alternative that motivated <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís<br />

insistence on <strong>the</strong>ir own way and <strong>the</strong>ir difference from o<strong>the</strong>r <strong>Protestant</strong>s,<br />

it was more than justified. Undoubtedly, such a motive played<br />

an important part in <strong>the</strong> Union but it is not quite easy to say how far it<br />

was <strong>the</strong> decisive one.<br />

9 Ibid.<br />

10 Moln·r, A., Pohyb teologickÈho myölenÌ, p. 406.<br />

58


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />

We have said that <strong>the</strong>re was a growing tension between <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ory<br />

and practice in <strong>the</strong> Union. The source of this tension was predominantly<br />

in <strong>the</strong> growing desire to join <strong>the</strong> main stream of <strong>the</strong> European<br />

Christian churches, to get rid of <strong>the</strong> hundred years old accusation of<br />

ìPicardsî and of <strong>the</strong> label of a suspicious sect. The tension, which<br />

persisted and even grew until <strong>the</strong> Letter of Majesty had been issued,<br />

began in <strong>the</strong> ìdialogue between <strong>the</strong> two Reformationsî and it had no<br />

easy and satisfactory solution. It was impossible to become a part of<br />

an established church without abandoning some of <strong>the</strong> important<br />

Brethren principles. There must be a tension between <strong>the</strong> radically<br />

understood Gospel demand for a new life, worthy of <strong>the</strong> name Christian,<br />

which is a way both personally and socially demanding and<br />

uncomfortable, and <strong>the</strong> message of justification <strong>by</strong> faith and Christian<br />

freedom which, however, for <strong>the</strong> sake of its enforcement and<br />

expansion accepted <strong>the</strong> existing orders and confined its social critique<br />

to a level acceptable to those in power.<br />

Such a tension is easiest to overcome <strong>by</strong> silencing one of <strong>the</strong><br />

voices. Concerning <strong>the</strong> Union in <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> 16 th century<br />

<strong>the</strong>re was no question about <strong>the</strong> impossibility of returning to <strong>the</strong> initial<br />

radicalism of <strong>the</strong> first generation. On <strong>the</strong> contrary, some inclination<br />

toward abandoning old principles and adjusting to <strong>the</strong> European<br />

Reformation could be observed. However, such a step did not find<br />

acceptance among <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ologically educated priests and Elders. That<br />

is why <strong>the</strong> official documents of <strong>the</strong> Union and declarations of <strong>the</strong><br />

synods and conferences usually confirm <strong>the</strong> traditional accents of <strong>the</strong><br />

Brethren and at <strong>the</strong> same time lament <strong>the</strong> ìnaughtiness of <strong>the</strong> people<br />

in <strong>the</strong> congregationsî and ìtransgressing <strong>the</strong> ordersî <strong>by</strong> some priests.<br />

Living under <strong>the</strong> protection of <strong>the</strong> Czech Confession on <strong>the</strong> estates of<br />

favourably inclined nobility gave <strong>the</strong> Brethren <strong>the</strong> opportunity to taste<br />

<strong>the</strong> pleasant part of existence as an officially recognised church and<br />

at <strong>the</strong> same time it evoked <strong>the</strong> impression that <strong>the</strong> Union could become<br />

a recognised church without abandoning any of its fundamental<br />

doctrinal positions.<br />

At <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> 17 th century <strong>the</strong> Union stood in <strong>the</strong> midst<br />

of <strong>the</strong>se tensions and struggles for <strong>the</strong> future form of its community<br />

and its teaching. The characteristics ìundeterred and not alluredî applied<br />

much more for <strong>the</strong> first part. The lure of <strong>the</strong> advantages that<br />

59


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

could be used <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Brethren if <strong>the</strong>y became a recognised part of<br />

society had a remarkable influence on <strong>the</strong> willingness of <strong>the</strong> Brethren<br />

to take part in political efforts for legalisation of <strong>the</strong> Czech <strong>Protestant</strong>s<br />

and <strong>the</strong> Union. The legalisation was accomplished through <strong>the</strong><br />

Letter of Majesty.<br />

3. The Legalisation of <strong>the</strong> Union as <strong>the</strong> Root of an Identity<br />

Crisis?<br />

One would have thought that <strong>the</strong> issuing of <strong>the</strong> Letter of Majesty as<br />

<strong>the</strong> successful end of <strong>the</strong> century of <strong>the</strong> Unityís struggle for recognition<br />

would have marked <strong>the</strong> beginning of a free development and<br />

building of <strong>the</strong> Brethren congregations, schools and o<strong>the</strong>r institutions.<br />

Contrary to this expectation a crisis appeared. The Union as<br />

a whole experienced stagnation, its congregations were decreasing in<br />

many places and some priests asked publicly if it was worth maintaining<br />

<strong>the</strong> Union as an independent church, if it were not more reasonable<br />

to merge with <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Utraquists. Instead of enthusiasm,<br />

great plans and new development <strong>the</strong> Union experienced a crisis<br />

of identity.<br />

We can witness an interesting phenomenon in <strong>the</strong> history of <strong>the</strong><br />

Union: many times <strong>the</strong> recognition reappears that persecution has<br />

a useful function. The Brethren express <strong>the</strong>ir conviction that persecution<br />

helps <strong>the</strong> church to return to its roots, to remove undesirable<br />

phenomena developed during a peaceful period. Such an expression<br />

in <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong> whole Union appeared first in 1510 when <strong>the</strong><br />

Elders spoke about a too comfortable settling in <strong>the</strong> world (see<br />

note 6). A similar statement can be found under more dramatic circumstances<br />

during <strong>the</strong> persecution after <strong>the</strong> Schmalkaldian War. The<br />

Brethren say in N·prava: ìAnd for <strong>the</strong> sake of rectification, God has<br />

visited us with <strong>the</strong>se temptations to refine us, to prove us and to expel<br />

<strong>the</strong> world from us.î 11 As an example of many similar statements that<br />

can be found let us recall one more. Senior Bro<strong>the</strong>r Bartholomew<br />

NÏmËansk˝ evaluated <strong>the</strong> persecution following <strong>the</strong> re-enactment of<br />

11 NapomenutÌ uËinÏnÈ vöechnÏm vÏrn˝m etc.1584. p. 4.<br />

60


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />

<strong>the</strong> Mandate against <strong>the</strong> Brethren in 1602 in <strong>the</strong>se words: ìWe confess<br />

that this persecution was highly needed for us and for our congregations.<br />

We have already grown torpid and bony.î 12<br />

In o<strong>the</strong>r words, <strong>the</strong> Brethren repeatedly came to <strong>the</strong> conclusion<br />

that <strong>the</strong> Union needed persecution if it was to stay watchful in witness<br />

and ministry. Every longer period of a relatively peaceful and<br />

secure life of <strong>the</strong> congregations brought a decline in discipline and<br />

a growing willingness to adjust to <strong>the</strong> larger society. The protection<br />

<strong>the</strong> Czech Confession could provide for <strong>the</strong> Union was weak and<br />

questionable but still <strong>the</strong> discipline and order in those communities<br />

that were allowed to enjoy it declined. The legalisation of <strong>the</strong> Union<br />

through <strong>the</strong> Letter of Majesty brought <strong>the</strong> persecutions to an end and<br />

gave <strong>the</strong> Union equal status with <strong>the</strong> recognised churches but it<br />

brought destructive consequences for <strong>the</strong> inner life of <strong>the</strong> Union.<br />

The above mentioned letter of Brethren priests from Moravia expresses<br />

<strong>the</strong> feeling that a serious inner crisis afflicted <strong>the</strong> Union which<br />

would be unable to survive as an independent body: ìThe last and<br />

main cause is <strong>the</strong> fact that, if we do not merge, our Union truly will<br />

not stand for long but will be stifled and perish.î 13 Comenius later<br />

expresses (1632) <strong>the</strong> same opinion: ìSo we ourselves were becoming<br />

infertile Ö and o<strong>the</strong>rs had no reason to come to us having seen nothing<br />

more among us than anywhere else. So that due to this alone,<br />

even if <strong>the</strong>re were no temptations and enemies striving to spoil <strong>the</strong><br />

Union, it would have to disappear silently and be extinguished like<br />

a burnt candle.î 14<br />

The situation of <strong>the</strong> Union in <strong>the</strong> last years before <strong>the</strong> Thirty Years<br />

War gave rise to <strong>the</strong> conviction that <strong>the</strong> best solution would be to<br />

merge with <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> church. Young Brethren priests name three<br />

reasons for such a step. The position of <strong>the</strong> priests would be improved.<br />

They would reach at last a socially recognised status and be<br />

rid of mockery. The state of <strong>the</strong> church property would improve;<br />

excessive poverty would be removed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> possibility to ga<strong>the</strong>r<br />

church taxes and ti<strong>the</strong>s. Finally, whole parishes would be taken over<br />

12 Quoted <strong>by</strong> Rejchrtov·, N. V·clav Budovec z Budova.Praha 1984. p. 34.<br />

13 Spis mlad˝ch knÏûÌ bratrsk˝chÖ In Spisy J. A. KomenskÈho, ËÌslo 3, p. 47.<br />

14 Ot·zky nÏkterÈ o JednotÏ Brat¯Ì Ëesk˝ch. In Veöker˝ch spis˘ J. A. KomenskÈho<br />

sv. 17. Brno 1912, p. 276.<br />

61


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Union, which would become a church for all parishioners, not<br />

just a minority of those who actively join it. The time for such an<br />

action is favourable for ì<strong>the</strong> common people drive <strong>the</strong> idolaters and<br />

malefactors away and ask for <strong>the</strong> Gospelî. 15 The idea that <strong>the</strong> Union<br />

would be able to bring its special contribution, namely discipline and<br />

order, to <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> church <strong>by</strong> way of merger was as unreal as <strong>the</strong><br />

impression that <strong>the</strong> common people desired for a truly Christian life.<br />

The common people always desired to improve <strong>the</strong>ir situation no<br />

matter in whose name it would happen. It is true that in those times<br />

Reformation often brought such an improvement. But concerning<br />

discipline and order in <strong>the</strong> Union, <strong>the</strong>se regularly did worse, <strong>the</strong> better<br />

<strong>the</strong> situation was in terms of property and institution.<br />

Hrejsa concluded from <strong>the</strong> letter that it was ìapparent what <strong>the</strong><br />

church development aimed at: a full unionî. 16 This is and will remain<br />

nothing more than a hypo<strong>the</strong>sis. Apparent in <strong>the</strong> letter is <strong>the</strong> desire to<br />

become a part of a recognised, socially established and safely accommodated<br />

church.<br />

We can find a similar view expressed <strong>by</strong> Comenius. In his writing<br />

ìSome questions about <strong>the</strong> UnionÖî he analyses <strong>the</strong> reasons why <strong>the</strong><br />

Union did not grow sufficiently. Comenius identifies three causes<br />

with a common denominator: <strong>the</strong> Brethren were not willing or not<br />

able to accept <strong>the</strong> position of a recognised part of <strong>the</strong> Christian society.<br />

The first cause is <strong>the</strong> lack of ìliterary arts and schools Ö what<br />

was <strong>the</strong> root of <strong>the</strong> weakness that even in those settlements where<br />

<strong>the</strong>y had patrons <strong>the</strong>y did not enter into all churches, leaving this task<br />

to o<strong>the</strong>r priests. They confined <strong>the</strong>mselves to those listeners who<br />

turned to <strong>the</strong>m voluntarily.î The second hindrance in spreading <strong>the</strong><br />

Union was in a paradoxical way <strong>the</strong> Reformation, and its preaching<br />

of <strong>the</strong> sober teaching to <strong>the</strong> whole church. Due to this fact <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong>s<br />

ìentered whole communities and churches and found acceptance;<br />

but we, sticking to our particularity, not only stayed in <strong>the</strong><br />

corner but <strong>the</strong> larger herd perpetually grew through those who came<br />

from <strong>the</strong> smaller herd.î The third problem was <strong>the</strong> poverty of <strong>the</strong><br />

Brethren that prevented <strong>the</strong>m from gaining better workers. But it was<br />

15 Spis mlad˝ch knÏûÌ bratrsk˝chÖ, p. 45.<br />

16 Hrejsa, F. »esk· konfesse. p. 533.<br />

62


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />

caused <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> very fact ìour fa<strong>the</strong>rs did not enter upon <strong>the</strong> privileged<br />

churches and schools invested with incomesî and <strong>the</strong>y had no means<br />

of collecting <strong>the</strong> necessary finances. 17<br />

Comenius rightly observed <strong>the</strong> sociological aspect of <strong>the</strong> church<br />

life, that need to invest in education, workers and public presentation<br />

which has an important influence on <strong>the</strong> development of <strong>the</strong> life of<br />

any community. But he did not consider <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological reasons that<br />

led <strong>the</strong> Brethren to form <strong>the</strong>ir congregations in a way different from<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r reformation churches. To put it plainlz, he did not consider why<br />

<strong>the</strong> Brethren could not take over parishes and taxes if <strong>the</strong>y wanted to<br />

stay who <strong>the</strong>y were. The Union as such could not become a part of<br />

<strong>the</strong> social system. The view of Comenius is to a large extent shaped<br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> perspective of a Christian society of which <strong>the</strong> church is an<br />

unquestioned part. He notes <strong>the</strong> ways ì<strong>by</strong> which o<strong>the</strong>r church unions<br />

are edifiedî and comes to <strong>the</strong> conclusion that it is ìmostly through<br />

<strong>the</strong>se two things: schools and <strong>the</strong> protection of <strong>the</strong> authorities. So it is<br />

with <strong>the</strong> Lu<strong>the</strong>rans, Calvinists, Armenians, Arians, even with <strong>the</strong> Jesuits.<br />

On <strong>the</strong> whole, all use this way but <strong>the</strong> Anabaptists who edify<br />

<strong>the</strong>mselves <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir inner order. No o<strong>the</strong>r union in <strong>the</strong> world has its<br />

order as complete as <strong>the</strong> Anabaptistsî. 18<br />

Obviously, it did not occur to Comenius that <strong>the</strong> Union could be<br />

on <strong>the</strong> side of <strong>the</strong> Anabaptists in this respect, as a community that was<br />

not maintained <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> favour of <strong>the</strong> authorities or <strong>by</strong> cultural efforts<br />

but <strong>by</strong> its inner order proceeding from personal faith. He identifies,<br />

however, confessional certainty, moral sincerity, church order and<br />

discipline as primary tasks in <strong>the</strong> church renewal. Those characteristics<br />

apply for alternative communities. Forming churches with <strong>the</strong><br />

help of public authorities and schools is a strategy that shaped <strong>the</strong><br />

churches that have been called national or popular in later times. The<br />

church that <strong>the</strong> first Brethren considered necessary to leave in ìneed<br />

of salvationî was shaped in <strong>the</strong> very same way. The Union came into<br />

being as an alternative community clearly distinguished from <strong>the</strong><br />

majority of <strong>the</strong> society and it kept its character even after departing<br />

from <strong>the</strong> initial separatism. One of its particular features was pre-<br />

17 All quotations Ot·zky nÏkterÈ o JednotÏ brat¯Ì Ëesk˝ch, p. 274f.<br />

18 Op. cit., p. 276.<br />

63


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

cisely <strong>the</strong> fact that it ga<strong>the</strong>red exclusively those who consciously<br />

asked for membership. The communities of <strong>the</strong> Union were deliberately<br />

and logically minority communities.<br />

One of those who observed this was <strong>the</strong> Lu<strong>the</strong>ran <strong>the</strong>ologian Flacius<br />

Illyricus as early as 1556. In a letter to Anton Bodenstein he<br />

enumerates <strong>the</strong> reasons why <strong>the</strong> Brethren cannot be considered a real<br />

church. In addition to doctrinal reasons he notes that ì<strong>the</strong> order of<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir religion and <strong>the</strong> form of <strong>the</strong>ir worship is not suited for <strong>the</strong> inclusion<br />

of whole communities and nations, which is necessary if we do<br />

not want to nourish pernicious rupturesî. 19 Regarding <strong>the</strong> nature of<br />

<strong>the</strong> 16 th century society Flacius was right. The social climate was not<br />

ready to accept <strong>the</strong> existence of free minority churches. The political<br />

administration was too narrowly connected with religion. The Union<br />

came into being as a free minority church and kept this character<br />

throughout <strong>the</strong> whole period of its existence. That was <strong>the</strong> reason for<br />

trying to suppress it. Herrnhut historian J. Th. M¸ller shares <strong>the</strong> same<br />

view, saying that <strong>the</strong> Union could not exist as an established, socially<br />

recognised church while keeping its original form. Its distinguishing<br />

emphasis on <strong>the</strong> community of believers as <strong>the</strong> shape of <strong>the</strong> Christian<br />

church could live only in a free community, independent from <strong>the</strong><br />

secular authorities and <strong>the</strong>ir protection. 20<br />

The crisis in <strong>the</strong> Union seems to have been catalysed, if not initiated,<br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> official status <strong>the</strong> church acquired through <strong>the</strong> Letter of<br />

Majesty. The possibility of existing as an official church and <strong>the</strong> opportunities<br />

connected with such an existence had a disintegrating influence<br />

on <strong>the</strong> Union. The younger generation of priests probably<br />

failed to realise <strong>the</strong> deep discrepancy between <strong>the</strong> Brethren concept<br />

of order and discipline and <strong>the</strong> popular, majority model of <strong>the</strong> church<br />

as accepted both in Lu<strong>the</strong>ranism and Calvinism. Should church discipline<br />

be introduced into a majority church that exercises its supervision<br />

over whole communities in a given place, sooner or later some<br />

use of violence would be necessary. It would be necessary to exact<br />

19 ìÖeorum ratio religionis formaque Ecclesiarum ceremoniarum non satis erit<br />

apta ad complectendas magnas civitates ac integras gentes, quod tamen fieri necesse<br />

est, nisi velimus perniciosa schismata alereî. Illyrici scriptum de receptione fratrum<br />

an M. Antonium Bodenstein. In GINDELY, A. (ed.). Quellen zur Geschichte der<br />

Bˆhmischen Br¸der. Wien 1859, p. 281.<br />

20 M¸ller, J. Th. Geschichte der bˆhmischen Br¸der III, Herrnhut 1931, p. 230.<br />

64


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />

obedience from those who would not accept <strong>the</strong> order voluntarily and<br />

make <strong>the</strong>m fulfil <strong>the</strong>ir duties <strong>by</strong> using power against <strong>the</strong>m. That would<br />

mean abandoning <strong>the</strong> century-old principle of separation between <strong>the</strong><br />

secular and spiritual power and giving up respect for each personís<br />

freedom of conscience and tolerance for o<strong>the</strong>r opinions.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> last years before <strong>the</strong> war <strong>the</strong> indications of possible fundamental<br />

change in <strong>the</strong> development of <strong>the</strong> Union seem to be <strong>the</strong> strongest<br />

in <strong>the</strong> entire course of <strong>the</strong> Unityís existence. The signs of growing<br />

willingness to accept <strong>the</strong> model of a majority Reformation church<br />

were apparent. I dare say that it would have meant a definite departure<br />

from <strong>the</strong> Unityís original roots. But <strong>the</strong> chain of political events<br />

that had already been in motion at that time finished <strong>the</strong> ìcrisis of<br />

legalityî of <strong>the</strong> Brethren <strong>by</strong> destroying <strong>the</strong> Union and has left <strong>the</strong><br />

puzzle of its possible fur<strong>the</strong>r development permanently open. We can<br />

state that <strong>the</strong> Brethren did not abandon <strong>the</strong> path of socially critical<br />

witness, inherited from <strong>the</strong> Hussite tradition, but we must add that<br />

<strong>the</strong>y were not given an opportunity to do so. Soon <strong>the</strong>y were outlawed<br />

and <strong>the</strong>y were repeatedly confirmed in <strong>the</strong>ir attitude <strong>by</strong> persecutions<br />

from <strong>the</strong> majority society. When finally an opportunity for<br />

social integration opened up and <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís willingness to give<br />

up <strong>the</strong>ir particularity and join <strong>the</strong> broad stream of <strong>the</strong> European Reformation<br />

was markedly increasing, <strong>the</strong> White Mountain disaster put<br />

an end to <strong>the</strong> whole issue.<br />

4. Conclusion<br />

The social teaching of <strong>the</strong> Union originated in <strong>the</strong> understanding of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Gospel as a spiritual power addressing people and changing <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

thinking and acting. Justification and justice, <strong>the</strong> individual and <strong>the</strong><br />

social aspect of such a change are inseparably connected in this teaching.<br />

Christian faith is an attitude toward life that is visibly demonstrated<br />

<strong>by</strong> certain consequences in human relationships. The particular<br />

mode of <strong>the</strong>se consequences is characterised <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> claim for<br />

ìexceeding righteousnessî according to Mat<strong>the</strong>wís Sermon on <strong>the</strong><br />

Mount. It remained <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís basic yardstick for measuring<br />

ìwhat should <strong>the</strong> life of <strong>the</strong> sons of God be like and what deeds are<br />

65


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

commanded <strong>by</strong> Himî. 21 The social responsibility of Christians, shaped<br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>se rules, evidently carries on <strong>the</strong> radical concept of <strong>the</strong><br />

First Reformation. It strives to keep a critical distance from <strong>the</strong> social<br />

structures of power, to question social differences and to stress <strong>the</strong><br />

supremacy of Godís commands as <strong>the</strong> norm that sees all people as<br />

fundamentally equal. The requirement of <strong>the</strong> freedom of conscience<br />

and <strong>the</strong> tolerance of diverse opinions are rooted in this conviction.<br />

The Reformation emphasis on Christian liberty as a spiritual value,<br />

granted immediately and unconditionally to each believer through<br />

<strong>the</strong> grace of God, liberated people from <strong>the</strong> custody of church institutions<br />

and introduced <strong>the</strong>m into <strong>the</strong> church as a community of equally<br />

liberated individuals. The <strong>the</strong>ology of <strong>the</strong> Brethren connected this<br />

emphasis with <strong>the</strong> renewed community of everyday life. In <strong>the</strong>ir view<br />

Christian liberty must manifest itself as liberty to serve in <strong>the</strong> household,<br />

in <strong>the</strong> workshop, in <strong>the</strong> community, in <strong>the</strong> craft, in <strong>the</strong> office<br />

and in using all things necessary to everyday life. All this is involved<br />

in <strong>the</strong> claim of Godís justice that should assert itself in all <strong>the</strong>se<br />

worldly matters, frequently in a way that breaks <strong>the</strong> limits of <strong>the</strong><br />

established social orders in <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong> love of neighbour.<br />

The uniqueness of <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís social teaching was in its effort<br />

to keep and develop some accents, o<strong>the</strong>rwise limited to a handful of<br />

radicals standing outside of public life, and introduce it into <strong>the</strong> larger<br />

society. The Brethren sought to keep <strong>the</strong> prophetic critique of <strong>the</strong><br />

secular social structures while remaining open to society, to announce<br />

<strong>the</strong> claim of <strong>the</strong> approaching Kingdom of God that questions all o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

claims and makes <strong>the</strong>ir character provisional and partial. The Reformation<br />

discernment of <strong>the</strong> limitations of human possibilities, <strong>the</strong>ologically<br />

speaking <strong>the</strong> discernment of our sinfulness, protected <strong>the</strong><br />

Brethren from falling into sectarian fanaticism while <strong>the</strong> eschatological<br />

perspective of hope helped <strong>the</strong>m to keep a critical distance from<br />

worldly structures. The task of formulating <strong>the</strong> social claim of <strong>the</strong><br />

Gospel in terms that would have to be taken into account <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

social structures was not easy but <strong>the</strong> Brethren succeeded in it for<br />

a long time. Moln·r speaks at this point about dialogue between <strong>the</strong><br />

Reformations:<br />

21 BratrskÈ vyzn·nÌ 1607, VII.2. In »ty¯i vyzn·nÌ, Praha 1951, p. 141.<br />

66


THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />

ìThe <strong>the</strong>ology of <strong>the</strong> Czech Brethren, having its roots in <strong>the</strong> First<br />

Reformation, refused to part from <strong>the</strong> Second Reformation. In Brethren<br />

<strong>the</strong>ology both Reformations talk to each o<strong>the</strong>r and toge<strong>the</strong>r consent<br />

to bow to <strong>the</strong> truth which is Christ. This defines <strong>the</strong> peculiarity of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Brethren <strong>the</strong>ology and its importance for church history. And in<br />

this task we can see <strong>the</strong> stimulating role of Brethren <strong>the</strong>ology for our<br />

time.î 22<br />

We observed that <strong>the</strong> Brethren lost much of <strong>the</strong>ir prophetic emphasis<br />

in <strong>the</strong> last years of <strong>the</strong>ir existence. The eschatological perspective<br />

was overshadowed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> interest for a place in <strong>the</strong> secular structures.<br />

The last generation before <strong>the</strong> White Mountain battle shows especially<br />

evident signs of <strong>the</strong> fading of <strong>the</strong> prophetically critical element<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Brethren tradition, caused <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> attractive possibility of becoming<br />

an unquestioned and recognised part of society. Certain inclinations<br />

to such an attitude could be found much earlier but <strong>the</strong>re was<br />

no occasion for <strong>the</strong>ir developing. Once more, Moln·r points to this in<br />

one of his studies, stating that in <strong>the</strong> Brethren reflection of <strong>the</strong> relationship<br />

to society and <strong>the</strong> world ìafter <strong>the</strong> time of Luke or maybe of<br />

Augusta a gap appeared in Brethren thought because <strong>the</strong> Union ceased<br />

to reflect systematically and under <strong>the</strong> eschatological perspective<br />

on even <strong>the</strong> possibility of shaping a broader society than <strong>the</strong> church.<br />

Only Comenius, under completely changed circumstances, took up<br />

again <strong>the</strong> positive legacy of Christian care for <strong>the</strong> task of reform in<br />

<strong>the</strong> world. It is hardly accidental that he did so in <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong><br />

hope in <strong>the</strong> coming Christ <strong>the</strong> King.î 23<br />

And it is hardly accidental, let us add, that Comenius was brought<br />

to <strong>the</strong> eschatological perspective in a situation of disaster, war and<br />

persecution, in <strong>the</strong> situation when <strong>the</strong> Brethren once again stood outside<br />

of all secular structures as outlaws and exiles. For <strong>the</strong> greater<br />

part of its existence, <strong>the</strong> Union was drawn away from any idea of<br />

becoming an established part of society. Its critical distance and prophetic<br />

role were at least partly formed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> hostile social environment.<br />

When this pressure ceased to exist, <strong>the</strong> attractiveness of a peaceful<br />

conformed life proved to be irresistible even for a community<br />

22 Moln·r, A. Pohyb teologickÈho myölenÌ, p. 297.<br />

23 Moln·r, A. Eschatologick· nadÏje ËeskÈ reformace. p. 82.<br />

67


JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />

such as <strong>the</strong> Union. Adversity benefits <strong>the</strong> confessing attitude of <strong>the</strong><br />

church. Discrimination or even mild persecution has a visibly positive<br />

influence for <strong>the</strong> witness of <strong>the</strong> church. It can be demonstrated in<br />

<strong>the</strong> development of <strong>the</strong> Unionís teaching. The radicalness of <strong>the</strong> social<br />

claim of <strong>the</strong> Gospel is clearer and more acceptable for us under<br />

radical conditions, in a situation when we have nothing to lose, so to<br />

say. A secure and safely living church looks naturally for easier ways<br />

and is unable to resist comprome.<br />

For more than a century <strong>the</strong> Union was <strong>the</strong> bearer of <strong>the</strong> message<br />

about <strong>the</strong> social claim of <strong>the</strong> Gospel for Czech society. The Brethren<br />

kept <strong>the</strong> heritage of <strong>the</strong> radical wing of <strong>the</strong> Hussites, <strong>the</strong> Taborites,<br />

until <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> 17 th century. In <strong>the</strong> central points of <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

social teaching, such as <strong>the</strong> necessity of separating religion from <strong>the</strong><br />

power structures or <strong>the</strong> freedom of conscience of each individual,<br />

<strong>the</strong>y paved a way that <strong>the</strong> larger society was able to follow only much<br />

later. Even today many communities painfully struggle to apply <strong>the</strong>se<br />

norms. The crucial idea of <strong>the</strong>ir social teaching, life as service to God<br />

in <strong>the</strong> neighbour, led <strong>the</strong> Brethren to practical consequences in different<br />

areas of social life. Through exercising <strong>the</strong>se consequences in<br />

various vocations and in different social settings <strong>the</strong> Brethren created<br />

a number of inspiring examples of <strong>the</strong> Christian social responsibility.<br />

When it seemed that <strong>the</strong> lure of social recognition of <strong>the</strong> Union could<br />

silence this heritage, <strong>the</strong> Thirty Years War put an end to everything.<br />

The development of <strong>the</strong> social teaching of <strong>the</strong> Brethren was<br />

abruptly and violently finished but its legacy may have become<br />

sharper and more urgent for that very reason. The teaching of <strong>the</strong><br />

Brethren forms a unique chapter in efforts to find a socially responsible<br />

model of Christian life, determined <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> prophetic claim of<br />

Godís word and sensitive to <strong>the</strong> needs of our neighbours in <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

everyday life. It is an exceptional phenomenon not only within <strong>the</strong><br />

Czech Christianity but also in <strong>the</strong> context of <strong>the</strong> European Reformation.<br />

68


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Stanislav Segert, Los Angeles<br />

5 Publication activity<br />

Since all manuscripts from Qumran caves became accessible in early<br />

1990s, various publications were devoted to <strong>the</strong>se important texts.<br />

Also <strong>the</strong>ir official edition, Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judean Desert, exhibited<br />

more activity.<br />

This instalment of this review series is devoted to this series of<br />

editions, presenting texts most carefully and providing <strong>the</strong>m with<br />

relevant comments. In previous instalments publications of various<br />

kind were reviewed, monographs, collections of articles, original approaches,<br />

and also surveys of research.<br />

The substantial publication, Encyclopedia of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls,<br />

published in two volumes <strong>by</strong> Oxford University Press, is reviewed in<br />

this article (v. 7.12). The entry ìPublicationî <strong>by</strong> Corrado Martone<br />

(Encyclopedia, pp. 721ñ723) gives survey of this activity. Recent<br />

publications and announcements indicate <strong>the</strong> growing interest in <strong>the</strong><br />

Dead Sea Scrolls, both for scholarly research and for providing access<br />

to important discoveries to general public.<br />

3.1.01 Official edition<br />

The series Discoveries of <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert (abbreviation DJD) was<br />

connected since 1955 with Jordan Department of Antiquities and with<br />

institutions important for <strong>the</strong> work on manuscripts. Emanuel Tov, Professor<br />

at <strong>the</strong> Hebrew University in Jerusalem, was appointed in 1990<br />

editor-in-chief of Israel Antiquities Authority. He serves in this function<br />

also for DJD. Its purpose is to publish manuscripts and archaeological<br />

discoveries from <strong>the</strong> Judaean desert. Most volumes are devoted<br />

to discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Qumran area, also represented in special<br />

volumes are sites south and north of it.<br />

69


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

In <strong>the</strong> foreword to <strong>the</strong> first volume of DJD G. Lankester Harding<br />

wrote that <strong>the</strong> work is <strong>by</strong> necessity slow and that <strong>the</strong> series can be<br />

completed after few years. He was right concerning <strong>the</strong> slowness;<br />

<strong>the</strong> series is not yet completed after near<strong>by</strong> half a century since<br />

1955. First volumes were prepared <strong>by</strong> few editors. They were members<br />

of <strong>the</strong> official editorial team. Since 1990s <strong>the</strong> number of editors<br />

is much larger, thus <strong>the</strong> editorial work is much faster. Scholars<br />

from three continents now are participating. Some individual editions<br />

are based on preliminary transcriptions and comments of previous<br />

editors; some of <strong>the</strong>m died before <strong>the</strong>y could complete <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

editorial work.<br />

The slow sequence of sections, 7 volumes in 1966ñ1982, and <strong>the</strong><br />

fast progress <strong>the</strong> 1990s, is visible on <strong>the</strong> following survey.<br />

Chronological survey of DJD volumes:<br />

1955 ñ I; 1961 ñ II; 1962 ñ III; 1963 ñ IV; 1968 ñ V; 1977 ñ VI;<br />

1982 ñ VII; 1990 ñ VIII; 1992 ñ IX; 1994 ñ X, XII, XIII; 1995 ñ XIV,<br />

XIX; 1996 ñ XVIII; 1997 ñ XV, XX, XXII, XXIV, XXVII; 1998 ñ<br />

XI, XXIII, XXV, XXVI; 1999 ñ XXIX, XXXIV, XXXV; 2000 ñ XVI,<br />

XXXVI, XXXVIII; 2001ñ XXX, XXXI.<br />

Individual volumes contain finds from one site or from sites close to<br />

each o<strong>the</strong>r. These sites are listed in <strong>the</strong> last section of <strong>the</strong> following<br />

survey of DJD volumes. In <strong>the</strong> volume XXXVIII finds from 5 sites<br />

are published. Only few sites are in <strong>the</strong> north: Keter Jericho, in vol.<br />

XXXVIII, Wadi Daliyeh, vol. XXIV. The o<strong>the</strong>r sites are in <strong>the</strong> south<br />

from <strong>the</strong> Qumran area.<br />

Not all sites in <strong>the</strong> south are represented in DJD. Finds from<br />

Masada and from <strong>the</strong> Cave of Letters were published in Jerusalem,<br />

texts from Khirbet Mird in Louvain. Most prolific source of manuscripts<br />

and o<strong>the</strong>r finds are Qumran caves. Important finds were found<br />

in caves 1Q and 11Q, minor finds in ìsmall cavesî 2ñ3 and 5ñ10. By<br />

far <strong>the</strong> richest is Qumran cave 4.<br />

4Q manuscripts are published in some volumes according to <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

numbers; as <strong>the</strong>y were assigned with respect to <strong>the</strong> genre of texts,<br />

<strong>the</strong>se volumes are arranged conveniently. Even more convenient is<br />

<strong>the</strong> arrangement of volumes according to categories of texts.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> following survey <strong>the</strong> criteria mentioned here are applied.<br />

70


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Survey of DJD volumes:<br />

CATEGORIES / DJD KIND YEAR REVIEW<br />

SITES NUMBERS IN CV<br />

Q 1ñ2,5ñ11<br />

1Q I 1995<br />

2ñ3Q, 5ñ10Q III 1962<br />

11Q V Psalms 1965<br />

11Q XXIII II 1998<br />

4Q<br />

Biblical<br />

VII XII Gen ñ Num 1994 7<br />

IX XIV Deu ñ Ki 1995 8<br />

(XII) (XVII) Samuel<br />

X XV Prophets 1997 9<br />

XI XVI Psa-Chr 2000 10<br />

IV IX PaleoñHeb 1992<br />

Parabiblical<br />

VIII XIII 1 1994 11*<br />

XIV XIX 2 1995 12<br />

XVII XXII 3 1997 13<br />

XXI XXX 4 2001 23<br />

Halakhic<br />

XXV XXXV 1999 14<br />

(XVI)<br />

(XXI)<br />

Calendrical<br />

3.1.1ñ24<br />

71


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

Sapiential<br />

XV XX 1 1997 15<br />

XXIV XXXIV 2 1999 16<br />

Poetic & Lit.<br />

VI XI 1 1998 17<br />

XX XXIX 2 1999 18<br />

Individual texts<br />

XIX XXVI S 1998 19<br />

XIII XVIII DamascusD.1996 4**<br />

V X MMT 1994 3*<br />

I V 158ñ186 1968<br />

II VI 128ñ157 1977<br />

III VII 428ñ520 1982<br />

XVIII XXV 521ñ528 + 576<br />

ñ 579 1998 20<br />

ñ Aramaic<br />

XXII XXXI 329ñ549 2001 24<br />

Miscellaneous<br />

XXVI XXXVI 2000 22<br />

Unidentified<br />

XXIII XXXIII<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r sites<br />

Wadi Murabbaat<br />

II 1961<br />

Nahal Hever ñ Seiyal<br />

72


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

VIII I Greek 1990<br />

XXVII II documentary 1997 3 *<br />

Wadi Daliyeh<br />

XXIV seals 1997 5 **<br />

(XXVIII) legal I<br />

(XXXII) legal II<br />

Jud. Desert XXXVIII miscellaneous 2000 21<br />

Numbers within round brackets: Volumes not yet published<br />

Volumes reviewed in CV ñ * ñ **<br />

* 36/1994: vol. IX. pp. 247ñ254, 3.1.1; X, 255ñ260; 3.1.2<br />

** 41/1999: vol. XVII, pp. 159ñ162, 3.1.4; XXIV, 162ñ165, 3.1.5:<br />

XXVII, 155ñ159, 3.1.3<br />

Prices of volumes are occasionally indicated in <strong>the</strong> following reviews.<br />

Prices of smaller volumes are about USD 70, of larger volumes<br />

about USD†90. The numbers in brackets of DJD volumes in<br />

this survey point to those being prepared for publication. Many,<br />

mostly shorter texts which were edited previously are reedited in<br />

DJD. 11Q10 TargumJob, published previously in 1971 in Leiden, is<br />

reedited in DJD XXIII (v. infra 3.1.6).<br />

In <strong>the</strong> DJD survey some important texts from Qumran caves are<br />

not included: Complete text of Isaiah (1950) and incomplete<br />

text†(1955) from 1Q, also peöer Habakkuk (1950), Hodayot 1QH<br />

(1955), Community Rule 1QS (1955), War Scroll 1QM (1955). These<br />

texts from 1Q were edited ñ years in brackets ñ and mostly reedited.<br />

Nei<strong>the</strong>r included is <strong>the</strong> Temple Scroll 11Q19 (1977/1983); <strong>the</strong> fragments<br />

of this text, 11Q20, are published in DJD XXIII (v. infra 3.1.6),<br />

In <strong>the</strong> 4Q volumes only 4Q texts are presented. The relations between<br />

<strong>the</strong>m and manuscripts of <strong>the</strong> same work from o<strong>the</strong>r sources are listed<br />

in tables.<br />

The arrangement of DJD volumes is consistent, with respect to <strong>the</strong><br />

character of texts. The large size ñ 25 ◊ 31 cm ñ is convenient for<br />

presenting texts and additional materials in well legible forms. The<br />

volumes are provided with forewords in which <strong>the</strong> development of<br />

73


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

work on <strong>the</strong> edition is explained and <strong>the</strong> editors and <strong>the</strong>ir co-operators<br />

presented. Appropriate attention is devoted to <strong>the</strong> preliminary work<br />

on preparing manuscripts for edition. The contributions of participants<br />

and of institutions are acknowledged.<br />

In some volumes prefaces or introductions inform about character<br />

of texts and about arrangements of <strong>the</strong>ir editions. Individual editions<br />

are provided with introductory information about relevant features of<br />

manuscripts. Physical description of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts, especially of<br />

skin or papyrus, and detailed measurements may be compared with<br />

photographic reproductions on plates.<br />

Sections of palaeography offer characterisations of scripts which<br />

serve as bases for dating of manuscripts. Only in a few instances<br />

dating with help of radiocarbon was applied. Manuscripts are from<br />

<strong>the</strong> period between <strong>the</strong> middle of <strong>the</strong> 3 rd century B. C. E and 68 C. E.<br />

Sections on orthography are in some instances followed <strong>by</strong> data on<br />

phonology and vocabulary. Information about content and genre of<br />

manuscripts are included. Transcriptions of texts are in standard Hebrew<br />

ñ also for cryptic texts ñ and Greek letters. They are arranged in<br />

lines according to <strong>the</strong> lines of original scrolls. Some fragments are<br />

combined and presented in reconstructions. A terminological note:<br />

The term ìtransliterationî may be more appropriate, as <strong>the</strong> printed<br />

letters are representing letters of originals. The term ìtranscriptionî<br />

may be reserved for rendering of o<strong>the</strong>r than alphabetic scripts. Transcriptions<br />

are followed <strong>by</strong> notes on readings; <strong>the</strong>y are helpful especially<br />

for badly damaged manuscripts. Non-biblical texts are translated<br />

ñ into English, in volumes II, III, VI, VII, XXV, XXXI and some<br />

in volume XXII into French. The translations are also arranged according<br />

to <strong>the</strong> lines of <strong>the</strong> originals. Biblical manuscripts are not<br />

translated. Comments to editions are often detailed. They interpret<br />

texts and also point to <strong>the</strong>ir relations to o<strong>the</strong>r texts, biblical and<br />

non-biblical. Some individual editions are closed with conclusions,<br />

summarising results of research. Words of Hebrew and Aramaic texts<br />

are listed in concordances, some separate for individual texts. In plates<br />

all manuscripts are reproduced, mostly in 1:1 scale, some enlarged.<br />

Application of modern technological method made some difficult<br />

fragments better legible.<br />

Close co-operation of competent editors with <strong>the</strong>ir colleagues has<br />

74


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

produced reliable editions and relevant interpretations. They were<br />

printed in user-friendly publications with help of effective methods<br />

applied <strong>by</strong> able assistants and technicians. Grateful users of this magnificent<br />

collection appreciate available editions and express best<br />

wishes for fur<strong>the</strong>r work providing access to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls.<br />

3.1.6 Qumran Cave 11ñII<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXIII. ñ Qumran Cave 11ñII.<br />

11Q2ñ18, 11Q20ñ31. By Florentine GarcÌa MartÌnez, Eibert J. C.<br />

Tigchelaar, and Adam S. van der Woude, incorporating earlier editions<br />

<strong>by</strong> J. P. M. van der Ploeg. ISBN 0-19-826959-5. Oxford:<br />

Clarendon Press 1998, xiv + 487 pp., pl. IñLIV.<br />

All manuscripts from Qumran cave 11 are now published. 11Q1<br />

was edited <strong>by</strong> D. N. Freedman and K. A. Mat<strong>the</strong>ws in 1985, The<br />

Paleo-Hebrew Leviticus Scroll. 11Q19, The Temple Scroll, was published<br />

<strong>by</strong> Y. Yadin in 1977 and 1983, and <strong>by</strong> E. Qimron in 1996. The<br />

Psalms Scroll of Qumran Cave 11 (11QPS a cf. 11Q5) was published<br />

<strong>by</strong> J. A. Sanders in 1965, DJD IV.<br />

This large volume is called ìDutch volumeî(cf. xv). Dutch institutions<br />

provided funds for acquiring manuscripts found <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Bedouin<br />

in 1956 to <strong>the</strong> Palestine Archaeological Museum in Jerusalem in 1961<br />

and 1962. All three editors of <strong>the</strong> volume are at <strong>the</strong> Qumran Institute<br />

at <strong>the</strong> University of Groningen, Van der Woude as <strong>the</strong> first director,<br />

GarcÌa MartÌnez as <strong>the</strong> present director; Dr. Tigchelaar at <strong>the</strong> Institute<br />

provided also most of <strong>the</strong> typesetting. Van der Ploeg is professor at<br />

<strong>the</strong> University of Nijmegen.<br />

Foreword (xiñxii) <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov informs about <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong><br />

volume. Preface (xiiiñxv) <strong>by</strong> Florentino GarcÌa MartÌnez explains <strong>the</strong><br />

development of <strong>the</strong> edition.<br />

In this volume both biblical and non-biblical texts are published.<br />

Texts 11Q2ñ9 are fragments of books of <strong>the</strong> Hebrew Bible, text<br />

11Q10 is targum of Job. 11Q2 Leviticus (1ñ9, pl. I, 9 frgs) was written<br />

about 50 C. E. in elegant square script, only tetragrammaton<br />

YHVH is in <strong>the</strong> Palaeo-Hebrew script. Deuteronomy (11ñ14, pl. II, 3<br />

frgs) is also from about 50 C. E. 11Q4 Ezekiel, edited <strong>by</strong> Edward<br />

D. Herbert (15ñ28, pl. II, LIV, frgs. 1ñ9). This text was purchased <strong>by</strong><br />

75


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

Claremont Graduate School and edited <strong>by</strong> W. H. Brownlee in 1963.<br />

This scroll written about <strong>the</strong> beginning of Christian era, found in<br />

badly damaged state, is now reconstructed (cf. 17ñ19). 11Q5 Psalms,<br />

Fragments E, F (29ñ36, pl. IVñV), supplement The Psalms Scroll in<br />

DJD (v. supra) Fragment E contains remains of four psalms. It was<br />

published <strong>by</strong> Y. Yadin in 1966 and <strong>by</strong> J. A. Sanders in 1967. Fragment<br />

F is published here (36) for <strong>the</strong> first time. 11Q6 Psalms b (37ñ47,<br />

pl. Ill, 9 frgs) has in frg. 2 three verses of Ps 119 in stichometric<br />

arrangement. 1Q7 c (49ñ61, pl. VI, 11 frgs). 11Q8 d (63ñ76, pls.<br />

VIIñVIII, 17 frgs). 11Q9 Psalms 6 ? (77ñ78, pl. VIII, 1 frg.). Biblical<br />

texts are compared with <strong>the</strong> Masoretic texts, and occasionally with<br />

ancient versions, Greek, Latin, Syriac. Extra-biblical texts contained<br />

in <strong>the</strong>se manuscripts are provided with translation. 11Q10 targum<br />

Job (79ñ180, pls. IXñXXI, frgs. 1ñ27, A ñ W). This manuscript was<br />

already published <strong>by</strong> J. P. M. van der Ploeg and A. S. van der Woude,<br />

Le targum de Job de la grotte XI de Qumran (Leiden: Brill 1971). On<br />

columns IñXXXVIII free Aramaic version of preserved chapters†17ñ42<br />

is partially preserved (86). This manuscript was written in<br />

late formal Herodian type, in <strong>the</strong> middle of <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E. (87).<br />

The manuscript is carefully described (79ñ89). Transliterations of<br />

fragmentary columns are provided with notes of readings, translations<br />

with detailed comments (90ñ171). Also unidentified fragments<br />

are presented (171ñ189), 11Q11 apocryphal Psalms (181ñ205, pls.<br />

XXIIñXXV, LIII, columns IñVI). Badly damaged scroll was opened<br />

in 1963. The manuscript was written in late formal Herodian script<br />

about 50ñ70 C. E. Remains of three songs against demons and of<br />

Psalm 91 are preserved, 11Q12 Jubilees (207ñ220, pl.†XXVI,<br />

13 frgs.) on fragmentary manuscript from about 50 C. E. could be<br />

partially reconstructed with help of <strong>the</strong> Ethiopic translation. 11Q13<br />

Melchizedek (221ñ241, pl. XXVII, 11 frgs) written about 50 B. C. E.<br />

describes <strong>the</strong> end of days, in which Melchizedek, a heavenly figure,<br />

will overthrow Belial and his lot. 11Q14 Sefer ha-Milhamah<br />

(243ñ251, pl. XXVIII, 4 frgs) is related to 4Q285, a version of <strong>the</strong><br />

War Scroll (1QM). In 11Q14 <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> victorious eschatological<br />

war is presented. 11Q15 Hymns a (253 ñ 256, pl. XXIX, 4 frgs).<br />

11Q16 b (257ñ258, pl. XXIX, frgs.añc). 11Q17 Shirot ëOlat ha-<br />

Shabbat (259ñ304, pl. XXXñXXXIV, LIII, 42 frgs). This scroll of<br />

76


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Song of Sabbath Sacrifice was opened <strong>by</strong> van der Ploeg in 1963.<br />

C. Newsom published a critical edition of Songs in 1985. She also<br />

edited 4Q400 ñ 407 in DJD XI (1998), 173ñ401 (cf. infra 3.1.17.).<br />

11Q17 was reconstructed in columns Iñ X, contains remains of<br />

Songs 7ñ13. The manuscript in small beautiful script was written at<br />

about <strong>the</strong> beginning of Christian era. 11Q18 New Jerusalem ar<br />

(305ñ355, pls. XXXVñXL, LIII, 37 frgs). This Aramaic work is attested,<br />

also in fragmentary form, in manuscripts from caves 1, 2, 4,<br />

and 5. 11Q18 deals with Temple and offerings. 11Q20 Temple b<br />

(357ñ409, pls. XLIñXLVIII, 43 frgs.). The Temple Scroll 3 11Q19<br />

was published <strong>by</strong> Y. Yadin in 1977 and 1983, and with o<strong>the</strong>r manuscripts<br />

<strong>by</strong> E. Qimron in 1996. Fragments of 11Q20 form columns<br />

IñXVI (358ñ359), which can be compared to columns of 11Q19<br />

(363). The parallels to 11Q19 are underlined in transliterations.<br />

11Q21 Temple c ? (411ñ414, pl. XLVIII, 3 frgs.) is probably a copy of<br />

Temple Scroll. 11Q22 paleo Unidentified Text (419ñ420, pl. XLVIII,<br />

7 frgs.). 11Q23 cryptA Unidentified Text ar (419ñ420, pl. XLVIII,<br />

3 frgs), Aramaic text in cryptic script. 11Q24 Unidentified Text ar<br />

(421ñ422, pl. XLIX, 1 frg.). 11Q25ñ28 Unidentified Text A (pl.<br />

XLIX, 423ñ426, 8 frgs.); B (427ñ428, 3 frgs.); C (429ñ430, 2 frgs.);<br />

D (pl. L,U3l, 1 frg.). 11Q29 Fragment Related to Serekh ha-Yahad<br />

(433ñ434, pl. L, 1 frg.). 11Q30 Unidentified Fragment (435ñ444,<br />

pls. LñLI, 28 frgs.). 11Q31 Unidentified Wads (445ñ446, pl. LII).<br />

Four scrolls before opening are reproduced on plates LIIIñLIV.<br />

Concordances (447ñ487) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann list Hebrew<br />

words with added vowel signs (448ñ466), and Aramaic words<br />

(467ñ487). Manuscripts published in DJD XXIII are mostly fragmentary.<br />

They were found <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Bedouin in 1956, in <strong>the</strong> cave†11,<br />

distant from <strong>the</strong> Essene community centre. Some 11Q manuscripts<br />

were written in <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E., in later period of <strong>the</strong> Essene<br />

community at <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea. Probably new members of <strong>the</strong> community<br />

were staying in <strong>the</strong> 11Q cave; <strong>the</strong>y could use some recently<br />

composed and written works. While previously published 11Q texts<br />

(v. supra) are relatively well preserved, <strong>the</strong> fragmentary texts edited<br />

in this volume required demanding examination for <strong>the</strong>ir publication<br />

and partial reconstruction. The editors completed this task most successfully.<br />

All texts from cave 11 are now available for fur<strong>the</strong>r re-<br />

77


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

search. Especially <strong>the</strong> study of Hebrew can benefit from relevant<br />

sources, made accessible previously and completely now.<br />

3.1.7ñ10 Biblical manuscripts<br />

In this series of 4Q manuscripts biblical texts in standard Jewish<br />

script are included. Manuscripts in Palaeo-Hebrew scriptñand also<br />

Greek manuscriptsñwere published in DJD IX (reviewed in<br />

CV 36/1994: 247ñ254,3.1.1). Biblical manuscripts in this series are<br />

presented according patterns used in o<strong>the</strong>r DJD volumes. Manuscripts<br />

are introduced <strong>by</strong> informationís on physical details, palaeography<br />

and orthography. Transcriptions are printed in lines corresponding<br />

to those in <strong>the</strong> original scrolls, and are followed <strong>by</strong> notes<br />

on readings.<br />

Texts are not translated. They are provided with lists of variants,<br />

from Hebrew texts and from ancient versions, Greek, Latin, Syriac<br />

and targums, occasionally also Coptic, Ethiopic, Armenian. Fragments<br />

from 4Q are related to mostly <strong>the</strong> Masoretic text, mostly in<br />

tables. Textual character of 4Q manuscripts is defined.<br />

The sequence of books is generally that of Hebrew Bible. In <strong>the</strong><br />

first volume first four books of <strong>the</strong> Torah are presented, in <strong>the</strong> second<br />

Deuteronomy and ìhistoricalî books, in <strong>the</strong> fourth Prophets and in<br />

<strong>the</strong> fifth Writings. One exception: For Samuel <strong>the</strong> third volume, not<br />

yet published, is reserved.<br />

3.1.7 Biblical manuscript [1]<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XII ñ Qumran Cave 4 VII. Genesis<br />

to Numbers. By Eugene Ulrich, Frank Moore Cross, James R. Davila,<br />

Nathan Jastram, Judith E. Sanderson, Emanuel Tov, John Strugnell.<br />

ISBN 0-19-826365-1. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1994. xvi + 272 pp.,<br />

plates IñXLIX.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiñxii) Eugene Ulrich explains <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong><br />

volume. He began organising it in 1985, following <strong>the</strong> invitation of<br />

Frank Moore Cross. Participation of editors is acknowledged as is <strong>the</strong><br />

support of co-operators and of institutions. Abbreviations and sigla<br />

are listed (xiiiñxv), with bibliographical data. In <strong>the</strong> introduction<br />

78


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

(1ñ6) <strong>the</strong> importance of ancient Hebrew manuscripts is appreciated.<br />

Some from Qumran cave 4 were purchased from <strong>the</strong> Bedouin. The<br />

dating of <strong>the</strong> scrolls is stated for <strong>the</strong> period between about<br />

150 B. C. E. and 68 C. E. The introduction contains also information<br />

about naming and numbering of <strong>the</strong> Qumran scrolls and about arrangement<br />

of introductions to <strong>the</strong> individual editions. Most of <strong>the</strong>m<br />

contain fragments of only one book of <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch. In texts 4Q1,<br />

4Q17 and 4Q23 two books are represented. The numbers of manuscripts<br />

are: Genesis 9 + 1, Exodus 8 + 3, Leviticus 5 + 1, Numbers<br />

1 + 1. Genesis manuscripts were edited <strong>by</strong> James R. Davila.<br />

4Q1 4QGenñExod a (7ñ30, pls. IñV, 61 frgs.) contains fragments<br />

from <strong>the</strong> area between Gen 22 and Exod 9. The script points to<br />

125ñ100 B. C. E. 4Q2 Gen b (31ñ38, pls. VIñVIIJ, 4 frgs.). 4Q3 c<br />

(39ñ42, pl. IX, 1 frg.). 4Q4 d (43ñ46, pl. IX, 1 frg.). 4Q5 e (47ñ52, pl.<br />

X, 10 frgs.). 4Q6 f (53ñ55, pl. XI, 1 frg.). 4Q7 g (57ñ60, pl. XII, 3<br />

frgs.). 4Q8 h (61ñ64, pl. XII, 3 frgs. + title BRäJT without íA). 4Q9 j<br />

(65ñ73, pl. XIII, 12 frgs.) 4Q10 k (75ñ78, pl. XII, 5 frgs.).<br />

Manuscripts of Exodus 4Q13 Exod b and 4Q17 ExodñLev f were<br />

edited <strong>by</strong> Frank Moore Cross, 4Q14ñ16 Exod and 4Q18ñ21 Exod <strong>by</strong><br />

Judith E. Sanderson.<br />

4Q13 Exod b (79ñ95, pls. XIVñXV, 6 frgs.). 4Q14 c (97ñ125, pls.<br />

XVIñXX, 45 frgs.). 4Q15 d (127ñ128, pl. XXI, 1 frg.).ñ 4Q16 e<br />

(129ñ131, pl. XXI, 1 frg.) 4Q17 ExodñLev f (133ñ144, pl. XXII,<br />

5 frgs.). ñ 4Q18 Exod 8 (145ñ146, pl. XXI, 1 frg.). 4Q19 h (147,<br />

pl. XXI, 1 frg.). ñ 4Q20 j (149ñ150, pl. XXI, 3 frgs.). ñ 4Q21 k (151,<br />

pl. XXI, 1 frg.).<br />

Manuscripts of Leviticus were edited <strong>by</strong> Eugen Ulrich (4Q23ñ24)<br />

and <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov (4Q25, 26, 26ab).<br />

4Q23 LevñNum a (153ñ176. pls. XXIIIñXXX, 103 frgs.). 4Q24<br />

Lev b (177ñ187, pls. XXXIñXXXIV, 30 frgs.). 4Q25 c (189ñ192, pl.<br />

XXXV, 9 frgs.).ñ4Q26 d (193ñ195, pl. XXXVI, 4 frgs.).ñ4Q26a e<br />

(197ñ201, pl. XXXVII, 9 frgs.). 4Q26b g (203ñ204, pl. XXXVII,<br />

1frg.).<br />

Manuscript with Numbers only, 4Q27,was edited <strong>by</strong> Nathan<br />

Jastram. Num is contained also in 4Q23.<br />

4Q27 Num b (295ñ267, pls. XXXVIIIñXLIX, 109 frgs.). In this<br />

relatively well preserved manuscript from <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> 1 st<br />

79


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

century B. C. E. some lines are in red ink (cf. pl. XLIX); <strong>the</strong>y are<br />

rendered in italics in <strong>the</strong> transcriptions (cf. 210ñ211, 209).<br />

Index of biblical passages (269ñ270) facilitates access to <strong>the</strong> fragments,<br />

as does index of <strong>the</strong> contents of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts (271ñ272).<br />

On plates IñXLVIII fragments are reproduced on black and white<br />

photographs; on plate XLIX <strong>the</strong> originals colours, brown skin, red<br />

and black ink, are well visible.<br />

Some editions are based on Ph. D. dissertations at Harvard University,<br />

supervised <strong>by</strong> Professor Cross. James R. Davila ñ who received<br />

his Master of Arts degree at University of California, Los<br />

Angeles†ñ used for 4Q1ñ10 his dissertation of 1988, Nathan Jastram<br />

for 4Q27 his dissertation of 1990. This volume is <strong>the</strong> result of demanding<br />

editorial activity. Great amount of fragments was competently<br />

combined into coherent manuscript editions. They are very<br />

helpful for thorough study of first four books of Pentateuch. Also <strong>the</strong><br />

analyses of texts are significant contribution to biblical studies.<br />

3.1.8 Biblical manuscripts [2]<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XIV. Qumran Cave 4†IX. Deuteronomy,<br />

Joshua, Judges, Kings. By Eugene Ulrich, Frank Moore Cross,<br />

Sidney White Crawford, Julie Ann Duncan, Patrick W. Skehan,<br />

Emanuel Tov, Julio Trebolle Barrera. ISBN 0-19-826366-X. Oxford:<br />

Clarendon Press 1995. xvi + 188, plates IñXXXVI.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiñxii) Eugene Ulrich explains how <strong>the</strong> editors<br />

co-operated on production of this volume, and acknowledges <strong>the</strong> support<br />

of personalities and institutions. The introduction (1ñ6) to this<br />

second volume of <strong>the</strong> series of biblical manuscripts in Jewish script<br />

informs about <strong>the</strong> naming and numbering of <strong>the</strong> scrolls and about <strong>the</strong><br />

arrangement of <strong>the</strong> individual editions: introductions, transcriptions,<br />

notes, and reproductions.<br />

Deuteronomy is represented <strong>by</strong> 19 manuscripts (7ñ142). They<br />

were edited <strong>by</strong> Sidney White Crawfordñ4Q26, 30ñ331, 33ñ34,<br />

41ñ 43, Julie Ann Duncan ñ 4Q29, 32, 35, 37 ñ 38, 39ñ40, and Patrick<br />

W. Skehan and Eugene Ulrichñ4Q44.<br />

4Q28 Deut a (7ñ8, pl. I, 1 frg.). 4Q29 b (9ñ14, pl. II, 8 frgs.). 4Q30 c<br />

(15ñ34, pls. IIIñIX, 62 frgs.). 4Q31 d (35ñ38, pl. X, columns IñII.).<br />

80


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

4Q32 e (39ñ44, pl. XI, 8 frgs.). 4Q33 f (45ñ54, pls. XIIñXV, 35 + 6<br />

frgs.). 4Q34 g (55ñ59, pl. XI, 11 frgs.). 4Q35 h (61ñ70, pl. XVñXVIII,<br />

15 frgs.). 4Q36 i (71ñ74, pl. XIX, 6+1 frgs.). 4Q37 j (75ñ91,<br />

p. XXñXXIII, 34 + 13 frgs.). 4Q38 Deut k1 (93ñ98, pl. XXIV, 5 frgs.).<br />

4Q38a k2 (93ñ105, pl. XXV, 10 frgs.), and 4Q38b k3 (107, pl. XXV,<br />

1 frg.) are separate texts; <strong>the</strong> name of God, YHVH, is written in square<br />

script in Deut k1 , in Palaeo-Hebrew script in Deut k2<br />

4Q39 Deut l (109ñ112, pl. XXVI, 11 frgs.). 4Q40 m (113ñ116, pl.<br />

XXV, 5 frgs.). 4Q41 n (117ñ128, pls. XXVIIñXXIX, columns IñVI.).<br />

4Q42 o (129ñ133, pl. XXX, 15 frgs.). 4Q43 p (135ñ136, pl. XXXI, 2<br />

frgs.). 4Q44 q (137ñ142, pl. XXXI, 5 frgs.).<br />

The editors devoted appropriate attention to relations of Qumran<br />

manuscripts to Masoretic and Samaritan texts. The differences appear<br />

especially in orthography. Deuteronomy is also well represented<br />

in o<strong>the</strong>r Qumran caves: 1Q4ñ5, 2Q10ñ12, 5Q1, 6Q3 (?), 11Q3. In<br />

4Q also manuscripts 4Q45ñ46 in Palaeo-Hebrew script were found.<br />

The importance of Deuteronomy for <strong>the</strong> Qumran community can be<br />

seen in great number of manuscripts and also in use of Deuteronomy<br />

in some non-biblical texts. The ìhistoricalî books are attested only in<br />

few manuscripts, Joshua and Judges in two, Kings in one. Samuel<br />

scrolls 4Q51ñ53 have to be published in DJD XVII.<br />

4Q47 Josh 3 (143ñ152, pls. XXIIñXXIV, 22 frgs.) was edited <strong>by</strong><br />

Eugene Ulrich.<br />

4Q48 Josh (153ñ160, pl. XXXV, 6 frgs.) was published ñ with<br />

reconstruction ñ <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov.<br />

Three manuscripts were edited <strong>by</strong> Julio Trebolla Barrera:<br />

4Q49 Judg a (161ñ164, pl. XXXVI, 1 frg.). 4Q50 b (165ñ169,<br />

pl. XXXVI, 3 frgs.).<br />

4Q54 Kgs (171ñ183, pl. XXXVII, 8 frgs.). 1 Kings 7:19ñ8:19 is<br />

reconstructed (180ñ181). The original reading in 1 Kings 8:16 is<br />

partially preserved (177).<br />

Editions are provided with many references to Hebrew texts,<br />

Masoretic and Samaritan, and to ancient versions, especially Greek<br />

Septuagint and Syriac. Index of biblical passages (185ñ186) can be<br />

used also for comparison with o<strong>the</strong>r texts and versions. Index of <strong>the</strong><br />

contents of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts (187ñ188) is a convenient tool for <strong>the</strong><br />

study of <strong>the</strong> texts. Photographs of manuscripts on plates IñXXXVII<br />

81


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

are mostly well legible. The legibility of some fragments was enhanced<br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir enlargement. The careful edition of fragmentary manuscripts<br />

is provided with detailed introductions and copious notes.<br />

They can be effectively used for <strong>the</strong> study of biblical books, especially<br />

of Deuteronomy.<br />

3.1.9 Biblical manuscripts [4]<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XV. Qumran Cave 4 X. The Prophets.<br />

By Eugene Ulrich, Frank Moore Cross, Russell E, Fuller, Judith<br />

E. Sanderson, Patrick W. Skehan, Emanuel Tov, with <strong>the</strong> collaboration<br />

of Ca<strong>the</strong>rine M. Murphy, Curt Niccum. ISBN 0-19-826937-4.<br />

Oxford: Clarendon Press 1997. xvi + 525 pp., plates IñLXIV.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiñxii) E. Ulrich explains <strong>the</strong> work of editors and<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir assistants as well as <strong>the</strong> outside support. The introduction (1ñ6)<br />

provides information about <strong>the</strong> arrangement of <strong>the</strong> edition, presented<br />

already previously. Nearly half of <strong>the</strong> volume is devoted to 18 manuscripts<br />

of Isaiah. Jeremiah is represented <strong>by</strong> less manuscripts, 5,<br />

Ezekiel <strong>by</strong> 3, Twelve Prophets <strong>by</strong> 7. The edition of 4Q Isaiah manuscripts<br />

was drafted <strong>by</strong> Skehan, after his death in 1980 it was completed<br />

<strong>by</strong> Ulrich (xi).<br />

4Q55 Isa a (7ñ18, pls. IñII, 18 frgs.) 4Q56 b (19ñ43, pls. IIIñVI, 47<br />

frgs.). 4Q57 c (45ñ73, pls. VIIñXII, 79 frgs.). The name of God,<br />

YHWH, is written in Palaeo-Hebrew script, and also <strong>the</strong> word for<br />

God, íLWHYM (46). 4Q58 d (75ñ88, pls. XIIIñXV, 16 frgs.). 4Q59 e<br />

(89ñ97, pls. XIIIñXV, 25 frgs.). 4Q60 f (99ñ111, pls. XVIIIñXXI, 34<br />

frgs.). 4Q61 g (113ñ115, pl. XXI, 2 frgs.). 4Q62 h (117ñ119, pl. XXI,<br />

2 frgs.). 4Q62a i (121ñ122, pl. XXI, 2 frgs.). 4Q63 j (123, pl. XXII,<br />

1 frg.). 4Q64 k (125ñ127, pl. XXII, 5 frgs.). 4Q65 l (125ñ130, pl. XXII,<br />

2 frgs.), 4Q66 m (131ñ132, pl. XXII, 3 frgs.). 4Q67 n (133ñ134, pl.<br />

XXIII, 1 frg.). 4Q68 o (135ñ137, pl. XXIII, 1 frg.). 4Q69 papIsa p<br />

(139, pl. XXIII, 2 frgs.). 4Q69a q (141, pl. XXIII, 1 frg.). 4Q69b r<br />

(143, pl. XXIII, 1 frg.).<br />

The Jeremiah manuscripts were edited <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov.<br />

4Q70 Jer a (145ñ170, pls. XXIVñXXIX, frgs. 1ñ36: columns<br />

IñXIV, 37ñ50). This text written about 300 B. C. E. is one of <strong>the</strong><br />

earliest Qumran scrolls.<br />

82


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

4Q71 b (171ñ176, pl. XXIX, 1 frg.). 4Q72 C (177ñ201, pls.<br />

XXXñXXXVI, frgs. 1ñ55, 56ñ72). 4Q72a d (203ñ205, pl. XXXVII,<br />

1 frg.). 4Q72b e (207, pl. XXXVII, 1 frg.<br />

Judith E. Sanderson edited <strong>the</strong> Ezekiel manuscripts.<br />

4Q73 Ezek a (209ñ214, pl. XXXVIII, 4 frgs.). 4Q74 b (215ñ218, pl.<br />

XXXIX, 6 frgs.). 4Q72b C (219ñ220, 1 frg.).<br />

The manuscripts of <strong>the</strong> Twelve were edited <strong>by</strong> Russell E. Fuller.<br />

4Q76 XII a (221ñ232, pls. XLñXLII, 23 frgs.). The sequence in<br />

columns IñVII is Zech Mal, Jon (222). 4Q77 XII b (233ñ236,<br />

pl. XLIII. 6 frgs.). 4Q78 c (237ñ251, pls. XLIXñXLVI, 38 frgs.).<br />

4Q79 d (253ñ256, pl. XLVII, 2 frgs.). 4Q80 e (257ñ265, pl. XLVII,<br />

25 frgs.). 4Q81 f (267ñ270, pl. XLVIII, 5 frgs.). 4Q82 g (271ñ318, pls.<br />

XLñLIV, frgs. 1ñ105 + unidentified frgs. 106ñ258).<br />

Ca<strong>the</strong>rine Murphy contributed <strong>by</strong> applying technological advances,<br />

computer searching and digital imaging. Index of biblical<br />

passages (319ñ321) and index of <strong>the</strong> contents of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts<br />

(323ñ325) facilitate orientation in this rich collection of important<br />

texts. Photographic reproductions are presented on plates IñLIV,<br />

Some fragments are deteriorated, especially those of <strong>the</strong> manuscript<br />

4Q82 XII 8 (pls. XLIXñLXIV). Patterns of deterioration are shown on<br />

pls. XLIXñLII. Small fragments 60 and 61 were photographed at<br />

verso and verso mirror (pl. LVIII).<br />

Manuscripts are exactly described and measured. Their dates are<br />

indicated according to palaeographic criteria. Relations to Hebrew<br />

text types, also those attested in Qumran scrolls, are listed, as are<br />

those to ancient versions. Both reliable editions and insightful observations<br />

will be highly appreciated as significant contributions to biblical<br />

studies.<br />

The Book of Isaiah is <strong>the</strong> only book of <strong>the</strong> Hebrew Bible completely<br />

preserved in <strong>the</strong> Qumran area, in <strong>the</strong> manuscript published<br />

in 1950, IQIsa a . In 1Q also <strong>the</strong> large text Isa b (l955) was found.<br />

Shorter manuscripts are 1Q8 and 5Q3. Commentary of peöer type is<br />

attested, 4Q161ñ165, 3Q4. Book of Isaiah was frequently quoted in<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r works. Now 4Q texts can be used to enrich <strong>the</strong> intensive research<br />

of this book.<br />

83


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

3.1.10 Biblical manuscripts [5]<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XVIñQumran Cave 4 XI. Psalms<br />

to Chronicles. By Eugene Ulrich, Frank Moore Cross, Joseph<br />

A. Fitzmyer, Peter W. Flint, Sarianna Metso, Ca<strong>the</strong>rine M. Murphy,<br />

Curt Niccum, Patrick W. Skehan, Emanuel Tov and Julio Trebolle<br />

Barrera. ISBN 0-19-826943-9. Oxford: Clarendon Press<br />

2000. xvi + 303 pp., pls. IñXXXVIII.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiñxii) E. Ulrich informs about <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong><br />

edition, <strong>the</strong> participation of editors and <strong>the</strong>ir colleagues, and about<br />

various kinds of support. The introduction (1ñ6), similar to those in<br />

previous volumes of this series of biblical manuscripts, deals with<br />

arrangement of individual editions. In this edition of manuscripts of<br />

Writings about half is devoted to Psalms. The o<strong>the</strong>r books follow in<br />

<strong>the</strong> standard sequence. Psalms were edited <strong>by</strong> P. W. Skehan, E. Ulrich,<br />

and P. W. Flint (7ñ167). Ps 122, 4Q522, quoted from ano<strong>the</strong>r 4Q text,<br />

was previously edited <strong>by</strong> …. Puech (169ñ170). Due to <strong>the</strong> large<br />

number of Psalms manuscripts, 23 + 1, <strong>the</strong>ir list is presented here in<br />

briefest manner: <strong>the</strong> 4Q number, letter of sequence, pages of edition,<br />

plates, numbers of fragments.<br />

83 a (7ñ22, IñII, 24). 84 b (23ñ48, IIIñVI, 37). 85 c (49ñ61. VIIñIX,<br />

26). 86 d (63ñ71, X, 14). 87 e (73ñ84, XIñXII, 26). 88 f (85ñ106,<br />

XIIñXIV, 1ñ2 + v. infra). 89 g (107ñ112, XV, 6, v. infra). 90 h (113ñ115,<br />

XV, 2, v. infra). ñ91 j (117ñ121, XVI, 9). 92 k 123ñ125, XVII, 1). 93 l<br />

(127ñ129, XVII, 1). 94 m (131ñ133, XVII, 9). 95 n (135ñ137, XVIII,<br />

3). 96 o (139ñ141, XVIII, 2). 97 p (143ñ144, XVIII. 2). 98 q (145ñ149,<br />

XIX, 11). 98a r (151ñ152, XIX, 2). 98b S XIX, 2). 98c t (155, XIX, 1).<br />

98d u (157, XX, 1). 98e v (159, XX, 1). 98f w (161ñ162, XX, 2). 98g x<br />

(163ñ167, XX, 1). 4Q522 (169ñ170, v. infra).<br />

Ad 4Q88: After Ps 109 non-biblical poems with translations<br />

(96ñ106: Apostrophe to Zion, Eschatological Hymn, Apostrophe to<br />

Judah).<br />

Ad 4Q89 and 90: Psalm 119 was written with each verse on separate<br />

line.<br />

Ad 4Q522: Psalm 122 is reedited with references to <strong>the</strong> edition <strong>by</strong><br />

…. Puech in ìProphÈtie de Josueî in DJD XXV (cf. 3.1.20), frgs.<br />

22ñ25, pp. 69ñ70, pl. IV.<br />

84


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Job, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich and Sarianna Metso: 4Q99 Job a171ñ178<br />

(pl. XXI, 23 frgs). 4Q100 b (179ñ180, pl. XXII, 6 frgs.).<br />

Proverbs, <strong>by</strong> Patrick W. Skehan and Eugene Ulrich: 4Q102 Prov a<br />

(181ñ182, pl. XXII, 2 frgs.). 4Q103 b (183ñ186, pl. XXIII, 15 frgs.)<br />

Ruth, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich and Ca<strong>the</strong>rine M. Murphy: 4Q104 Ruth a<br />

(187ñ189, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.).ñ4Q105 b (191ñ194, pl. XXIX, 4 frgs.).<br />

Canticles, <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov: Introduction to 4Q106ñ108 (195ñ198):<br />

Some passages, e.g. Cant 4:4ñ7, are omitted. The copies of <strong>the</strong> Five<br />

Scrolls are of small size, perhaps for liturgical use. 4Q106 Cant 3<br />

(199ñ204, pl. XXIV, 6 frgs) 4Q107 b (205ñ218, pl. XXV, 3 frgs.).<br />

4Q108 c (219, XXV, 1 frg.).<br />

Qoheleth, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich: 4Q109 Qoh a (221ñ226, pl. XXVI,<br />

7 frgs.). 4Q110 b (227, pl. XXVII, 2 frgs.).<br />

Lamentations, <strong>by</strong> Frank Moore Cross: 4Q111 Lam (pls.<br />

XXVIIñXXVIII, 4 frgs.).<br />

Daniel, 4Q112ñ115 <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich, 4Q116 <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich<br />

and Curt Niccum. 4Q112 Dan a (239ñ254, pls., XXIXñXXXI,<br />

18 frgs.). 4Q113 b (255ñ267, pls. XXXIIñXXXIII, 20 frgs.). 4Q114 c<br />

(269ñ277, pls. XXXIVñXXXVI, 3 frgs.). 4Q115 Dan d (pls.<br />

XXXVIñXXXVII, 16 frgs.). 4Q116 e (287ñ289, pl. XXXVIII, 7 frgs.).<br />

Ezra, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich: 4Q117Ezra (291ñ293, pl. XXXVIII,<br />

3frgs.).<br />

Chronicles, <strong>by</strong> Julio Trebolle Barrera: 4Q118 Chr (295ñ297,<br />

pl. XXXVIII, 1 frg.).<br />

Index of biblical passages (299ñ300); Es<strong>the</strong>r and Nehemiah are<br />

not represented. Index of contents of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts (301ñ302). All<br />

photographs on plates IñXXXVIII are of natural size. The editors<br />

produced a reliable edition of fragmentary, often difficult texts. Their<br />

introduction and lists of variants enhance <strong>the</strong> value of this volume.<br />

The large number of Psalms manuscripts may stimulate <strong>the</strong>ir more<br />

detailed research.<br />

3.1.11ñ13 Para-biblical texts<br />

Various kinds of para-biblical texts and <strong>the</strong>ir various relations to biblical<br />

books are characterised <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov, editor-in-chief of DJD,<br />

85


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

in his foreword to volume XIII (ix). As most of <strong>the</strong> 4Q documents<br />

had to be published according to <strong>the</strong>ir literary genre (cf. ib.), originally<br />

three volumes had to be devoted to <strong>the</strong>m. These volumes XIII<br />

(1994), XIX (1995), and XXII (1997) are reviewed here below, <strong>the</strong><br />

fourth volume (XXX) published in 2001 is reviewed in addition<br />

v. infra 3.1.23.<br />

3.1.11 Para-biblical Texts, Part 1<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XIII ñ Qumran Cave 4ñVIII.<br />

Para-biblical Texts, Part 1. By Harold Attridge, Torleif Elgvin, Jozef<br />

Milik, Saul Olyan, John Strugnell, Emanuel Tov, James VanderKam<br />

and Sidnie White, in consultation with James VanderKam.<br />

ISBN 0-19-826760-6. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1994. x + 470 pp.,<br />

pls. IñXLIII.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> foreword (ixñx) Emanuel Tov points to new features in publishing<br />

4Q texts (v. supra, 3.1.11ñ13). He also mentions that full concordances<br />

of all <strong>the</strong> words in <strong>the</strong> non-biblical texts will be published.<br />

The section A (1ñ175) contains fragments of 13 manuscripts, <strong>the</strong><br />

section B (187ñ351) those of 5 manuscripts; sections C, D, E contain<br />

one manuscripts each (cf. 353ñ441).<br />

A. Jubilees, <strong>by</strong> J. VanderKam and J. T. Milik.<br />

4Q216ñ224 are from <strong>the</strong> book of Jubilees which is completely<br />

preserved in accurate Ethiopic translation (4). 4Q216 Jubilees a (1ñ22,<br />

pls. IñII, 18 frgs.). 4Q217 papJubilees b ? (23ñ33, pl. III, 8 frgs.).<br />

4Q218 (35ñ38, pl. IV, 1 frg.). 4Q219 (39ñ53, pl. IV, 16 frgs.). 1Q220 e<br />

(55ñ61, pl. V, 1 frg.). 4Q221 f (63ñ85. pl. VI, 19 frgs.). 4Q222 g<br />

(87ñ94, pl. V, 6 frgs.). 4Q223ñ224 pap h (95ñ140, pls. VIIñIX,<br />

69 frgs.).<br />

Previously unknown texts, classified <strong>by</strong> Milik as Pseudo-Jubilees,<br />

employ <strong>the</strong> language of Jubilees, but are not copies of it (142): 4Q225<br />

Pseudo-Jubilees a (141ñ155, pl. X, 3 frgs.). 4Q226 b (157ñ169, pl. XI,<br />

14 frgs.). 4Q227 c (171ñ175, pl. XII, 2 frgs.). 4Q228 Text with<br />

a Citation from Jubilees (177ñ185, pl. XII, 5 frgs.).<br />

B. Reworked Pentateuch, <strong>by</strong> E. Tov and S. White, who edited<br />

4Q365a. Tov wrote <strong>the</strong> introduction to 4QReworked Pentateuch bñe<br />

(187ñ196): Manuscripts 4Q364ñ367 and 4Q158 are copies of a com-<br />

86


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

position called now Reworked Pentateuch. The Pentateuch text is<br />

provided <strong>by</strong> exegetical additions. The basic biblical text belongs to<br />

<strong>the</strong> so called Proto-Samaritan group.<br />

4Q364 Reworked Pentateuch b (197ñ254, pls. XIIIñXXI, frgs.<br />

1ñ32, AñZ, AAñII). 4Q365 c (255ñ318, pls. XXIIñXXXII, frgs.<br />

1ñ38, AñX). 4Q366 d (335ñ343, pls., XXXV, 5 frgs.). 4Q367 e<br />

(345ñ351, pl. XXXVI, frgs. 1ñ3, A).<br />

4Q365a Temple? (319ñ333, pls. XXXIIIñXXXIV, 5 frgs.). This<br />

text contains non-biblical material similar to <strong>the</strong> Temple Scroll, 11Q19.<br />

C. Prayer of Enosh, <strong>by</strong> H. Attridge and J. Strugnell: 4Q369<br />

(353ñ362, pl. XXXVII, 9 frgs.). The name of person is written on<br />

frg. 1, col. I, line 10, as ḤNWK and translated Enoch.<br />

D. paraKings et al., <strong>by</strong> S. Olyan: 4Q382 pap (365ñ416, pls.<br />

XXXVIIIñXLI, 154 frgs.). The name of God, tetragrammaton, indicated<br />

<strong>by</strong> four dots, v. frg. 9, line 5).<br />

E. Paraphrase of Genesis and Exodus, <strong>by</strong> T. Elgvin and E. Tov:<br />

4Q422 (417ñ441, pls. XLIIñXLIII, frgs. 1ñ10, AñT). Columns IñIII<br />

are arranged as reconstruction on plate XLII.<br />

Concordances (443ñ470) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. J. Pfann and W. Schniedewind<br />

present words according to groups of texts: 4Q216ñ<br />

228.4Q364ñ367. 4Q369, 4Q382, 4Q422. Photographs of <strong>the</strong> papyrus<br />

manuscript 4Q382 (pls. XXXVIIIñXLI) are well legible. On plate<br />

XLI <strong>the</strong>y are conveniently arranged, so that <strong>the</strong>y look like a reconstruction.<br />

3.1.12 Para-biblical Texts, Part 2<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XIX ñ Qumran Cave 4 XIV.<br />

Parabiblical Texts, Part 2. By Magen Broshi, Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Joseph<br />

Fitzmyer, Erik Larson, Carol Newsom, Lawrence Schiffman, Mark<br />

Smith, Michael Stone, John Strugnell and Ada Yardeni,in consultation<br />

with James VanderKam. ISBN 0-9-826389-9. Oxford: Clarendon<br />

Press 1995. xii + 267 pp., pls. IñXXIX.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi) Emanuel Tov mentions that this volume was<br />

typeset in Jerusalem.<br />

añd Texts are published in sections AñM. Five texts are Aramaic,<br />

Tobit, 4Q 196ñ199, and List of False Prophets, 4Q399.<br />

87


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

A. Tobit, <strong>by</strong> J. Fitzmyer. This section is provided with introduction<br />

to texts 4Q196ñ200 (1ñ5). Both <strong>the</strong> Aramaic and Hebrew form<br />

agree with <strong>the</strong> Greek version in Codex Sinaiticus and with Vetus<br />

Latina. 4Q196 papTobit ar (7ñ39, pls. IñV, 49 frgs.), Aramaic on<br />

papyrus. 4Q197 b ar (41ñ56, pls. VIñVIII, 7 frgs.). 4Q198 c ar (57ñ60,<br />

pl. VIII. 2 frgs.). 4Q199 d ar (61ñ62, pl. VIII, 2 frgs.). 4Q200 Tobit e<br />

(63ñ76, pls. IXñX, 9 frgs.) is Hebrew.<br />

B. By M. Broshi and A. Yardeni: 4Q339 List of False Prophets ar<br />

(77ñ79, pl. XI, 1 frg.). This Aramaic text may not be an Essene composition,<br />

as <strong>the</strong>y used only Hebrew; with reference to S. Segertís<br />

publications of 1963 and 1965 (77, n. 2).<br />

C. By M. Broshi and A. Yardeni, 4Q340 List of Netinim (81ñ84,<br />

pl. XI, 1 frg.).<br />

D. By C. Newsom, 4Q370 Admonition on <strong>the</strong> Flood (85ñ97,<br />

pl. XII, 1 frg.).<br />

E. By C. Newsom, 4Q374 Discourse on <strong>the</strong> Exodus/Conquest Tradition<br />

(99ñ110, pl. XIII, 16 frgs.).<br />

F. By J. Strugnell, 4Q375 Apocryphon of Moses a (111ñ119,<br />

pl. XIV, 1 frg.). 4Q376 b ? (121ñ136, pl. XV, 2 frgs.). Related to 1Q22<br />

and 1Q29. Probably following <strong>the</strong> tradition of Zadokite priests.<br />

G. By M. Smith. 4Q384 papApocryphon of Jeremiah B? (137ñ162,<br />

pl. XVI, 27 frgs.). The relation to 4Q385ñ390 is unclear.<br />

H. By M. Smith. 4Q391 papPseudo-Exekiel 6 (153ñ193, pls.<br />

XVIIñXXV, 78 frgs,). The language is similar to canonical book of<br />

Ezekiel.<br />

I. By M. Smith. 4Q462 Narrative C (198ñ209, pl. XXVI, 7 frgs.). ñ<br />

4Q463 D (211ñ214, pl. XXVII, 4 frgs.). The imminent restoration of<br />

<strong>the</strong> people of God is announced (v. 205ñ208).<br />

J. By E. Eshel and M. Stone. 4Q454 Exposition on <strong>the</strong> Patriarchs<br />

(215ñ230, pl. XXVIII, 11 frgs.). This narrative has expository character<br />

(v. 210ñ211).<br />

K. By E. Eshel and M. Stone. 4Q464a Narrative E (231ñ232,<br />

pl. XIX, 1 frg.).<br />

L. By E. Eshel and M. Stone. 4Q464b Unclassified Fragments<br />

(233ñ234, pl. XXIX, 2 frgs.).<br />

M. By E. Larson, L. Schiffman, and J. Strugnell, 4Q470 Text Men-<br />

88


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

tioning Zedekiah (235ñ244, pl. XXIX, 3 frgs.). The King is evaluated<br />

more positively. due to his covenant with God.<br />

S. Pfann prepared two concordances, Hebrew (246ñ258), in which<br />

14 texts are listed separately, and Aramaic (259ñ267), containing<br />

words from 4Q196ñ199 and from 4Q339. Plates IñXXIX present reproduction<br />

of Hebrew and Aramaic texts, those on plates IñVIII<br />

and XI. Different scripts used in Aramaic manuscripts correspond to<br />

those in Hebrew texts (cf. 7, 41, 57, 61). The arrangement is consistent;<br />

physical description analyses of palaeography and orthography,<br />

precede <strong>the</strong> editions of original textsí, notes and readings, translations<br />

and comments follow. Close co-operation of many scholars produced<br />

<strong>the</strong> publication of important texts, a reliable basis for fur<strong>the</strong>r<br />

research, and valuable observations and suggestions.<br />

3.1.13 Parabiblical Texts, Part 3<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXII ñ Qumran Cave 4 XVII.<br />

Parabiblical Texts, Part 3. By George Brooke, John Collins, Torleif<br />

Elgvin, Peter Flint, Jonas Greenfield, Erik Larson, Carol Newsom,<br />

…mile Puech, Lawrence H. Schiffman, Michael Stone and Julio<br />

Trebolle Barrera, in consultation with James VanderKam. ISBN<br />

0-19-826936-6. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1996. xii + 351 pp., pls.<br />

IñXXIX.<br />

In this third volume more than half is devoted to four Aramaic<br />

texts, while <strong>the</strong> Hebrew texts are mostly minor. E. Tov appreciates<br />

<strong>the</strong> effective support for <strong>the</strong> editing and producing of this collection,<br />

in <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi).<br />

A. Aramaic Levi Document, <strong>by</strong> M. E. Stone and J. C. Greenfield:<br />

4Q213 Levi a ar (1ñ24, pl. I, 5 frgs.) The Aramaic work served as<br />

a source for Greek Testament of Levi, found in Cairo Geniza (2). This<br />

version provided help for reconstruction of <strong>the</strong> Aramaic work. Poetic<br />

structure is presented in <strong>the</strong> reconstruction (13). 4Q213a Levi b ar<br />

(25ñ36, pl. II. 6 frgs.). Fragments 1ñ2 are reconstructed with help of<br />

Greek text from Athos. 4Q213b c (37ñ41, pl. III, 1 frg.). 4Q214 Levi d<br />

ar (43ñ51, pl. III, 5 frgs.). 4Q214a e (53ñ60, pl. IV, 3 frg.). 4Q214b f<br />

(61ñ72, pl. IV, 8 frgs.).<br />

89


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

B. By M. E. Stone: 4Q215. Testament of Naphthali (73ñ82, pl. V,<br />

1 frg.). Two fragmentary narratives, <strong>the</strong> young Naphthali as speaker.<br />

C. By J. Collins: 4Q242 Prayer of Nabonidus ar (83ñ93, pl. VI, 4<br />

frgs.). Fragments of a wisdom tale, related to Daniel 4.<br />

D. By J. Collins and P. Flint: Pseudo-Daniel ar. Introduction to<br />

4Q243ñ245 (95) informs about previous editions. 4Q243 Pseudo-Daniel<br />

a ar (97ñ121, pls. VIIñVIII, 40 frgs.). 4Q244 b (123ñ131,<br />

pl. IX, 14 frgs.). 4Q243ñ244 The Combined Text (133ñ151) is similar<br />

to Daniel 1ñ6. The text is reconstructed, translated and commented<br />

(138ñ151). 4Q245 Pseudo-Daniel c ar (153ñ164, pl. X, 4 frgs.). List<br />

of priests is only partially preserved.<br />

E. By …. Puech: 4Q246 Apocryphe de Daniel ar (165ñ184, pl. XI,<br />

1 frg.).The text is printed according to <strong>the</strong> lines of <strong>the</strong> manuscript<br />

(167ñ168) and also arranged according to <strong>the</strong> stichometry, in cola<br />

and verses (168ñ169). The religious titles probably refer to historical<br />

personalities of <strong>the</strong> 2 nd cent. B. C. E.<br />

F. Commentaries on Genesis and Malachi, <strong>by</strong> G. Brooke: 4Q252<br />

Commentary on Genesis A (185ñ207, pls. XIIñXIII, 6 frgs.). 4Q253<br />

B (209ñ212, pl. XIV, 3 frgs.). 4Q254 C (217ñ232, pl. XV, 17 frgs.).<br />

4Q254a D (233ñ236, pl. XVI, 3 frgs.). Selected passages are explained.<br />

4Q253a Commentary on Malachi (213ñ215, pl. XIV, 1 frg.).<br />

G. Apocryphon of Joshua, <strong>by</strong> C. Newsom. Introduction to<br />

4Q378ñ379. This text is of <strong>the</strong> type represented in Jubilees. 4Q378 a<br />

(241ñ262, pls. XVIIñXX, 29 frgs.). 4Q379 b (263ñ288, pls.<br />

XXIñXXV, 41 frgs.).<br />

H. By T. Elgvin. 4Q473 The Two Ways (289ñ294, pl. XXVI,<br />

2 frgs.). Deuteronomic phrases are condensed into an admonition.<br />

I. Miscellaneous Texts, <strong>by</strong> E. Larson and L. H. Schiffman: 4Q478<br />

papFragment Mentioning Festivals (295ñ296, pl. XXVI, 1 frg.).<br />

4Q479 Text Mentioning Descendants of David (297ñ299, pl. XXVII,<br />

3 frgs.). 4Q480 Narrative F (301ñ302, pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q481<br />

Text Mentioning Mixed Kinds (303ñ304, pl. XXVIII, 2 frgs.).<br />

J. By J. Trebolle Barrera. 4Q481a Apocryphe dí…lisÈe (305ñ309,<br />

pl. XXX, 3 frgs.).<br />

K. Miscellaneous Texts, <strong>by</strong> E. Larson and L. H. Schiffman:<br />

4Q481b Narrative G (311ñ312, pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q481c Prayer<br />

for Mercy (313ñ314, pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q481d Fragments with<br />

90


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Red Ink (315ñ319, pl. XXIX, 7 frgs.). 4Q481e, Narrative H (321ñ322,<br />

pl. XXIX, 1 frg.).<br />

Concordances <strong>by</strong> S. Pfann (32ñ351) have 17 Hebrew (325ñ341)<br />

and 4 Aramaic sections (342ñ351). Some reproductions on plates are<br />

enlarged, to be better legible. This volume containing reliable editions<br />

of mostly fragmentary texts is a valuable contribution to Dead<br />

Sea Scrolls studies. The efforts of editors will be highly appreciated.<br />

It can be expected that especially research in Qumran Aramaic will<br />

be stimulated <strong>by</strong> reliable and well commented edition of Aramaic<br />

documents.<br />

3.1.14 Halakha<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXV. ñ Qumran Cave 4ñXXV.<br />

Halakhic Texts. By Joseph Baumgarten, Torleif Elgvin, Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel,<br />

Erik Larson, Manfred R. Lehmann, Stephen Pfann, Lawrence<br />

H. Schiffman. ISBN 0-19-827006-3. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1999.<br />

xii + 173 pp., plates IñXII.<br />

E. Tov, editor-in-chief, recommends in <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi) to study<br />

texts contained in this collection toge<strong>the</strong>r with <strong>the</strong> rules such as 1QS,<br />

4QMMT. And he appreciates those who helped produce this volume.<br />

S. Pfann edited 4Q249, 4Qpap cryptA Midrash Sefer Moshe (1ñ24,<br />

pls. IñII, 14 fragments). The discussion on <strong>the</strong> cryptic script has to<br />

appear in DJD XXXVI (cf. 4, n. 8). The title MDRä SPR MWäH is on<br />

<strong>the</strong> back of <strong>the</strong> scroll. The Torah was studied during nightly meetings<br />

of <strong>the</strong> community, <strong>the</strong> conclusions were written down. The palaeography<br />

of <strong>the</strong> titles inquadrate script and <strong>the</strong> Carbonñ14 tests point to<br />

<strong>the</strong> date in <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> second century B. C. E. Only few<br />

fragments could be translated. Column i was reconstructed (18ñ20).<br />

The legal interpretation of leprosy is similar to that in Rabbinic sources<br />

(23ñ24).<br />

E. Larson, M. R. Lehmann and L. Schiffman co-operated on <strong>the</strong><br />

edition of 4Q251, 4Q Halakha A (25ñ51, pls. IIIñIV, 26 frgs). Its<br />

language and its content follow Hebrew Bible. 4Q264a, Halakha B<br />

(53ñ56, pl. V, 3 frgs) was edited <strong>by</strong> J. Baumgarten. T. Elgvin edited<br />

4Q472a, Halakha C (155ñ156, pl. XII, 1 frg.). The manuscript<br />

4Q265, called Miscellaneous Rules, (57ñ78, pl. VñVIII, fragments<br />

91


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

1ñ7, añ1) is edited and thoroughly commented <strong>by</strong> J. Baumgarten. He<br />

explained <strong>the</strong> Sabbath laws in <strong>the</strong> appendix (75ñ78). J. Baumgarten<br />

provided 4Q274ñ276, Tohorot AñC, with a substantial introduction<br />

(79ñ97). The laws of purity had a pervasive influence on <strong>the</strong> life of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Qumran community. Various kinds of impurity are explained, and<br />

also kinds of purification, with use of liturgies. Purification through<br />

<strong>the</strong> Holy Spirit is included. 4QTohorot are preserved in 4 manuscripts;<br />

A 4Q274 (99ñ109, pl. VIII, 3 frgs), B a 4Q276 (111ñ113, pl. IX,<br />

1 frg.), B b 4Q277 (115ñ119, pl. IX, 2 frgs.), C 4Q278 (121ñ122,<br />

pl. IX, 1 frg.) J. Baumgarten edited also 4Q284, Purification Liturgy<br />

(123ñ129, pl. XI, 10 frgs.) which refers to sprinkling water. And he<br />

edited 4Q284a, Harvesting (131ñ133, pl. XI, 4 frgs), dealing with<br />

fruits. E. Eshel edited 4Q414, Ritual of Purification A (135ñ154,<br />

pls.XIñXII, 36 frgs), a collection of rituals and prayers, parallel to<br />

4Q512. The immersion rules relate to 11Q Temple Scroll XLIXñL.<br />

The concordance (159ñ173) was prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann. This<br />

volume is based in part on earlier transcriptions <strong>by</strong> Josef (sic)<br />

T. Milik. About half of this volume was prepared <strong>by</strong> Joseph Baumgarten.<br />

Especially valuable is his detailed and well substantiated explanation<br />

of purification rituals; he compares <strong>the</strong>m with later Jewish<br />

sources. This points to <strong>the</strong> important contribution of texts published<br />

in this volume; <strong>the</strong>y deal with some matters previously known only<br />

from later Jewish sources. Now <strong>the</strong>se matters are attested already<br />

in <strong>the</strong> period of Second Temple.<br />

3.1.15ñ16 Sapiential Texts<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XX. ñ Qumran Cave 4ñXV.<br />

Sapiential Texts, Part 1. By Torleif Elgvin, Menachem Kister, Timothy<br />

Lim, Bilhah Nitzan, Stephen Pfann, Elisha Qimron, Lawrence<br />

H. Schiffman and Annette Steudel. ISBN 0-19-826938-2. Oxford:<br />

Clarendon Press 1997. x + 246 pp., plates IñXVIII.<br />

Emanuel Tov, editor-in-chief, points in <strong>the</strong> preface (x) to <strong>the</strong> functions<br />

of <strong>the</strong> sapiential didactic compositions: admonitions, instructions,<br />

and meditations. He appreciates <strong>the</strong> contribution of Joseph<br />

A. Fitzmyer, who served as <strong>the</strong> consulting editor. The texts are presented<br />

in 8 sections, AñH (1ñ224).<br />

92


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

A. Words of <strong>the</strong> Maskil to All Sons of Dawn, <strong>by</strong> S. J. Pfann and<br />

M. Kister: 4Q298 4QcryptA WordsÖ (1ñ30, pls. IñII, 8 fragments).<br />

The fragmentary scroll is carefully described (2ñ7). Only <strong>the</strong> title and<br />

first sentence are in <strong>the</strong> Jewish ìsquareî script (cf. 7ñ9). The manuscript<br />

is written in Cryptic A script; its letter forms are presented from<br />

texts 4Q298, 4Q249, and 4Q317 (9ñ13). The decipherer of this script,<br />

J. T. Milik is mentioned in a note (7, n. 18). The MASKIL addresses<br />

<strong>the</strong> novices of <strong>the</strong> Essene community. Fragments are presented in<br />

standard Hebrew letters and provided with translations and comments.<br />

B. Mysteries, <strong>by</strong> L. Schiffman, are introduced (31ñ32); <strong>the</strong> title is<br />

explained as rendering of <strong>the</strong> Hebrew term RZYM. 4Q299, Mysteries a<br />

(33ñ97, pls. IIIñVII, 106 frgs.) are related to 1Q27. Poetic rendering<br />

(38) points to <strong>the</strong> original structure. 4Q300, Mysteries v (99ñ114,<br />

pl. VIII, 14 frgs.) is similar and partially parallel. 4Q301, Mysteries c ?<br />

(113ñ123, pl. IX, 10 frgs), is not clearly related to <strong>the</strong> preceding<br />

compositions.<br />

C. Admonitory Parable, <strong>by</strong> B. Nitzan: 4Q302, 4QpapÖ (125ñ149,<br />

pls. XñXII, 18 frgs), resembling <strong>the</strong> lawsuit pattern in <strong>the</strong> Bible, was<br />

composed in <strong>the</strong> 3 rd century B. C. E.<br />

D. Meditations on Creation, <strong>by</strong> T. Lim: 4Q303, A; 4Q304, B;<br />

4Q305 C (151ñ153, 155, 157ñ158, pl. XIII, 1 + 1 + 1 frgs.) These<br />

fragments reflect on opening chapters of Genesis.<br />

E. Sapiential Texts, <strong>by</strong> A. Steudel: 4Q411, Sapiential Hymn<br />

(159ñ162, pl. XIV, 1frg.) is probably of pre-Qumran origin. 4Q412,<br />

Sapiential-Didactic Work A (163ñ167, pl. XIV, 4 frgs) is apparently<br />

a didactic collection.<br />

F. Composition concerning Divine Providence, <strong>by</strong> E. Qimron:<br />

4Q413 (169ñ171, pl. XIV, 2 frgs.) exhorts <strong>the</strong> reader to past events.<br />

G. Ways of Righteousness, <strong>by</strong> T. Elgvin: This composite work is<br />

attested in two fragmentary manuscripts, 4Q420 a (173ñ182, pl. XV,<br />

7 frgs.) and 4Q421 b (183ñ202, pl. XIV, 13 frgs.). They contain<br />

sapiential sayings and admonitions.<br />

H. Sapiential Texts, <strong>by</strong> A. Steudel: 4Q426 Sapiential-Didactic<br />

Work B (203ñ210, pl. XVII, 6 frgs., this collection was not<br />

Qumranic). 4Q426, Sapiential-Hymnic Work A (211ñ224, pl. XVIII,<br />

13 frgs) contains prayer, hymnic and didactic elements.<br />

93


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

S. Pfann prepared Concordances (225ñ146) in which words are<br />

listed separately according to manuscripts.<br />

3.1.16<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXIV. ñ Qumran Cave 4ñXXIV.<br />

Sapiential Texts, Part 2. 4QInstruction (MUSAR LE-MEVÕN):<br />

4Q415ff. With a re-edition of 1Q26 <strong>by</strong> John Strugnell and Daniel<br />

J. Harrington and an edition of 4Q423 <strong>by</strong> Torleif Elgvin.<br />

ISBN 0-19-826982-X. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1999. xvi-I-584 pp.,<br />

pls. IñXXXI.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiiiñxvi) Emanuel Tov explains <strong>the</strong> arrangement<br />

of this last volume of sapiential texts from 4Q. In <strong>the</strong> preface (xiiiñxvi)<br />

Strugnell and Harrington explain <strong>the</strong> history of this edition and<br />

acknowledge <strong>the</strong> contributions of scholars. General Introduction<br />

(1ñ40) informs about manuscripts and <strong>the</strong>ir relation. The Hebrew title<br />

of this work may be rendered as ìInstruction for a MAVEN / Studentî.<br />

The editorial principles are modified due to preservation of manuscripts.<br />

The contents of major fragments are analysed (8ñ17).<br />

Lifeñsetting (19ñ22) is considered as non-sectarian; <strong>the</strong> same conclusion<br />

is based on observations of language (22ñ32). This work can be<br />

located, as concerns purpose and time, between Proverbs and Sirach<br />

(36). Select bibliography (36ñ40) informs also about related texts.<br />

A. Instruction, <strong>by</strong> J. Strugnell and D. J. Harrington. General Introduction<br />

(1ñ40), v. supra. 4Q415 Instruction a (41ñ71, pls. IñII,<br />

32 frgs.). This manuscript from <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> first century<br />

B. C. E. contains cosmological and paraenetic passages. 4Q416 b<br />

(73ñ141, pls. IIIñVII, 22 frgs). 4Q417 c (143ñ210, pls. VIIIñXI,<br />

29 frgs.). 4Q418 d (211ñ474, pls. XIIñXXVII, 303 frgs). Many fragments<br />

can be only doubtfully identified. 4Q418a e (475ñ495, pls.,<br />

XVIIIñXIX, 25 frgs). 4Q418b Text with Quotation from Psalm 107?<br />

(497ñ499, pl. XXIX, 2 frgs). 4Q418c Instruction f ? (501ñ503,<br />

pl. XXIX, 1 frg.).<br />

All <strong>the</strong>se manuscripts are provided with notes of readings and detailed<br />

comments. In translations italics are used for words reflecting<br />

uncertain readings or problematic interpretation. As it is common in<br />

this series, <strong>the</strong> alineations of <strong>the</strong> translation correspond to those in <strong>the</strong><br />

94


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

manuscript; some stichometric divisions are marked <strong>by</strong> capital letters<br />

at <strong>the</strong>ir beginning, to indicate <strong>the</strong> poetic structuring (cf. 7). For<br />

a collection of manuscripts with many mutual parallels a complete reconstruction<br />

of <strong>the</strong> entire work would be welcome. Users of this well<br />

substantiated edition can find help in notes pointing to composite text.<br />

B. Instruction, <strong>by</strong> T. Elgvin: 4Q423 Instruction g (505ñ533, pls.<br />

XXXñXXXI, 24 frgs.) was written probably in <strong>the</strong> early first century<br />

C. E.<br />

C. Appendix, <strong>by</strong> J. Strugnell and D. Harrington: 1Q25 IQ Instruction<br />

(Re-edition) (535ñ539, 5 frgs.). This manuscript was previously<br />

published <strong>by</strong> J. T. Milik in DJD I (101ñ102, pl. XX), in 1955. The<br />

new presentation sometimes differs from <strong>the</strong> edition in DJD I.<br />

Concordance again prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann (541ñ584) refers<br />

to Hebrew words in 4Q texts covered <strong>by</strong> this volume.<br />

Effective operation of ten editors and participation of J. A. Fitzmyer<br />

as consultant have provided reliable access to <strong>the</strong> important<br />

sapiential texts in two volumes, opening way to fur<strong>the</strong>r research,<br />

3.1.17ñ18 Poetry and Liturgy<br />

3.1.17.<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XI. ñ Qumran Cave 4ñVI. Poetical<br />

and Liturgical Texts, Part 1. By Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Hanan Eshel, Carol<br />

Newsom, Bilhah Nitzan, Eileen Schuller and Ada Yardeni. ISBN<br />

0-19-826880-5. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1998. x + 473 pp., plates<br />

IñXXXII.<br />

The fast sequence of editions was made possible thanks to extended<br />

team of editors, of different backgrounds. Four editors of this<br />

volume are active in Israel, two in America. All six editors are ladies,<br />

as is Monica L. W. Brady, who served as consulting editor in cooperation<br />

with James C. VanderKam. Foreword (ix) was written <strong>by</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>se two consulting editors. Only 4Q texts are published in this first<br />

volume of poetical and liturgical texts. This volume was produced in<br />

camera-ready form at <strong>the</strong> University of Notre Dame (Notre Dame,<br />

Indiana). Manuscripts are presented in four sections, AñD. Concordances<br />

(427ñ473) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. Pfann are arranged according to <strong>the</strong>se<br />

sections.<br />

95


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

A. Berakhot, <strong>by</strong> B. Nitzan: The texts 4Q286ñ290 contain liturgical<br />

blessings and curses; <strong>the</strong>ir structure and contents are presented in<br />

<strong>the</strong> introduction (1ñ5) on tables. Also ceremonial laws are represented.<br />

4Q286 Berakhot a (7ñ48, pls., IñIV, 20 frgs.) from about<br />

50 C. E. is exactly described (7ñ9). The laws of leprosy are reconstructed<br />

in <strong>the</strong> appendix (46ñ48). 4Q287 b (49ñ60, pls.VñVI, 10 frgs.).<br />

4Q288 c (61ñ65, pl. VII, 3 frgs). 4Q289 d (67ñ71, pl. VII, 3 frgs.).<br />

4Q290 e (73ñ74, pl. VII, 1 frg.).<br />

B. Non-Canonical Psalms, <strong>by</strong> E. Schuller: This edition is based on<br />

<strong>the</strong> doctoral dissertation of <strong>the</strong> editor, published in 1986 (cf. ix),<br />

Non-Canonical Psalms of Qumran. 4Q389 (75ñ85, pl. VIII, 7 frgs.)<br />

is a collection of psalms not known from o<strong>the</strong>r sources. ñ 4Q381 B<br />

(87ñ172, pls. IXñXV, 110 frgs) is a collection of psalms ascribed to<br />

biblical figures.<br />

C. Shirot ëOlat HaShabbat, <strong>by</strong> C. Newsom: This edition is based<br />

on <strong>the</strong> doctoral dissertation, published in 1985, Songs of <strong>the</strong> Sabbath<br />

Sacrifice. This edition contains 8 texts from Qumran cave 4,<br />

4Q400ñ407, and <strong>the</strong> text from Masada, 1k. The manuscript from<br />

cave 11, 11Q17, is published in DJD XXIII (259ñ304; cf. supra<br />

3.1.6). 4Q400 a (173ñ196, pl. XVI, 7 frgs.) has in frg. 1 <strong>the</strong> beginning<br />

of <strong>the</strong> first song, written in elevated prose.<br />

4Q401 b (197ñ219, pls., XVIIñXVIII, 38 frgs.). 4Q402 c (221ñ237,<br />

pl. XVIII, 11 frgs.) 1k. MasShirot ëOlat HaShabbat (239ñ252,<br />

pl. XIX, columns IñII) was found at Masada during <strong>the</strong> first season ñ<br />

1963/64 ñ of excavation. The column II overlaps with 4Q403. Formulaic<br />

pattern of <strong>the</strong> Psalms of Seven Chief Princes is reconstructed<br />

and commented (249ñ252). 4Q403 d (253ñ292, pl. XX, 3 frgs.) contains<br />

on frg. 1 46 relatively well preserved lines. 4Q404 e (293ñ305,<br />

pl. XXI, 24 frgs.}. 4Q405 f (307ñ393, pls. XXIIñXXX, 105 frgs.).<br />

Sequence of fragments is reconstructed in columns AñM, songs 6ñ12<br />

(312ñ315). Fragments 24ñ105 could be assigned. 4Q406 8 (395ñ398,<br />

pl. XXXI, 5 frgs). 4Q407 h (399ñ401, pl. XXXI, 2 frgs.)<br />

D. Apocryphal Psalms and Prayer, <strong>by</strong> E. Eshel, H. Eshel and<br />

A. Yardeni: 4Q448 (403ñ425, pl. XXXII, columns IñIII) includes a<br />

prayer for King Jonathan ñ Alexander Jannaeus, 103ñ76 B. C. E. The<br />

script was influenced <strong>by</strong> Aramaic script, cf. drawings of letters<br />

(406ñ408).<br />

96


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Texts in this volume, carefully edited and commented, provide<br />

a reliable basis for study of Hebrew poetry in period preceding <strong>the</strong><br />

beginning of Christianity.<br />

3.1.18 Poetry and Liturgy<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXIX.ñQumran Cave 4ñXX. Poetical<br />

and Liturgical Texts, Part 2. By Es<strong>the</strong>r Chazon, Torleif Elgvin,<br />

Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Daniel Falk, Bilhah Nitzan, Elisha Qimron, Eileen<br />

Schuller, David Seely, Eibert Tigchelaar and Moshe Weinfeld.<br />

ISBN 0-19-827005-4. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1999. xiv + 478 pp.,<br />

plates IñXXVII, foldout plates IñIII.<br />

This collection was prepared <strong>by</strong> ten editors, in consultation with<br />

James VanderKam and Monica Brady. It is based in part on earlier<br />

transcriptions and comments <strong>by</strong> John Strugnell. Emanuel Tov explains<br />

in foreword (xviii) that this volume is <strong>the</strong> final one containing<br />

poetical and liturgical texts. And he evaluates those who co-operated<br />

on this edition. The texts are presented in 12 sections, denoted <strong>by</strong><br />

letters AñL.<br />

A. Curses, <strong>by</strong> B. Nitzan: 4Q280 (1ñ8, pl. I, 3 frgs.) are directed<br />

towards Melki-reöa and toward those who plot evil against <strong>the</strong> Covenant<br />

of God.<br />

B. Works Containing Prayers, <strong>by</strong> B. Nitzan: 4Q291 A (9ñ14,<br />

3 frgs). 4Q292 B (15ñ18, 2 frgs.). 4Q293 C (19ñ22, 3 frg.). All reproduced<br />

on pl. I.<br />

C. Works of God and Communal Confession, <strong>by</strong> D. Falk: Introduction<br />

(23ñ24) demonstrates that that 4Q392 and 4Q393 belong to<br />

one scroll which contained at least two different compositions. 4Q392<br />

Works of God (25ñ44, pls. IIñIII, 11 frgs.) is a poem resembling to<br />

<strong>the</strong> Hodayot. 4Q393 Communal Confession (45ñ61, pls. IIñIII,<br />

9 frgs.) refers to <strong>the</strong> sin of <strong>the</strong> fa<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />

D. Liturgical Work, <strong>by</strong> E. Qimron: 4Q409 A (63ñ67. pl. IV, 4 frgs)<br />

expresses praise on <strong>the</strong> days of festivals.<br />

E. Hodayot, <strong>by</strong> E. Schuller: Introduction relates 4Q427ñ432 to<br />

1QH and 1Q35, also on a table (72ñ73). Within <strong>the</strong>se Thanksgiving<br />

Psalms <strong>the</strong> ìHeidelberg schoolî distinguishes ìHymns of <strong>the</strong> Teacherî<br />

and ìHymns of <strong>the</strong> Communityî (cf. 74ñ75). 4Q427 Hodayot a<br />

97


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

(77ñ123, pls. IVñVI, foldout pl. I, 22 frgs.,) contains psalms in an<br />

order different from that in 1QH. The drawing of <strong>the</strong> reconstructed<br />

scroll is presented on foldout plate. Relations to 1QH and variants<br />

from it are listed (78, 81ñ82, 87). 4Q428 b (125ñ175, pls. VIIñXI,<br />

foldout pl. II, 69 frgs). 4Q429 c (177ñ194, XIñXII, foldout pl. II, 6<br />

frgs.). 4Q430 d (195ñ198, pl. XII, 1 frg.). 4Q431 e (199ñ208, pls.<br />

XIIñXXVIII, foldout pl. III, 2 frgs.). 4Q432 4QpapHodayot f<br />

(209ñ232, pls. XIIIñXIV, foldout pl. III). Texts mostly parallel to<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r Hodayot manuscripts.<br />

Three Hodayotñlike texts: 4Q433 A (233ñ236, pl. XV, 4 frg.).<br />

4Q433a 4Qpap B (237ñ245, pl. XV, 3 frgs.). 4Q440 C (247ñ254, pl.<br />

XVI, 3 frgs.).<br />

F. Barki Nafshi, <strong>by</strong> M. Weinfeld and D. Seely: Introduction to<br />

4Q434ñ438 (255ñ265) explains <strong>the</strong> title attested at <strong>the</strong> beginning of<br />

4Q434, ìBless, O my soul, <strong>the</strong> Lord.î The manuscripts are mutually<br />

related. The large fragments presented in English translation are conveniently<br />

arranged in poetic lines (261ñ265). Texts: 4Q434 a<br />

(267ñ286, pls. XVIIñXIX, 15 frgs.). 4Q435 b (287ñ293, pl. XX, 5<br />

frgs.). 4Q436 c (295ñ305, pl. XXI, 2 frgs,). 4Q437 d (307ñ325, pls.<br />

XXIIñXXIII, 10 frgs). 4Q438 e (327ñ334, pls. XXIIIñXXIV, 11 frgs.).<br />

G. Lament <strong>by</strong> a Leader, <strong>by</strong> M. Weinfeld and D, Seely: 4Q439<br />

(335ñ341, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). The author laments faults of his people.<br />

H. Prayers, <strong>by</strong> E. Chazon: 4Q441 Individual Thanksgiving<br />

(343ñ344, pl. XXV, 1 frg.) 4Q442 B (345, pl. XXV, 1 frg.). 4Q443<br />

Personal Prayer (347ñ366, pl. XXV, 13 frgs.). 4Q444 Incantation<br />

(367ñ378, pl. XXVI, 4 frgs.).<br />

I. Poetic Fragments, <strong>by</strong> E. Tigchelaar: 4Q445 Lament A (379ñ384,<br />

pl. XXVI, 8 frgs.). 4Q446 Poetic Text A (385ñ388, pl. XXVI, 3 frgs.<br />

4Q447 B (389ñ390, pl. XXVI, 1 frg.).<br />

J. Prayers, <strong>by</strong> E. Chazon: Prayers on pl. XVII, 4Q449 A?<br />

(391ñ393), 4Q450 B? (395ñ397), 4Q451 C (399ñ400), 4Q452 D?<br />

(401), 4Q453 Lament B (403), 4Q454 Prayer E? (405ñ406), 4Q456<br />

Halleluyah (407ñ408), 4Q457a Creation? and 4Q457b Eschatological<br />

Hymn (409ñ419), on palimpsest. (Fragments: 2 + 2 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 2;<br />

2+2).<br />

K. Self-Glorification Hymn, <strong>by</strong> E. Eshel: 4Q471b (421ñ432, pl.<br />

XXVIII, 4 frgs.). The speaker is identified as <strong>the</strong> eschatological high<br />

98


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

priest, with reference to 1QSb; <strong>the</strong> hymn was probably composed to<br />

remember <strong>the</strong> Teacher of Righteousness. 4Q471c Prayer Concerning<br />

God and Israel (433ñ435, pl. XXVIII, 2 frgs.).<br />

L. Liturgical Works, <strong>by</strong> T. Elgvin: 4Q476 Liturgical Work<br />

A (437ñ443, pl. XXVIII, 3 frgs.), 4Q476a (445ñ446, pl. XXVIII,<br />

2frgs.).<br />

Concordance (447ñ 478) was prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann. Plates<br />

are supplemented <strong>by</strong> foldout plates IñIII on 5 sheets, presenting reconstruction<br />

of manuscripts 4Q427ñ 429 and 4Q432. Fragmentary<br />

texts are published with efficient care, in most userñfriendly manner.<br />

3.1.19 Community Rule<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXVI. Qumran Cave 4ñXIX.<br />

Serekh ha-Yaḥad and Two Related Texts. By Philip S. Alexander and<br />

Geza Vermes. ISBN 0-19-826981-1. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1998.<br />

xviii + 253 pp., pls. IñXXIV.<br />

This excellent edition of 4Q manuscripts of <strong>the</strong> central Qumran<br />

text was prepared <strong>by</strong> two British scholars. Geza Vermes of <strong>the</strong> University<br />

of Oxford published previously works on Dead Sea Scrolls;<br />

The Dead Sea Scrolls in English appeared in fourth edition in†1995<br />

(reviewed in CV 40, 1998, 46ñ49). In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi) Emanuel Tov<br />

informs about <strong>the</strong> intensive preparation, and about <strong>the</strong> copy editing in<br />

Jerusalem. The editors explain in <strong>the</strong> preface (xiii) that many problems<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Community Rule, <strong>the</strong> most fundamental of <strong>the</strong> scrolls,<br />

remained unsolved; thus <strong>the</strong>y adopted <strong>the</strong> maximalist approach towards<br />

restoration. Their principles are presented in <strong>the</strong> general introduction<br />

to 4Q255ñ264 (1ñ25). Parallels to 4QS ñ S is abbreviation<br />

for Serekh ñ in 1QS are listed, as are those to 1QS in 4QS. Physical<br />

form and format of <strong>the</strong> S manuscripts are described (4ñ7, table on<br />

pp. 18ñ19). Also palaeography and orthography (7ñ9) are well apparent<br />

(table on pp. 20ñ21). The letters of manuscripts are reproduced<br />

in drawings (table on pp. 22ñ23); <strong>the</strong> dates of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts<br />

can be set with <strong>the</strong>ir help approximately between 125 B. C. E. and<br />

50 C. E. (cf. table on p. 24).<br />

The comparison of S manuscripts points to evolution of <strong>the</strong> text.<br />

Four recessions can be supposed (9ñ12). Publications of S texts are<br />

99


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

traced since 1951, with special attention to <strong>the</strong> recent editions<br />

(10ñ13). The principles of this edition are explained (15ñ17): Maximalist<br />

restoration and reconstruction of <strong>the</strong> texts is applied. In notes<br />

on readings previous attempts are critically discussed. The comments<br />

deal with <strong>the</strong> variants. The introductions of manuscripts inform about<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir forms. Ten manuscripts of 4QSerekh ha-Yahad, 4Q255ñ264,<br />

are published according to <strong>the</strong>se principles. They fit well to <strong>the</strong> arrangement<br />

usual in o<strong>the</strong>r DJD volumes. The unidentified fragments<br />

are marked <strong>by</strong> capital letters.<br />

4Q255 a (27ñ38, pl. I, frgs. 1ñ2, AñB) from about 100 B. C. E. is<br />

written on papyrus in crude, early cursive. 4Q256 b (39ñ64, pls. IIñV,<br />

8 frgs.), written in early Herodian formal hand before <strong>the</strong> beginning<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Christian era, is only partially preserved; only 9 from originally<br />

23 columns could be reconstructed. 4Q257 c (65ñ83, pls. VIñIX,<br />

frgs. 1ñ3, A) is written on papyrus. 4Q258 d (83ñ128, pls. XñXIII,<br />

7 frgs.) is written in script similar to that of 4QS b /256. 4Q259 e<br />

(129ñ152, pls. XIVñXVI, frgs.1ñ4, AñB). 4Q260 f (153ñ167, pl.<br />

XVII, 5 frgs.). 4Q261 g (169ñ187, pls. XVIIIñXIX, frgs. lñ6, AñC).<br />

4Q262 h (184ñ191, pl. XX, frg. l, AñB). 4Q263 i (197ñ200, pl. XXI,<br />

1 frg.). 4Q264 (201ñ206, pl. XXI, 1 frg.).<br />

This short survey gives some ideas about <strong>the</strong> fragmentary character<br />

of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts and <strong>the</strong> demanding task of <strong>the</strong>ir edition. Parallels<br />

with 1QS and with o<strong>the</strong>r 4QS texts are listed, some in tables. Two<br />

related texts (207ñ223) were previously in part published and discussed.<br />

4Q275 Communal Ceremony (209ñ216, pl. XXII, 3 frgs.)<br />

contains remains of a rule, probably for <strong>the</strong> annual festival for <strong>the</strong><br />

renewal of <strong>the</strong> covenant. 4Q279 Four Lots (217ñ223, pl. XXIII,<br />

5 frgs.) refers to <strong>the</strong> assignments of rewards in <strong>the</strong> messianic Age.<br />

Appendix: lQ28b. 1QSerekh ha-Yaḥad b (fragment), <strong>by</strong> G. J. Brooke<br />

(227ñ233, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). W. H. Brownlee received this fragment<br />

from Archbishop Athanasios Samuel of Jerusalem in 1994. It was<br />

published in 1994 in Claremont (cf. <strong>the</strong> review in CV 36, 1994,<br />

265ñ266). It belongs to 1QSB 25, col. V, 22ñ25).<br />

Concordances (235ñ253) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann refer to<br />

words in 4Q 255ñ264 (236ñ252), 4Q 275 (253), and 4Q279 (253). In<br />

this careful edition with many notes and comments <strong>the</strong> fragmentary<br />

4QS texts are related to <strong>the</strong> more complete 1QS. The basic work of<br />

100


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

<strong>the</strong> community is better accessible. This edition of 4QS will be effectively<br />

and gratefully used for <strong>the</strong> study of Community Rule and its<br />

influence.<br />

A few notes may be added: The material from 4QS is cited in <strong>the</strong><br />

critical apparatus of <strong>the</strong> edition of Rule of <strong>the</strong> Community (1QS) <strong>by</strong><br />

E. Qimron and J. H. Charlesworth, v. pp. 4 and 6ñ51 in J. H. Charlesworth,<br />

ed., The Dead Sea Scrolls ñ Hebrew, Aramaic and Greek<br />

Texts with English Translations, vol. 1 (T¸bingen/Louisville 1994) ñ<br />

(reviewed in CV 36, 1994, 260ñ265). The Hebrew title of <strong>the</strong> work<br />

Serekh ha-Yahad is appropriately rendered as ìCommunity Ruleî.<br />

The Czech translation ÿ·d Jednoty is more exact. The Hebrew word<br />

is related to numeral ìoneî, as is <strong>the</strong> Czech rendering, and also English<br />

unity, cf. S. Segert, ìThe Unity of <strong>the</strong> New Covenant ñ The Unity<br />

of Brethren. (A Comparison of Two Religious Communities)î,<br />

pp. 71ñ80 ñ esp. p. 73 and n. 34 ñ in Jewish Studies ñ Essays in<br />

Honour of <strong>the</strong> Very Reverend Dr Gustav Sicher Chief Rabbi of Prague<br />

(Prague 1955). The exact title is attested in <strong>the</strong> print of 1609 ìÿ·d<br />

cÌrkevnÌ Jednoty Brat¯Ì »esk˝chî ñ Latin ìRatio disciplinae ordinisque<br />

ecclesiastici in Unitate Fratrum Bohemorumî. The reviewer<br />

expresses appreciation for this information to Martin Wernisch.<br />

3.1.20 Various Hebrew Texts<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXV ñ Qumran grotte<br />

4ñXVIII. Textes HÈbreux (4Q521ñ 4O579). Par …mile Puech. ISBN<br />

0-19-826948-X. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1998. xviii + 229 pp.,<br />

planches IñXV, figures 1 a 2.<br />

This volume, edited <strong>by</strong> …mile Puech, Director of Research at Centre<br />

National de la Recherche Scientifique in Paris, is dedicated to <strong>the</strong><br />

memory of Jean Starcky. Puech wrote <strong>the</strong> article about Starcky<br />

(1909ñ1988) for Encyclopedia of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls (v. infra 7.12),<br />

pp. 891ñ892. Jean Starcky was living with his fa<strong>the</strong>r for short time in<br />

Prague. AbbÈ Starcky was most helpful to this reviewer doing research<br />

in Syria in 1963ñ64. Only a few pages of this volume are in<br />

English. Emanuel Tov explains in <strong>the</strong> foreword v (xi) that <strong>the</strong> texts<br />

were originally allotted to Starcky. The concordance is introduced in<br />

English (213 Editions of 12 Hebrew texts are translated and com-<br />

101


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

mented in French (1ñ211), as is <strong>the</strong> preface (xiiiñxvi). Puech describes<br />

<strong>the</strong> demanding work on <strong>the</strong> Hebrew fragments. The texts are<br />

Qumran Essene, except 4Q528 and 4Q576. Aramaic manuscripts<br />

have to be published in ano<strong>the</strong>r volume ñ DJD XXXI. V. infra, 3.1.24.<br />

4Q521 Apocalypse messianique (1ñ38, pls. IñIII, 16 frgs.) was<br />

composed probably in <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> 2 nd cent. B. C. E., perhaps<br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Teacher. 4Q522 ProphÈtie de JosuÈ (39ñ73, pls. IVñV,<br />

25 frgs.). On frgs. 22ñ25 Psalm 122 is quoted (cf. DJD XVI, pp.<br />

169ñ170). 4Q523 Jonathan (75ñ83, pl. VI, 5 frgs.). The name<br />

YHWNTN on frgs. 1ñ2, line 2, denotes <strong>the</strong> Maccabean leader of <strong>the</strong><br />

middle of <strong>the</strong> 2 nd cent. B. C. E. 4Q524 Rouleau de Temple (85ñ114,<br />

pls. VIIñVIII, figures 1ñ2, 39 frgs.), written in semi-cursive script<br />

about 150ñ125 B. C. E., is probably <strong>the</strong> oldest copy of <strong>the</strong> Temple<br />

Scroll (11Q19ñ20). 4Q525 Beatitudes (115ñ178, pls. IXñXIII,<br />

50 frgs.) was composed and partially written in poetic form. 4Q526<br />

Testament(?) (179ñ181, pl. XIV, 1 frg.). 4Q527 Ouvrage liturgique<br />

(183ñ185, pl. XIV, 1 frg.). 4Q528 Ouvrage hymnique ou sapiential B<br />

(187ñ190, pl. XIV, 1 frg.). 4Q576 Genese n (191ñ193, pl. XV, 2 frgs.).<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r Genesis manuscripts from 4Q are listed, Gn a ñGn m (191). 4Q577<br />

Texte mentionnant le Deluge (196ñ203, pl. XV, 8 frgs.). 4Q578 Composition<br />

historique B (205ñ208, pl. XV, 1 frg.), concerning Ptolemaios.<br />

4Q579 Ouvrage hymnique(?) (209ñ211, pl. XV, 3 frgs.).<br />

In concordance (213ñ229) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann words from<br />

all texts are listed toge<strong>the</strong>r. Photographs of fragments are presented<br />

on plates IñXV. On verso of plate XV drawings of 4Q524 fragments<br />

6ñ13 and 15ñ22 on reconstructed lines are offered. The editions of<br />

fragmentary manuscripts are arranged similarly to <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r 4Q volumes.<br />

Puech is offering detailed evaluations and comments. In paragraphs<br />

on palaeography all letters are characterised. Dating is based<br />

mostly on palaeographic criteria. Due attention is devoted to <strong>the</strong> use<br />

of letters W and Y for indicating long vowels. In <strong>the</strong> characteristics of<br />

mostly poetic texts typical prose words are traced and counted. At <strong>the</strong><br />

end of some manuscript editions-conclusions about genre and about<br />

origin ñ mostly Qumran Essene ñ are presented. …mile Puech published<br />

<strong>the</strong>se difficult texts in clear and reliable manner. His analyses<br />

will be highly appreciated, even as he himself mentions that <strong>the</strong>y may<br />

be criticised as too detailed (cf. xv). Puech offers valuable observa-<br />

102


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

tions and evaluations as well as suggestions for fur<strong>the</strong>r research of<br />

<strong>the</strong>se texts and <strong>the</strong>ir connections.<br />

3.1.21 Texts from various sites<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXVIII.†ñ Miscellaneous Texts<br />

from <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert. By James Charlesworth, Nahyan Cohen,<br />

Hannah M. Cotton, Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Peter Flint, Haggai Misgav, Mat<strong>the</strong>w<br />

Morgenstern, Ca<strong>the</strong>rine Murphy, Michael Segal, Ada Yardeni<br />

and Boaz Zissu, in consultation with James VanderKam and Monica<br />

Brady. ISBN 0-19-924261-5. Oxford: Clarendon Press 2000.<br />

xviii + 250 pp., figures 1ñ26, plates IñXXXVI.<br />

This volume is different from most volumes of <strong>the</strong> series. While in<br />

nearly all volumes finds from only one site are presented, in this<br />

volume manuscripts and objects from six sites are published. Manuscripts<br />

and objects are reproduced in drawings on figures and in photographs<br />

on plates. Texts in three languages, Hebrew, Aramaic, and<br />

Greek are presented. This difference is reflected at <strong>the</strong> lists of words:<br />

Two concordances prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann (241ñ246) are distinguished,<br />

Hebrew (242ñ243) and Aramaic (243ñ246). Indices to <strong>the</strong><br />

Greek Documentary Texts (247ñ250), prepared <strong>by</strong> N. Cohen, are arranged<br />

according to kind of words, names, special terms, numbers,<br />

general words. In foreword (xvñxvii) Emanuel Tov lists <strong>the</strong> sites from<br />

which texts were published in <strong>the</strong> DJD volumes. The finds <strong>by</strong> Israeli<br />

archaeological missions at o<strong>the</strong>r sites are published elsewhere (cf. xv,<br />

notes 1ñ2). Texts in <strong>the</strong> volume XXXVIII are arranged according to<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir sites in sections AñF, and <strong>the</strong>n <strong>by</strong> numbers. In <strong>the</strong> following<br />

survey Hebrew biblical manuscripts will be indicated first, <strong>the</strong>n o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

texts, Hebrew, Aramaic, and Greek.<br />

A. Keter Jericho (1ñ113, figures 1ñ26, plates IñXXXI). ñ Archaeological<br />

Introduction (3ñ20, fig. 1ñ15, pl. IñV), <strong>by</strong> E. Eshel and<br />

B. Zissu. Keter Jericho (v. Joshua 18:12) is a ridge one kilometre<br />

west of Jericho. Texts and objects were discovered in caves during<br />

<strong>the</strong> excavations in 1986 and 1993. Various finds were recovered.,<br />

from different periods, from Chalcolitic to present. The site, plans of<br />

caves, artefacts, and pottery are described and reproduced on figures<br />

and plates. All texts from <strong>the</strong> Jericho area written on papyrus. They<br />

103


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

are numbered 1ñ19 (21ñ113, fig 16ñ24, pls. VIñXXI). Texts 8ñ15<br />

were edited <strong>by</strong> A. Yardeni. E. Eshel, H. Eshel, and H. Misgav participated<br />

on edition of Aramaic texts, 1ñ3, 6ñ7. Greek texts were edited<br />

<strong>by</strong> N. Cohen: 4ñ5, 19; and H. M. Cotton: 16ñ18. 11. papDeed or Letter<br />

(73ñ75, fig. 23, pl. XV) concerning a house is written in Hebrew.<br />

Three texts from <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E. are indicated as heb?:<br />

9. papDeed A (67ñ69, fig. 21ñ22, pl. XIIIñXIV) is not well legible.<br />

10. papDeed B (71ñ72, fig. 22, pl. XIV) contains only a few legible<br />

words. 14. papUnclassified Text (81ñ82, fig. 24, pl. XVI) consists of<br />

two small fragments. Some Hebrew and some Aramaic small early<br />

illegible fragments from <strong>the</strong> 1 st or 2 nd century C. E. are published as<br />

15. papUnqlassified Fragments (83ñ89, fig, 24ñ25, pl. XVIñXVIII).<br />

Aramaic papyri: 1. papList of Loans ar (21ñ30, fig. 16ñ17, pl.<br />

VIñVII), written in formal cursive script, contains names and sums of<br />

money. 2. papDeed of Sale or Lease ar (31ñ36, fig. 18, pl. VIII) concerns<br />

a field. 3. papDeed of Sale ar (37ñ41, fig. 18, pl. VIII).<br />

6. papUnidentified Texts ar (53ñ54, pl. XII): 5 fragments. 7. pap Sale<br />

of Date Crop ar (55ñ62, fig. 19ñ20, pl. XIñXII) is a double document<br />

from <strong>the</strong> 3 rd year of <strong>the</strong> Roman Emperor Domitianus, i.e. 84 C. E.<br />

8. papDeed A ar (63ñ65, fig. 21, pl. XIII: 5 fragments. ñ 12. papDeed<br />

B ar (77ñ78, fig. 23, pl. XV). 13. papUnclassified Text ar (79ñ80, fig.<br />

23, pl. XV) is dated on <strong>the</strong> 18 th year of Emperor Traianus, i.e.<br />

116 C. E. The photographs of <strong>the</strong>se texts are difficult to read, <strong>the</strong><br />

letters are better legible in <strong>the</strong> drawings <strong>by</strong> A. Yardeni on <strong>the</strong> figures.<br />

Greek texts are transliterated and provided with diacritical marks.<br />

Texts 4ñ5e are introduced <strong>by</strong> N. Cohen (43). Fragments año are<br />

grouped and measured. 4. papDeed of Sale or Lease? gr (45ñ47,<br />

pl. IX) is preserved on 4 fragments. 5añd. papUnidentified Texts(s)<br />

gr (49ñ50, pl. X). 5e. papTransaction Concerning Seeds gr (51ñ52,<br />

pl. XI). 19ñ19h.Introduction (101) informs about fragments concerning<br />

measurements and groups. 19. papWritten Order? gr (103ñ105,<br />

pl. XXñXXI). 19b. papList of Witnesses? gr (109, pl. XXñXXI). 19a.<br />

papUnidentified Text A gr (107, pl. XXñXXI). 19cñh. papUnidentified<br />

Texts B gr (111ñ113, pl. XXñXXI). 16. papText Mentioning<br />

<strong>the</strong> Emperor Hadrian gr (93ñ95, pl. XVIII), written on 1 May<br />

128 C. E. 17. papDeed? gr (97, pl. XIX). 18. papFiscal Acknowledgement<br />

gr (99ñ100, pl. XIX).<br />

104


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

B. Wadi Sdeir (115ñ129). The valley is located west from Ein Gedi<br />

(cf. map, fig. 1). 1. Sdeir Genesis (117ñ124, pl. XXII. G. Murphy.<br />

Two fragmentary columns from <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> 1 st<br />

century C. E. 2. papPromissory Note? ar (125ñ129, fig. 26, pl.<br />

XXIII). A. Yardeni. The document was written probably in 135 C. E.<br />

3. and 4. Unidentified Text A and B are presented only on photographs<br />

(pl. XXIII and XXIV), cf. viii.<br />

C. Naḥal Ḥever and Naḥal Ḥever/Wadi Seiyal (131ñ200). Sites<br />

located south-west from EinñGedi. Some fragments were found <strong>by</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> Bedouin, some <strong>by</strong> Y. Yadin. Biblical Scrolls: Introductions.<br />

(133ñ135). Scrolls 1ñ4 were originally assigned to J. C. Greenfield;<br />

after he passed away, <strong>the</strong>y were edited <strong>by</strong> P. Flint. 1a. 5/6 HevNumbers<br />

a (137ñ140, pl. XXIV, 4 frg.). 1b 5/6 HevPsalms (141ñ166, pl.<br />

XXVñXXVII), written after 50 C. E. Remains of 18 psalms on eleven<br />

columns, in stichometric format, usually two cola to <strong>the</strong> line. 2. XHev/<br />

SeNumbers b (173ñ177, pl. XXIX). 3. SXHev/SeDeuteronomy<br />

(179ñ182, pl. XXIX). 5. XHev/SePhylactery (183ñ191, pl. XXX).<br />

M. Morgenstern and M. Segal. Relatively well preserved passages<br />

from Exodus and Deuteronomy, in small script. 2 8HevPrayer<br />

(167ñ169, pl. XXVIII), and 6. XHev/SeEschatological Hymn<br />

(193ñ200, pl. XXXI). M. Morgenstern. 4. 8Hev papUnidentified Text<br />

gr (171ñ172, pl. XXVIII). H. M. Cotton.<br />

D. Nahal Mishmar (201ñ204). Located halfway between EinñGedi<br />

and Masada. 2. 1Mish papList of Names and Account gr (203ñ204,<br />

pl. XXXII). H. M. Cotton. E. Nahal Ṣeíelim (205ñ228). Located north<br />

from Masada. M. Morgenstern. 2ñ3. 34 Ṣeíelim: Introduction (207).<br />

The documents were discovered in <strong>the</strong> ìCave of Scrollsî<br />

2. 34SeNumbers (209, pl. XXXIII). 3.34Se papDeed ar (211ñ214,<br />

pl. XXXIV, 12 frg.). H. M. Cotton. 4ñ5.34 Ṣeíelim: Introduction<br />

(215). These and o<strong>the</strong>r texts belonged to Jewish refugee hidden<br />

during <strong>the</strong> Bar Kokhba revolt. 4. 34Se papCensus List from Judaea or<br />

Arabia gr (217ñ225, pls. XXXIVñXXXV, frg. añf). 5. 34Se pap Account<br />

gr (227ñ226, pl. XXXV).<br />

E. Unknown Provenance (229ñ239). 1. XJoshua (231ñ239,<br />

pl. XXXVI). J. Charlesworth. Columns IñIII are related to 4QJosh /<br />

4Q48. Figures: (cf. xiñxii) 1. Map of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Region. 2ñ6. Plans<br />

of caves. 7ñ15. Pottery and artefacts. 16ñ26. Texts and scripts. Plates<br />

105


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

(cf. xiiiñxiv): IñV. Keter Jericho, view, caves. VIñXXI. Papyri.<br />

XXIñXXXVI. Texts from sites BñF. The preceding survey shows <strong>the</strong><br />

variety of sites and finds. The texts were carefully edited <strong>by</strong> 12 editors,<br />

mostly from Israel. Non-biblical texts are provided with translations.<br />

In comments <strong>the</strong>re are many references to texts from o<strong>the</strong>r sites<br />

in <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea area. This collection supplements previous editions<br />

from sites between Qumran and Masada. Some texts were published<br />

in <strong>the</strong> DJD series, volumes VIII and XXVII (reviewed in CV 41,<br />

1999, 155ñ159). O<strong>the</strong>r editions of finds from this area are mentioned<br />

(xv, n. 2). Most texts are from <strong>the</strong> ìPost-Qumranî period, <strong>the</strong>y are in<br />

spite of <strong>the</strong>ir mostly fragmentary preservation important sources for<br />

<strong>the</strong> study of history, especially of <strong>the</strong> time of Bar Kokhba war.<br />

3.1.22 Miscellanea, 1<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXVI ñ Qumran Cave 4 XXVI.<br />

Cryptic Texts <strong>by</strong> Stephen J. Pfann and Miscellanea, Part 1 <strong>by</strong> Philip<br />

Alexander, Magen Broshi, Es<strong>the</strong>r Chazon, Hannah Cotton, Frank<br />

Moore Cross, Torleif Elgvin, Doro<strong>the</strong>e Ernst, Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Hanan<br />

Eshel, Joseph Fitzmyer, Florentine GarcÌa MartinÈz, Jonas C. Greenfield,<br />

Menachem Kister, Armin Lange, Erik Larson, AndrÈ Lemaire,<br />

Timothy Lim, Joseph Naveh, Dana Pike, Michael Sokoloff, Hartmut<br />

Stegemann, Annette Steudel, Michael Stone, Loren Stuckenbruck, Shemaryahu<br />

Talmon, Sarah Tanzer, Eibert J. C. Tigchelaar, Emanuel Tov,<br />

Geza Vermes, and Ada Yardeni. ISBN 0-19-827017-8. Oxford: Clarendon<br />

Press 2000. xvi + 739 pp., plates IñXLIX.<br />

This volume is remarkable as it contains many texts, 65 in normal<br />

script and 40 in cryptic script; 31 editors and 2 consultants participated<br />

on its realisation. In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xvñxvi) E. Tov presents<br />

content of three sections: First contains miscellaneous texts, including<br />

reñeditions, second three ostraca from Khirbet Qumran, third<br />

cryptic texts. Participation of individuals and institutions is appreciated.<br />

First section, Miscellanea (1ñ493) contains texts from 4Q (3ñ483)<br />

and unknown origin (484ñ493). 4Q EnochGiants Aramaic texts are<br />

edited <strong>by</strong> L. Stuckenbruck: 4Q103 a (8ñ41, pls. IñII, 13 frgs.), 4Q206<br />

frgs. 2ñ3 f (42ñ48, pl. II); also a text unknown in <strong>the</strong> extant recensions,<br />

106


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

4Q201 frgs. 2ñ8 (107, pl. I). Re-edited texts are presented in 4 appendixes:<br />

1Q23 a (49ñ66). 1Q24 b ? (67ñ72). 2Q26 (73ñ75). 6Q8 pap<br />

(76ñ94). E. J. C. Tigchelaar and F. GarcÌa MartÌnez introduced<br />

40208ñ209 (95ñ103). They belong to <strong>the</strong> ìsynchronistic calendarî,<br />

arranged according to rising of <strong>the</strong> moon. 4Q208 Astronomical<br />

Enoch a ar (104ñ131, pls. IIIñIV, 37 frgs.). 4Q209 b ar (132ñ171, pls.<br />

VñVII, 41 frgs.). By E. Chazon and M. Stone: 4Q215a Time of Righteousness<br />

(172ñ184, pl. VIII, 4 frgs.), a poetic eschatological work.<br />

By A. Yardeni: 4Q234 Exertitium Calami A (185ñ186, pl. IX, 1 frg.).<br />

By M. Broshi: 4Q247 Pesher on <strong>the</strong> Apocalypse of Weeks (187ñ191,<br />

pl. IX, 1 frg.). By M. Broshi and E. Eshel: 4Q248 Historical Text<br />

A (192ñ200, pl. IX, 1 frg.). By H. Stegemann: 4Q269 Damascus<br />

Document d frgs. 10, 11 (Re-edition), 15, 15 (201ñ211, pl. IX). By<br />

J. Fitzmyer: 4Q281añf. Unidentified Fragments A, añf (212ñ215, pl.<br />

X). 4Q282añt B, añt (216ñ227, pls. XñXI). By P. Alexander and<br />

G. Vermes: 4Q285 Sefer ha-Milḥamah (228, pls. XIIñXIII, 10 frgs.),<br />

related to War Scroll 1QM. By E. J. C. Tigchelaar: 4Q294<br />

SapientialñDidactic Work C (247ñ248, pl. XIV, 1 frg.). By T. Lim:<br />

4Q306 Men of <strong>the</strong> People Who Err (249ñ254, pl. XIV, 3 frgs.), a halakhic<br />

text from <strong>the</strong> Pre-Qumran period. 4Q307 Text Mentioning<br />

Temple (255ñ258, pl. XIV, 9 frgs.). By J. C. Greenfield and<br />

M. Sokoloff: 4Q318 Zodiology and Brontology ar (259ñ274, pls.<br />

XVñXVI, 7 columns), meteorological omens. By J. Fitzmyer: 4Q33<br />

Historical Text C (275ñ281, pl. XVII, 10 frgs.). 4Q332 D (281ñ286,<br />

pl. XVII, 3 frgs.). 4Q333 E (287ñ289, pl. XVIII, 2 frgs.). By E. Tov:<br />

4Q338 Genealogical List? (290, pl. XIX, illegible). By J. Naveh:<br />

4Q341 Exertitium Calami C (291ñ293, pl. XVIII, 1 frg.). By<br />

H. Cotton: 4Q350 Account gr (294ñ295, pl. XX, 2 frgs.), Greek. By<br />

A. Yardeni: 4Q355 Account ar or heb (296, pl. XX, 2 frgs.), ñ 4Q360<br />

B Exercitium Calami B (297, pl. XX, 1 frg.). By A. Steudel: 4Q408<br />

Apocryphon of Moses c ? (298ñ315, pl. XXI, 17 frgs.), morning and<br />

evening ritual. 4Q410 Vision and Interpretation (316ñ319, pl. XXI,<br />

4trgs.). By S. Tanzer: 4Q419 Instruction-like Composition<br />

A (320ñ332, pl. XXII, 11 frgs.). 4Q424 B (333ñ346, pl. XXIII, 4 + 2<br />

frgs.), collection of wisdom sayings. By A. Lange: 4Q440a<br />

Hodayot-like Text D (347ñ348, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). 4Q440b Fragment<br />

Mentioning a Court (349ñ350, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). By E. Chazon:<br />

107


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

4Q455 Didactic Work C (351ñ352, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). By E. Larson:<br />

4Q458 Narrative A (353ñ365, pl. XXV, 19 frgs.). 4Q459 Narrative<br />

Work Mentioning Lebanon (366ñ368, pl. XXIV, 19 frgs.). 4Q460<br />

Narrative Work and Prayer (369ñ386, pl. XXVI, lOfrgs.). 4Q461 Narrative<br />

B (387ñ393, pl. XXVII, 5 frgs.). ñ 4Q465 papText Mentioning<br />

Samson? (394ñ395, pl. XXVII, 1 frg.). By D. Pike: 4Q466 Text Mentioning<br />

<strong>the</strong> Congregation of <strong>the</strong> Lord (396ñ397, pl. XXVII, 1 frg.).<br />

4Q467 Text mentioning ìLight to Jacobî 398ñ400, pl. XXVII,<br />

2 frgs.). By M. Broshi: 4Q468añd Unidentified Fragments C, añd<br />

(401ñ405, pl. XXVIII, 4 frgs.). 4Q468e Historical Text F (406ñ411,<br />

pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.), mentioning Ptolais, friend of <strong>the</strong> tetrarch<br />

Archelaus. By A. Lange: 4Q468f Historical Text G (412ñ413,<br />

pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q468g Eschatological Work A? (414ñ415,<br />

pl. XVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q468i Sectarian Text? (416ñ417, pl. XXIX,<br />

1 frg.). 4Q468J papUnclassified Fragments (418ñ419, pl. XXIX,<br />

5 frgs.). By D. Ernst and A. Lange: 4Q468k Hymnic Text B?<br />

(420ñ421, pl. XXIX, 1 frg.). ñ 4Q4681 Fragment Mentioning Qoh<br />

1:8ñ9 (422, pl. XXIX, 1 frg.). 4Q468mñbb Unidentified Fragments<br />

D, mñbb (423ñ432). By E. Larson: 4Q469 Narrative I (433ñ438,<br />

pl. XXX, 10 frgs.); J. Strugnell made available his transcriptions. Parallels<br />

to 4Q439. By E. Eshel and H. Eshel: 4Q471 WarñScrollñlike<br />

Text B (439ñ445, pl. XXX, 3 frgs.). By E. Eshel and M. Kister:<br />

4Q471q Polemical Texts (446ñ449, pl. XXXI, 1 frg.). By T. Elgvin:<br />

4Q472 Eschatological Work B (450ñ455, pl. XXXI, 2 frgs.). 4Q474<br />

Text Concerning Rachel and Joseph (456ñ463, pl. XXXI, 1 frgs.).<br />

4Q475 Renewed Earth (464ñ473, pl. XXXI, 1 frg.). By E. Eshel:<br />

4Q477 Rebukes Reported <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Overseer (474ñ483, pl. XXXII,<br />

3frgs.).<br />

Qumran Texts of Unknown Origin. ñ They are marked <strong>by</strong> X before<br />

Q. By S. Talmon: XQ5a Text A (= 11Q Jub. frg. 7a) (485ñ486, pl. XII,<br />

1 frg.). XQ5b Text B (= 11Q Hymns b frg. 2) (487ñ468, pl. XXII,<br />

1 frg.). By A. Lemaire, in French: XQ6 Offering ar (490ñ491,<br />

pl. XXII, 1 frg.). By A. Lange: XQ7 Unidentified Text (492ñ493,<br />

pl. XXXII, 1 frg.).<br />

The second section of <strong>the</strong> volume (495ñ512): Ostraca from Khirbet<br />

Qumran. They were found at <strong>the</strong> wall between <strong>the</strong> community centre<br />

and <strong>the</strong> cemetery (497). By F. M. Cross and E. Eshel: KhQ[1]<br />

108


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Ostracon (497ñ507, pl. XXXIII). The shred of a large jar contains<br />

a draft or a copy of a deed of gift. KhQ[2]Ostracon (508, pl. XXXIV).<br />

By E. Eshel: KhQ[3]Ostracon (509ñ512, pl. XXXIV), scribal exercise.<br />

The third section, 3. Cryptic Texts (513ñ701) were edited <strong>by</strong><br />

S. J. Pfann. He provided his edition of texts 4Q249añz and 250añj<br />

with a detailed introduction (515ñ546). Pfann explains <strong>the</strong> arrival of<br />

<strong>the</strong> papyrus fragments to <strong>the</strong> Museum in Jerusalem. J. T. Milik was<br />

assigned <strong>the</strong>se manuscripts in 1955. More than 250 fragments are<br />

analysed and edited (cf. 615ñ516). Physical description (517ñ539)<br />

deals especially with papyrus, its fibres, colours and also with Carbonñ14<br />

dating, pointing to <strong>the</strong> 2 nd century B. C. E. Script styles are<br />

characterised. Letters are described and presented in drawings (cf.<br />

526ñ532). Most community manuscripts written in <strong>the</strong> 2 nd century<br />

B. C. E. were written in cryptic A script. In this early period of <strong>the</strong><br />

community <strong>the</strong> priority of Serekh ha-ëEdah ñ 1QSa, Rule of <strong>the</strong> Congregation<br />

ñ can be observed.<br />

In appendix 1 (534ñ543) a critical edition of this text is presented,<br />

in reconstruction and with translation and analysis. In appendix 2<br />

(544ñ546) on basis of redaction stages of Serekh ha-ëEdah three periods<br />

of development of <strong>the</strong> Qumran community are presented: (1)<br />

initial priests, (2) <strong>the</strong> Teacher of Righteousness, (3) maskilim ñ ìMastersî.<br />

Cryptic A texts 249añz, 250añj, 313, 313a and 313b (547ñ701,<br />

pls. XXXVñXLIX) are edited similarly to o<strong>the</strong>r Hebrew texts, with<br />

transcriptions in standard Hebrew letters. The text 4Q249 Midrash<br />

Sefer Moshe is presented only on photograph (pl. XLIX), with reference<br />

to transcription in DJD XXXV (cf. supra, 3.2.14).<br />

Each text is presented in individual edition; in <strong>the</strong> following survey<br />

texts are listed in groups, without references to pages and plates<br />

of individual editions. Texts are marked as 4Qpap cryptA. 4Q249añi<br />

pap CryptA 4QSerekh ha-ëEdah (547ñ574, pls. XXXVñXXXVII).<br />

Most texts consist from 1 fragment only; 4Q249g (563ñ568) has 7<br />

fragments. Some texts are reconstructed with help of 1QSa. 4Q249j<br />

Leviticus h ? (575ñ568, pl. XXXVII). 4Q249kñl Text Quoting Leviticus<br />

A, B (578ñ582, pl. XXXVIII). 4Q249m Hodayotñlike Text E<br />

(583ñ584, pl. XXXVIII). 4Q249nño Liturgical Work E?, F?<br />

(585ñ587, pl. XXXVIII). 4Q249p Prophecy? (588ñ589, pl. XXXIX).<br />

109


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

4Q249q Fragment Mentioning <strong>the</strong> Planting (591ñ592, pl. XXXIX).<br />

4Q249rñy Unidentified Text AñH (592ñ602, pls. XXXIXñXL).<br />

4Q249z Miscellaneous Texts A (603ñ677, pls. XLIñXLV). 182 very<br />

small fragments are exactly described. 4Q250ñ250a Text Concerning<br />

Cultic Service A, B? (678ñ681, pl. XLVI). 4Q250b Text Related to<br />

Isaiah 11 (682, pl. XLVI). 4Q250-i Unidentified Text I ñ 0 (683ñ693,<br />

pls. XLVIIñXLVIII). 4Q250J Miscellaneous Texts B (694ñ696, pl.<br />

XLVIII). 4Q313 Miqṣat Ma c asíeh ha-Torah g (697ñ699, pl. XLIX).<br />

4Q313añb Unidentified Text P, Q (700ñ701, pl. XLIX).<br />

Concordances (703ñ739) were prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and G. Pfann: Hebrew<br />

(705ñ725) and Aramaic (726ñ739). Photographs are presented<br />

on plates IñXLIX. Some are slightly enlarged. KhQ[l]Ostracon is reproduced<br />

in a clear drawing (pl. XXXIII). Texts in this volume<br />

XXXVI are presented in a manner corresponding to that in <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

volumes, even as many texts differ in form and in content from <strong>the</strong><br />

majority of Qumran texts. The ostraca from Khirbet Qumran were<br />

written in <strong>the</strong> middle of <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E. in vulgar script, different<br />

from styles used in texts written on skin or papyrus. The appearance<br />

and <strong>the</strong> site of ostraca point to <strong>the</strong>ir marginal role; because of it <strong>the</strong>y<br />

may be used for research of <strong>the</strong> background of <strong>the</strong> Qumran community.<br />

In DJD XXXVI only Cryptic A texts are published, <strong>the</strong> Cryptic<br />

B and C texts are listed ñ 4Q362, 363, 363ab ñ as those to be published<br />

elsewhere (xv). This information does not agree with that in<br />

<strong>the</strong> Study Edition (reviewed in CV 41/1999: 170ñ193) pp. 718ñ719,<br />

according to which <strong>the</strong>se cryptic texts are to be published in DJD<br />

XXXVI. In <strong>the</strong> introduction to <strong>the</strong> cryptic texts (515) it is mentioned<br />

that in 1955 J. T. Milik was assigned <strong>the</strong> manuscripts in esoteric<br />

script. This information is provided with reference to <strong>the</strong> book <strong>by</strong><br />

F. M. Cross, The Library of Qumran (reviewed in CV 40/1998:<br />

64ñ67).where <strong>the</strong> deciphering of <strong>the</strong> script <strong>by</strong> Milik is evaluated<br />

(p. 45).<br />

Cryptic A texts published in DJD XX and XXXV and to be published<br />

in DJD XXI in 2001 are listed in <strong>the</strong> foreword (xv). Thus all<br />

Cryptic A texts will be available. The careful edition <strong>by</strong> S. Pfann can<br />

serve as model for <strong>the</strong> future edition of Cryptic B and C texts. Pfann<br />

has used his Analysis of redaction stages of Serekh ha-ëEdah for<br />

establishing stages of <strong>the</strong> Qumran community (544ñ546). This<br />

110


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

method and its results deserve fur<strong>the</strong>r attention. Large space in <strong>the</strong><br />

section 1 (3ñ171) is devoted to Enoch texts. The importance of Enochic<br />

traditions was discussed <strong>by</strong> G. Boccaccini in his book Beyond<br />

<strong>the</strong> Essene Hypo<strong>the</strong>sis (to be reviewed in ìAccess VI). Some manuscripts<br />

in <strong>the</strong> section 1. Miscellanea supplement <strong>the</strong> evidence from<br />

manuscripts already published, many contain fragments of works<br />

known only from <strong>the</strong>se new finds. The names of editors of <strong>the</strong>se<br />

difficult texts are indicated in contents (viiñix). Information about<br />

institutions in which <strong>the</strong>y are active would be welcome. As <strong>the</strong>se<br />

editors also contributed to Encyclopedia (reviewed in CV, v. infra<br />

7.12), its directory (1057ñ1065) provides basic data. The careful editions<br />

of texts is in many respects difficult in Miscellanea, Part 1, will<br />

be gratefully used. And <strong>the</strong> users can express best wishes for <strong>the</strong><br />

edition of Part 2.<br />

Addition<br />

3.1.23 Parabiblical texts, Part 4<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXX ñ Qumran Cave 4 XXI. Parabiblical<br />

Texts, Part 4. Pseudo-prophetic Texts. By Devorah Dimant.<br />

Partially Based on Earlier Transcriptions <strong>by</strong> John Strugnell.<br />

ISBN 0-19-924542-8. Oxford: Clarendon Press 2001. xiv + 278 pp.,<br />

plates IñXII. Price $ 55.00.<br />

Parabiblical texts, parts 1ñ3, DJD volumes XII, XIV, XXII, were<br />

reviewed previously (v. supra 3.1.11ñ13). While <strong>the</strong>se previous volumes<br />

were edited <strong>by</strong> co-operation of more editors, this volume XXX<br />

was edited <strong>by</strong> one editor, Devorah Dimant, Professor at <strong>the</strong> University<br />

of Haifa. In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi) Emanuel Tov, editor-in-chief, explains<br />

<strong>the</strong> content of this last volume of <strong>the</strong> series: rewriting of books<br />

of Ezekiel and Jeremiah. The co-operation on its production is highly<br />

appreciated. Devorah Dimant wrote <strong>the</strong> preface (xiiiñxiv). She explains<br />

that she was in 1985 invited <strong>by</strong> John Strugnell to work on <strong>the</strong><br />

editing. The complex work was supported <strong>by</strong> persons and institutions<br />

on three continents. In <strong>the</strong> general introduction (1ñ3) <strong>the</strong> process of<br />

work is traced since 1956. The classification of fragments is explained.<br />

The volume XXX contains two works: A. Pseudo-Ezekiel<br />

111


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

(5ñ88, plates IñIII); B. Apocryphon of Jeremiah (89ñ260, plates<br />

IVñXII). The concordance (261ñ278) <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann contains<br />

Hebrew words of both works. Hebrew letters on photographic reproductions<br />

of fragments (plates IñXII) are well legible, even those from<br />

badly damaged originals. Both sections are provided with substantial<br />

introductions (7ñ16; 91ñ116). Physical descriptions, information<br />

about content, orthography and grammar precede <strong>the</strong> Hebrew texts,<br />

notes on readings, translations and comments follow <strong>the</strong>m. In passages<br />

entitled ìAnalysisî various problems are explained and discussed.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> introduction to 4QPseudo-Ezekiel (7ñ16) <strong>the</strong> title given <strong>by</strong><br />

J. Strugnell is explained. Pseudo-Ezekiel has some features not represented<br />

in Apocryphon to Jeremiah, and it does not exhibit sectarian<br />

terminology which is attested with some o<strong>the</strong>r affinities in <strong>the</strong> Apocryphon<br />

of Jeremiah. Six copies of Pseudo-Ezekiel represented in <strong>the</strong><br />

fragments are shortly described. Some contain <strong>the</strong> Vision of <strong>the</strong> Dry<br />

Bones. Language and style of Pseudo-Ezekiel follow <strong>the</strong> canonical<br />

book, grammar and orthography are close to Masoretic tradition.<br />

Some relations to non-sectarian ancient Jewish literature can be observed.<br />

And some affinities concerning resurrection can be seen in<br />

early Christian literature. Nearly all copies of Pseudo-Ezekiel were<br />

written in <strong>the</strong> half century before <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> Christian era.<br />

The composition of Pseudo-Ezekiel fits well in mid-second century<br />

B. C. E. The reorganisation of fragments led to some changes of <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

numbers; <strong>the</strong>y follow now <strong>the</strong> supposed sequences of texts. Unidentified<br />

fragments are marked <strong>by</strong> capital letters. 4Q385 AQPseudo-<br />

Ezekiel a (17ñ51, plate I, fragments 1ñ6) is partially reconstructed in<br />

6 columns (cf. 18). Future resurrection of Israel follows Ezekiel cc.<br />

37ñ38. Analysis (31ñ37) points to interpretative character of<br />

Pseudo-Ezekiel. 4Q386 (53ñ69, pl. II, frgs. 1ñ2) is compared with<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r contemporary texts. Historical personalities and events are identified<br />

(55ñ59). 4Q385b c (71ñ75, pl. Ill, 1 frg.) mentions Egypt.<br />

4Q388 d (77ñ84, pl. Ill, frg. 1ñ7). 4Q385a Unidentified Fragments<br />

(85ñ88, pl. Ill, frgs. AñG).<br />

The introduction to 4QApocryphon of Jeremiah (91ñ116) begins<br />

with identification of <strong>the</strong> work. Six extant copies of Apocryphon of<br />

Jeremiah C are characterised and similar texts mentioned. Some pas-<br />

112


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

sages contain episodes from biblical history, some express events<br />

from <strong>the</strong> Second Temple period, some are probably connected with<br />

eschatological events; cf. sequence table (99ñ100). The prose is written<br />

in biblical style. Biblical locutions are listed as are those known<br />

from Qumran literature. The portrayal of Jeremiah (105ñ107) differs<br />

in some points from biblical model. Apocryphon of Jeremiah is related<br />

to some apocryphal and pseudepigraphic texts, especially to <strong>the</strong><br />

Enochic ones, and also to Qumran texts. In Apocrypha of Jeremiah<br />

events are presented in chronological sequence. This Apocryphon<br />

was composed probably about 125ñ100 B. C. E.<br />

Before Apocryphon of Jeremiah C a similar text, Apocryphon of<br />

Jeremiah A is published. Ano<strong>the</strong>r manuscript 4Q384 4QpapApocryphon<br />

of Jeremiah B? was published <strong>by</strong> M. Smith in DJD XIX, cf.<br />

supra 3.1.12. Also <strong>the</strong> text 4Q470 published in DJD XIX may be<br />

related (95). 4Q383 4QApocryphon of Jeremiah A (117ñ127, pl. IV,<br />

frgs. 1ñ6, AñC) is clearly linked to <strong>the</strong> prophet. 4Q385a 4QApocryphon<br />

of Jeremiah C a (131ñ171, pls. IVñVI, frgs. 1ñ18, AñK) is<br />

<strong>the</strong> largest collection of fragments. 4Q387 b (173ñ199, pls. VIIñVIII,<br />

frgs. 1ñ9, A), fragments from <strong>the</strong> middle and later parts of <strong>the</strong> scroll.<br />

4Q388a c (201ñ217, pls. VIIIñIX, frgs. 1ñ7, AñI). 4Q389 d (219ñ234,<br />

pls. IXñX, frgs. 1ñ9, AñE). 4Q390 e (235ñ253, pl. XI, frgs. 1ñ8).<br />

4Q387a f (255ñ260, pl. XII, frgs. 1ñ9).<br />

The volume XXX is result of very demanding activity. Devorah<br />

Dimant very carefully classified <strong>the</strong> fragments and presented <strong>the</strong>m in<br />

appropriate sequence. In her detailed comments she applied her profound<br />

knowledge of Jewish post-biblical literature. Especially important<br />

are passages entitled ìAnalysis,î in which she discussed difficult<br />

problems and offered many valid solutions. Her edition of two<br />

pseudo-prophetic texts is valuable contribution to <strong>the</strong> study of Dead<br />

Sea scrolls. These texts are important for interpretation of prophetic<br />

books, for <strong>the</strong> history of <strong>the</strong> Second Temple period, and for understanding<br />

of eschatology (cf. 96). Their reliable edition will be effectively<br />

and gratefully used for fur<strong>the</strong>r research in <strong>the</strong>se fields which<br />

deserve more attention.<br />

113


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

3.1.24 Aramaic Texts, I<br />

Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXI Qumr‚n Grotte 4 XXII,<br />

Textes aramÈens, Première partie 4Q329ñ549. Par …mile Puech.<br />

ISBN 19-827026-7. Oxford: Clarendon 2001. xvill + 434 pp., pls.<br />

IñXXII. Price USD 80.00<br />

This volume is in French, like <strong>the</strong> previous volumes II, III, VI, VII,<br />

XXV. Like <strong>the</strong> volume XXV (v. supra, 3.1.20), this volume was edited<br />

<strong>by</strong> …mile Puech, Director of Research at <strong>the</strong> Centre National de<br />

Recherche Scientifique in Paris, who works at <strong>the</strong> …cole biblique et<br />

archÈologique francaise in Jerusalem. And like volume XXV, also<br />

this volume is dedicated to <strong>the</strong> memory of Jean Starcky. The English<br />

foreword (xi) was written <strong>by</strong> Professor Emanuel Tov, editor-in-chief<br />

of <strong>the</strong> DJD series. The manuscripts 4Q521ñ578 were originally assigned<br />

to Jean Starcky. …mile Puech continued <strong>the</strong> editorial work.<br />

The remaining texts have to be published in DJD volume XXXVII.<br />

The work on production, done in Jerusalem, is appreciated. The editor<br />

of <strong>the</strong> volume, …mile Puech, remembers in <strong>the</strong> French preface<br />

(xiiiñxvi) <strong>the</strong> work of Jean Starcky on <strong>the</strong> Aramaic texts. Some were<br />

published <strong>by</strong> J. T. Milik. Identification and arrangements of texts is<br />

explained. The texts in this volume are related to biblical personalities.<br />

Several texts are testaments.<br />

A. Paroles de Michel. 4Q529 (1ñ8, pl. I, 2 fragments).The title<br />

ìWords of book which Michael said to anglesî introduces a vision.<br />

B. Livre des GÈants. 4Q530ñ533, 203 1. Livre des GÈants bñe : Introduction<br />

(9ñ16). These texts were identified with help of Manichean<br />

Book of Giants, preserved in Middle Persian and o<strong>the</strong>r versions, Book<br />

of Giants, related to <strong>the</strong> Book of Enoch, was composed probably in<br />

<strong>the</strong> second century B. C. E. 4Q203 1 Livre des GÈants a (17ñ18, pl. I,<br />

1 frg.) is republished as appendix. 4Q530 b (19ñ47, pls. IñII, 20 frgs.).<br />

4Q531 c (49ñ94, pls. IIIñV, 47 frgs.). 4Q532 d (95ñ104, pl. VI, 2 frgs.).<br />

4Q533 e (105ñ115, pl. VI, 8 frgs.).<br />

C. Naissance de NoÈ. 4Q534ñ536. Naissance de NoÈ añc : Introduction<br />

(117ñ127). Birth of Noah text was recognised as such after various<br />

scholarly opinions were expressed. Noah was Elect of God. The<br />

text was composed about 160 B. C. E. 4Q534 a (129ñ152, pls. VIIñIX,<br />

114


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

7 frgs.); 4Q535 b (163ñ159, pl. X, 3 frgs.); 4Q536 c (161ñ170, pl. X, 4<br />

frgs.).<br />

D. Testament de Jacob. 4Q537 Testament de Jacob? (171ñ190, pl.<br />

XII, 25 frgs.) Composed in <strong>the</strong> Pre-Qumranian period.<br />

E. Testament de Juda 4Q538 (191ñ199, pl. XII, 4 frgs.) was recognised<br />

<strong>by</strong> relations to Genesis and Jubilees.<br />

F. Testament de Joseph 4Q539 (201ñ211, pl. XII, 5 frgs.) can be<br />

compared to Greek Testament of Joseph.<br />

G. Apocryphe de LÈvi. 4Q540ñ541 Apocryphe de LÈvi añb ?: Introduction.<br />

(213ñ216) Contacts with o<strong>the</strong>r texts mentioning Levi can be<br />

observed. 4Q540 a ? (217ñ223, pl. XII, 3 frgs.); 4Q541 b ? (225ñ256,<br />

pls. XIIIñXIV, 24 frgs.).<br />

H. Testament de Qahat 4Q542 (257ñ282, pl. XV, 3 frgs.). Parting<br />

of Qahat and his son and heir ëAmram.<br />

I. Visions de ë Amram. 4Q543ñ549 añb : Introduction (283ñ288). In<br />

this texts composed about 150 B. C. E. some similarities to <strong>the</strong> Samaritan<br />

tradition were observed <strong>by</strong> J. T. Milik. 4Q543 a (289ñ318,<br />

pls. XVIñXVIII, 46 frgs.). 4Q544 b (319ñ329, pl. XVIII, 3 frgs.)<br />

4Q545 c (331ñ349, pl. XIX, 12 frgs.). 4Q546 d (351ñ374, pl. XX, 25<br />

frgs.). 4Q547 e (375ñ390. pl. XXI, 9 frgs.); 4Q548 f (391ñ398, pl.<br />

XXII, 3 frgs.); 4Q549 g ? (399ñ405, pl. XXII, 2 frgs.). There are many<br />

parallels between <strong>the</strong>se manuscripts.<br />

The concordance (407ñ439) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann contains<br />

all <strong>the</strong> Aramaic words. Words with morphemes B-, H-, K-, L- are<br />

listed in <strong>the</strong>ir alphabetic order without respect to <strong>the</strong>se morphemes.<br />

Plates IñXXII present clear photographs of <strong>the</strong> fragments, made with<br />

help of infra-red rays. As such photograph was not available for<br />

4Q537 1, Puech offered a drawing (cf. xiv).<br />

The edition of Aramaic texts found in Qumran caves is more detailed<br />

than that of Hebrew texts. It was necessary to identify texts<br />

preserved on fragments. It was necessary to locate <strong>the</strong> texts in <strong>the</strong><br />

Jewish literature of <strong>the</strong> Pre-Qumranian period, before <strong>the</strong> middle of<br />

<strong>the</strong> second century B. C. E., preserved mostly in later reworking and<br />

translations. Puech successfully applied his wide and profound knowledge<br />

and appropriate methodology.<br />

The introductions to text editions deal with identification and<br />

characterisation of fragmentary works. In <strong>the</strong> passages of palaeogra-<br />

115


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

phy all letters are described in alphabetic order. The observations<br />

are used for determining dates of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts. The paragraphs<br />

on orthography and language present conveniently <strong>the</strong>se features on<br />

separate lines. If <strong>the</strong>re are faults or corrections in <strong>the</strong> manuscripts,<br />

<strong>the</strong>y are dealt with before <strong>the</strong> editions. The Aramaic texts are presented<br />

in usual Hebrew letters. The notes on readings are added.<br />

French translations are arranged in usual manner, in lines corresponding<br />

to those of <strong>the</strong> originals. Problematic renderings are presented<br />

in Italics. In some instances two different translations are presented<br />

(cf. 4Q530 frg. 5 1, p. 27; 4Q534 frg 1 i 11, p. 134).<br />

Comments following and explaining <strong>the</strong> translations are very detailed.<br />

Previous interpretations are discussed, relations to biblical and<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r ancient texts are evaluated. Many original interpretations and<br />

observations are included.<br />

Even as some texts were copied in <strong>the</strong> Qumran area, <strong>the</strong>y were<br />

mostly composed in <strong>the</strong> Pre-Qumranian era (cf. 259) and brought to<br />

<strong>the</strong> Essene library. These texts are important for <strong>the</strong> study of Judaism<br />

in <strong>the</strong> Second Temple period, of Bible interpretation and of <strong>the</strong> cultural<br />

background. Some studies will be made possible as <strong>the</strong> remaining<br />

Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong> cave 4 will be published, and all Aramaic<br />

texts from <strong>the</strong> Qumran area will be available. It will be possible<br />

to prepare a book on <strong>the</strong> Aramaic of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. The effectively<br />

used book The Hebrew of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls <strong>by</strong> Elisha<br />

Qimron (Atlanta: Scholars Press 1986; reviewed in Catholic Biblical<br />

Quarterly 50/1988: 308ñ309) can serve as model. The excellent<br />

edition of <strong>the</strong> first part of Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong> Qumran cave 4<br />

will be highly appreciated <strong>by</strong> its users. They may wish that …mile<br />

Puech publish such outstanding edition of <strong>the</strong> second part in near<br />

future.<br />

116


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

7. Collections or articles<br />

In this section <strong>the</strong> review of <strong>the</strong> Encyclopedia containing about<br />

450†articles is presented (7.12).<br />

7.12 Encyclopedia.<br />

ISBN 0-19-508450-0: Encyclopedia of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. Lawrence<br />

H. Schiffman, James C. VanderKam, editors in chief. Oxford<br />

University Press (New York) 2000. Volume 1, pp. iñxiv, 1ñ594. Volume<br />

2, [iñiv] 595ñ1132. (21 ◊ 28 cm). Price USD 295.00.<br />

The purpose of this encyclopaedia is to present to scholars and to<br />

lay people <strong>the</strong> results of research in <strong>the</strong> half century since <strong>the</strong> discovery<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls and to let <strong>the</strong>m know <strong>the</strong> information<br />

relevant for <strong>the</strong> history of our civilisation (vii). Both editors in chief<br />

are well known experts, some of <strong>the</strong>ir publications were reviewed in<br />

this journal (CV 36/1994, 264; 38/1996, 140, 150, 154ñ158; and<br />

38/1996, 139, 144ñ145, 159ñ160). Also o<strong>the</strong>r members of <strong>the</strong> editorial<br />

board (cf. ii) are known for <strong>the</strong>ir work on <strong>the</strong> Scrolls: editors:<br />

George J. Brooke, John J. Collins, Florentine GarcÌa MartinÈz, Eileen<br />

M. Schuller, Emanuel Tov, Eugene Ulrich; consultant Ephraim Stern;<br />

advisers: Joseph A. Fitzmyer, Jonas C. Greenfield, …mile Puech, Hartmut<br />

Stegemann. In <strong>the</strong> Directory of Contributors (1057ñ1065)<br />

179†persons are listed, mostly professors, also researchers in museums,<br />

independent scholars, and even graduate students. Most of <strong>the</strong>m<br />

from <strong>the</strong> United States, many from Canada and from Israel, and also<br />

some from 9 European countries. Articles contributed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>m are<br />

listed.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> preface (viiñxiv) <strong>the</strong> editors in chief explain how <strong>the</strong> encyclopaedia<br />

was conceived as all <strong>the</strong> texts became available in <strong>the</strong><br />

1990s. They point to <strong>the</strong>ir importance for history of Judaism and<br />

Christianity. The collections are shortly described and characterised.<br />

Qumran scrolls found at <strong>the</strong> site of <strong>the</strong> community occupied from<br />

about 134 B. C. E. until 68 C. E. are from <strong>the</strong> last three centuries<br />

B. C. E. and <strong>the</strong> first century C. E. Samaria papyri discovered at<br />

Wadi-ed-Daliyeh are Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong> 4 th century B. C. E. Bar<br />

Kokhba texts from <strong>the</strong> 2 nd century C. E. were found in valleys south<br />

117


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

of Qumran; also texts in various languages from <strong>the</strong> Iron Age to <strong>the</strong><br />

Byzantine period were discovered in this area. Masada provided Hebrew<br />

and Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong> period before 73 C. E. (cf. 520).<br />

Khirbet Mird yielded Greek, Christian Palestinian Aramaic and Arabic<br />

texts from <strong>the</strong> Byzantine period, and later (cf. 564). The purpose<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Encyclopedia is to encompass all scholarship on <strong>the</strong> scrolls to<br />

date. The work started in 1992. The design relates to 8 conceptual<br />

categories.<br />

How to use <strong>the</strong> Encyclopedia (xiiñxiv): The headwords of articles<br />

indicate independent entries, or composite entries, where groups<br />

of related topics provide appropriate contexts, or blind entries, referring<br />

to o<strong>the</strong>r entries concerning <strong>the</strong> subject. Bibliographies at <strong>the</strong><br />

end of articles provide information about basic studies. The Encyclopedia<br />

sums <strong>the</strong> recent accomplishments and points to future tasks.<br />

Those who supported <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong> Encyclopedia are appreciated.<br />

The number of articles is indicated as 450; <strong>the</strong>y are printed on pp.<br />

1ñ1012, two columns on a page. The entries are accompanied <strong>by</strong><br />

bibliographies. Some long entries consist of several articles: ìQumranî<br />

(733ñ746): Archaeology <strong>by</strong> Magen Broshi; ìWritten materialsî,<br />

<strong>by</strong> Devorah Dimant; ìMasadaî (515ñ525): Archaeology, <strong>by</strong> Jodi<br />

Magness; ìHistoryî, <strong>by</strong> Hanan Eshel; ìWritten materialî, <strong>by</strong> Shemaryahu<br />

Talmon; ìDaniel, Book ofî (170ñ178): Hebrew and Aramaic<br />

Text, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich; Greek Additions, <strong>by</strong> George<br />

W. E. Nickelsburg; Pseudo-Daniel, <strong>by</strong> John J. Collins. In some entries<br />

are tables (v. 109, 458ñ459; cf. 1073) Nei<strong>the</strong>r pictures nor maps<br />

are contained in this encyclopedia; some information can be seen in<br />

bibliographies.<br />

Very useful indexes are at <strong>the</strong> end of volume 2: ìProvisional List of<br />

Documents from <strong>the</strong> Judean Desertî (1013ñ1049); ìIndex of Document<br />

Names to Document Numbersî (1051ñ1056); ìDirectory of Contributorsî<br />

(1057ñ1065); ìSynoptic Outline of Contentsî (1067ñ1071);<br />

ìIndexî (1073ñ1132).<br />

Beyond <strong>the</strong> alphabetic arrangement of entries <strong>the</strong> orientation in<br />

this rich treasury of data is provided <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> innovative synoptic outline.<br />

On its first page (1067) <strong>the</strong> general conceptual categories are<br />

listed. Then (1068ñ1071) <strong>the</strong> entries are presented according to <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

Among ìPlaces of General Importanceî most attention is devoted to<br />

118


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

ìJudeaî (440ñ455): Economy, Flora, Fauna, Geography, History.<br />

ìArchaeological Sites and Written Materialî are presented. Material<br />

remains are fisted in two classes, ìArchitectureî and ìArtefacts and<br />

Remainsî, including ìWriting Materialsî (996ñ997).<br />

ìWritten Material Discovered in <strong>the</strong> Judean Desertî are introduced<br />

<strong>by</strong> ìOverviewî, informing about general entries, such as ìAlphabetsî<br />

(18ñ20), ìPoetryî (679ñ681), and about categories of texts, such as<br />

ìCalendars and Mishmarotî (108ñ117), ìInterpretation of Scripturesî<br />

(376ñ383), ìScripturesî: Texts, Translations, Quotation and Use<br />

(832ñ842). ìWisdom Textsî (976ñ980).<br />

Among ìTextsî discovered are: Hebrew Scripture, ìPsalms, Book<br />

ofî (702ñ710), Biblical Text, Apocryphal Psalms; ìEzekiel, Book ofî<br />

(279ñ284), Biblical Text, Pseudo-Ezekiel; previously known compositions<br />

pseudepigraphs; previously unknown compositions ñ 47 texts,<br />

including Hodayot, Pesher Habakkuk, Rule of <strong>the</strong> Community (ÿ·d<br />

Jednoty), Temple Scroll.<br />

ìLanguages and Scriptsî: Arabic, Aramaic, Greek, Hebrew, Latin,<br />

also: Languages, Names of God, Orthography, Palaeography, Scribal<br />

Practices.<br />

ìRelated Ancient Textsî are listed including Mishna and Tosephta,<br />

Talmudim, Josephus Flavius, Philo Judaeus, Christian ñ New Testament,<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r Christian Writings.<br />

ìHistoryî: ìPolitical, Military and Economic Historyî. ìReligious<br />

History: Jewish Groups ñ also Karaites ñ, Christian Groups ñ also<br />

Jewish Christians, O<strong>the</strong>r Religious Groups and Movements ñ also<br />

Gnosticism.<br />

ìBeliefs, Institutions and Practices:î ìBeliefs,î including Dualism,<br />

Eschatology, God, Messiahs, Warfare, and Religious Beliefs,<br />

Qumran Sect. ìInstitutions:î Community Organisation, Priests, et al.<br />

ìPracticesî: including Celibacy, Mysticism, Sabbath, and Worship,<br />

Qumran Sect.<br />

ìFiguresî: ìHebrew Biblical Figuresî, ìSobriquetsî, including<br />

Teacher of <strong>the</strong> Righteousness; ìContemporaneous Figuresî: Jesus<br />

(404ñ408), John <strong>the</strong> Baptist (418ñ421), Bar Kokhba, Shim c on, and<br />

various rulers.<br />

ìScroll Researchî: ìResearch, Publication and Preservationî, including<br />

Scroll Research, Publication, Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean<br />

119


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

Desert, Revue de Qumr‚n, Museums and Collections, Scroll Research.<br />

ìTools and Methods of Studyî: Archaeological Surveys, Carbonñ14<br />

Dating, Photography and Computer Imaging, Research Tools.<br />

ìKey Individuals and Institutionsî: 15 individuals, 10 institutions.<br />

This selective survey shows how competently <strong>the</strong> richness of materials<br />

and ideas is made accessible to users of this encyclopaedia.<br />

Also most helpful is <strong>the</strong> arrangement of ìIndexî (1073ñ1132). The<br />

primary essays on <strong>the</strong> topics are referred to page numbers in boldface.<br />

Tables are denoted <strong>by</strong> page numbers in italics, cf. 109, calendars;<br />

458ñ459, judicial procedures: penalties. Names of contributors<br />

are accompanied <strong>by</strong> references to pages of <strong>the</strong>ir articles. Titles of<br />

books and texts are printed in italics. Items are printed at beginning<br />

of lines, related topics are a little shifted aside. Their large numbers<br />

make it possible to trace various contacts of items. And <strong>the</strong> great<br />

number of items and related topics enables to penetrate into <strong>the</strong> data<br />

in <strong>the</strong> manuscripts and <strong>the</strong>ir various connections.<br />

ìProvisional List of Documents from <strong>the</strong> Judean Desertî<br />

(1013ñ1049) is characterised as such in its title (1013). Information<br />

from <strong>the</strong> list published <strong>by</strong> E. Tov in 1999 (cf. CV 41/1999, 181) is<br />

added; additional text sigla in brackets [], names of texts.<br />

Those texts which were written on papyrus are marked <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

abbreviation pap; <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r texts were written on lea<strong>the</strong>r. Also <strong>the</strong><br />

languages of texts are indicated <strong>by</strong> abbreviations: ar ñ Aramaic, nab ñ<br />

Nabatean, gr ñ Greek, lat ñ Latin, arab ñArabic; Hebrew texts are not<br />

marked, only rarely <strong>the</strong> abbreviation heb is used.<br />

Text numbers are in <strong>the</strong> first column, <strong>the</strong> official sigla in <strong>the</strong> second<br />

column, <strong>the</strong> third column provides name or description in Encyclopedia;<br />

if 1999 names are different, <strong>the</strong>y are presented in <strong>the</strong> fourth column.<br />

The largest corpus, documents from Qumran (Q; 1013ñ1034), is<br />

followed <strong>by</strong> texts from Masada (Mas; 1034ñ1035), Murabba c at (Mur;<br />

1035ñ1039), Wadi Sdeir, Naḥal Ḥever, Nahal Ṣeíelim (Seiyal)<br />

(1039ñ1044), Nahal Mishmar, Wadi Ghweir, Wadi enñNar (1044),<br />

Wadi edñDaliyeh (1044ñ1045), Khirbet Mird (1045ñ1049).<br />

The orientation in this complete up-to-date list is facilitated <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

ìIndex of Document Names to Document Numbersî(1051ñ156);<br />

names and also types are related to numbers in <strong>the</strong> first column of <strong>the</strong><br />

120


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Provisional List. The list of documents shows quantity and variety of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. The Encyclopedia provides relevant data, places<br />

<strong>the</strong>m in context, and points to previous and also future research. Appropriate<br />

attention is devoted to modern research methods: ìCarbonñ14<br />

Datingî, Gregory L. Doudna (120ñ121); ìPhotography and<br />

Computer Imagining,î Bruce Zuckerman and Kenneth Zuckerman<br />

(669ñ675).<br />

Problems which were or are still discussed are presented with exact<br />

substantiation of facts, clear formulation leads to <strong>the</strong>ir understanding.<br />

At <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> entry ìGnosticismî (313ñ317) Birger<br />

A. Pearson concludes that this movement arose from Jewish apocalyptic<br />

traditions, attested also in <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. Michael<br />

A. Knibb gives detailed information about ìTeacher of Righteousnessî<br />

(918ñ921), who cannot be identified with a known historical<br />

figure. For <strong>the</strong> date and au<strong>the</strong>nticity of ìCopper Scrollî (144ñ148) Al<br />

Wolters quotes 6 major <strong>the</strong>ories; he himself considers <strong>the</strong> treasure<br />

au<strong>the</strong>ntic, belonging to <strong>the</strong> Jerusalem Temple before 68 C. E.<br />

A few entries appear unusual. ìAeneidî (10ñ11; Eugene Ulrich) is<br />

description of <strong>the</strong> very small fragment of this poem <strong>by</strong> Virgil, found<br />

at Masada. ìElephantine Textsî (241ñ246) are from <strong>the</strong> 5 th century<br />

B. C. E.; Bezalel Porten compares <strong>the</strong> forms of <strong>the</strong>se Aramaic letters<br />

and documents with those of Hebrew and Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong><br />

2 nd †century C. E. found in <strong>the</strong> caves south of <strong>the</strong> Qumran area. Among<br />

15†individuals important for <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls (cf.<br />

1071) <strong>the</strong>re is one born in Vienna and raised in Brno, Czechoslovakia.<br />

The article ìLicht, Jacobî (494ñ495) was contributed <strong>by</strong> Bilha<br />

Nitzan. She informs about his life (1922ñ1992), about his position of<br />

professor of Bible at Tel Aviv University, and about his works on <strong>the</strong><br />

Dead Sea Scrolls (Cf. J·kob Licht. éivot a dÌlo, Religio 4, 1996,<br />

194ñ200).<br />

Among <strong>the</strong> contributors to Encyclopedia are former students of<br />

this reviewer, from Johns Hopkins University in Baltimore, James<br />

M. Lichtenberger ñ ìLettersî (480ñ485), and from University of California,<br />

Los Angeles: James R. Davila ñ ìExodus, Book ofî<br />

(277ñ279), ìGenesis, Book ofî (299ñ300), ìOrthographyî (625ñ628;<br />

Hebrew, Aramaic), and Robert Good ñ ìJacobî (395ñ396), ìJosephî<br />

(425ñ426), ìJudahî (438ñ439). Professor of Biblical Studies at this<br />

121


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

University, William M. Schniedewind contributed <strong>the</strong> entry ìManasseh,<br />

Kingî (504ñ505).<br />

This short review could point only to a few features of <strong>the</strong> magnificent<br />

Encyclopedia of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. The more it will be read<br />

and used, <strong>the</strong> more its qualities will be appreciated. In <strong>the</strong>se two large<br />

volumes many data are contained which without its help should be<br />

sought in various, often not easily accessible, publications. Students<br />

and those who aspire to be acquainted with this important discovery<br />

can study <strong>the</strong> topics systematically, with help of <strong>the</strong> synoptic outline.<br />

Researchers can find required information, for which <strong>the</strong>y should<br />

o<strong>the</strong>rwise go to libraries. The contributors, <strong>the</strong> editors, and all who<br />

produced this Encyclopedia, deserve gratitude of its users. This reviewer<br />

can appreciate, how helpful this Encyclopedia will be, as he<br />

will continue his work on <strong>the</strong> Czech translation of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea<br />

Scrolls, which is now being prepared in co-operation with <strong>the</strong> Centre<br />

of Biblical Studies at <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Theological Faculty of Charles<br />

University in Prague.<br />

8. Books about Dead Sea Scrolls<br />

Even as two prominent scholars in this field, David Flusser and Jakob<br />

Licht, were of Czech origin, relatively few books have been published<br />

in Czech languages. Now an important book <strong>by</strong> David Flusser<br />

is available.<br />

8.1.0 A book <strong>by</strong> David Flusser in Czech translation.<br />

David Flusser, EsejskÈ dobrodruûstvÌ ñ éidovskÈ spoleËenstvÌ od MrtvÈho<br />

mo¯e. »eho si lze povöimnout u JeûÌöe, Pavla, DidachÈ a Martina<br />

Bubera. Praha: Oik˙menÈ 1999. 200 pp. [Translated from German<br />

<strong>by</strong> Petr Sl·ma.]<br />

The development of this book is explained in <strong>the</strong> introduction<br />

(11ñ13): First part was prepared for Israel broadcast in 1982, <strong>the</strong>n<br />

published in Hebrew in 1985, translated into English in 1989, from it<br />

to German in 1992. German edition, extended <strong>by</strong> three additional<br />

essays appeared in 1994 in Cardun Verlag, Winterthur, Das essenische<br />

122


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Abenteuer. Auff‰ligkeiten bei Jesus, Paulus, Didache und Martin Buber.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> introduction Flusser also appreciates <strong>the</strong> importance of <strong>the</strong><br />

Scrolls and of <strong>the</strong> Essene sect. The foreword (7ñ10) was contributed<br />

<strong>by</strong> Clemens Thoma, Professor in Luzern. He evaluates Flusserís work<br />

on Qumran, especially his interpretation of liturgical esoterics. Even<br />

more important is Flusserís interpretation of <strong>the</strong> New Testament.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> first part <strong>the</strong> Jewish community of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea is<br />

charactericed <strong>by</strong> (14ñ94). Flusser informs about Essenes, who isolated<br />

<strong>the</strong>mselves, and also about Pharisees and Sadducees (14ñ26).<br />

For <strong>the</strong> period from about 100 B. C. E. to <strong>the</strong> war with Romans in <strong>the</strong><br />

second half of <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E., Flusser used Flavius Josephus as<br />

main source (26ñ32). According to Flusser it is possible that Juda <strong>the</strong><br />

Essene, who predicted <strong>the</strong> killing of Antigonos was <strong>the</strong> Teacher of<br />

Righteousness, <strong>the</strong> founder of <strong>the</strong> sect (cf. 28; 31n, 68). The life and<br />

organisation of <strong>the</strong> sect are described (32ñ38). Relations of <strong>the</strong> sect to<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r Israelites are characterised (38ñ50). Essene <strong>the</strong>ological system<br />

(50ñ94) is presented: predestination (50ñ56), antagonism between<br />

spirit and body (56ñ61), history of humanity (61ñ67), apocalyptic<br />

and its literature (67ñ80), hate through love (80ñ87), faith in messiah<br />

(88ñ94).<br />

The second part (95ñ120) is devoted to <strong>the</strong> Doctrine of Twelve<br />

Apostles and to Jesus. The Jewish model for <strong>the</strong> first part of Doctrine<br />

ñ Didache ñ is known from <strong>the</strong> Latin version, Doctrina apostolorum.<br />

Jewish Two Ways are known also from <strong>the</strong> Qumran Rule of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Community (1QS, ÿ·d Jednoty). These texts are compared with<br />

<strong>the</strong> message of Jesus in Mat<strong>the</strong>w 5:17ñ48.<br />

The third part (121ñ152) deals with Essenes and Christianity. In<br />

<strong>the</strong> introduction (121ñ126) Flusser criticised some recent publications.<br />

The Scrolls are useful for <strong>the</strong> study of various trends in Early<br />

Christianity, Jesus and Christology are compared with some features<br />

in <strong>the</strong> Essene texts. Also Qumran and <strong>the</strong> early church are compared<br />

(138ñ152). Qumran Scrolls help to find what is important in ancient<br />

Judaism and Christianity.<br />

The last, fourth part (153ñ192) on two types of faith according to<br />

Buber was published in German as epilogue to Buberís book on this<br />

topic. Only few direct relations to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls are contained<br />

in this part: a reference to <strong>the</strong> Commentary to Habakkuk (164,<br />

123


STANISLAV SEGERT<br />

n. 458); Essene interpretation of Psalm 143:2 in <strong>the</strong> Thanksgiving<br />

Hymns, according to which man can be justified only <strong>by</strong> Godís grace<br />

(166ñ167). Martin Buber distinguished two types of faith, emuna ñ<br />

Jewish, and pistis ñ Christian.<br />

Four parts of <strong>the</strong> book are provided with 529 notes, references to<br />

Bible and literature, and explanations. In <strong>the</strong> bibliography (193ñ199)<br />

36 Flusserís publications are listed. The translator, Petr Sl·ma, added<br />

to some notes references to Czech publications. In his note (199) he<br />

explains that he used Czech ecumenical Bible translation, for Didache<br />

quotations <strong>the</strong> translation <strong>by</strong> Dan Dr·pal (1985; cf. 95, n. 190), for<br />

quotations from <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls <strong>the</strong> translation <strong>by</strong> this reviewer<br />

which is being prepared for publication in Prague.<br />

Even as Flusser grew up, studied and taught in Prague (cf. ìOsmdes·t<br />

let profesora Davida Flusseraî, <strong>the</strong> article to his 80 th birthday,<br />

Religio 5, 1997, 69ñ80), <strong>the</strong> book reviewed here is his first publication<br />

in Czech, which was his main language.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> first part Flusser presents <strong>the</strong> Essene community according<br />

to Scrolls and o<strong>the</strong>r sources. He uses his thorough knowledge of texts<br />

and <strong>the</strong> results of research. He complements <strong>the</strong>m <strong>by</strong> his original<br />

observations. Also <strong>the</strong> relevance of <strong>the</strong> ancient ideas for <strong>the</strong> later<br />

times is stressed; Flusser points to Erasmus, Lu<strong>the</strong>r, and Calvin†(146),<br />

to Tolstoy and Gandhi (80ñ81,87). The ancient texts and ideas are<br />

presented in manner well understandable to <strong>the</strong> broader public. This<br />

approach reminds this reviewer how Flusser taught similar topics of<br />

Jewish history and culture in his weekly course of Modern Hebrew,<br />

held in <strong>the</strong> Oriental Institute in Prague in early 1950s. Flusser was<br />

teaching <strong>the</strong> language during <strong>the</strong> first hour, in <strong>the</strong> second hour he was<br />

acquainting his grateful audience with values of Judaism.<br />

Second and third part of this book introduce <strong>the</strong> readers in <strong>the</strong><br />

research on relations between Judaism and early Christianity, <strong>the</strong> area<br />

in which Flusser is one of <strong>the</strong> leading scholars. He contributes substantially<br />

to better mutual contacts between Jews and Christians. The<br />

fourth part evaluates one work of Martin Buber, <strong>the</strong> great philosopher,<br />

with whom Flusser, a philologist was in close contact (cf. 153).<br />

Both were professors at <strong>the</strong> Hebrew University in Jerusalem. While<br />

this reviewer was Flusserís guest in spring 1964, he was able to visit<br />

Buber, thanks to Flusserís recommendation. He learned how highly<br />

124


ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />

Buber was evaluating Flusserís personality and activity. Czech readers<br />

can have important book <strong>by</strong> Flusser in <strong>the</strong>ir and his language. The<br />

book on Jesus is now being translated into Czech and will appear<br />

soon. It was reviewed already in <strong>the</strong> journal published in Brno (ìDavid<br />

Flusser on <strong>the</strong> Historical Jesusî, Religio 7, 1998, 63ñ72). And<br />

Czech readers will appreciate Czech translations of o<strong>the</strong>r Flusserís<br />

works. A collection of his articles, especially those on contacts between<br />

Judaism and early Christianity, would be most welcome, in<br />

particular now after he passed away in September 2000.<br />

125


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

Pavel Hoöek<br />

The Trinity and <strong>the</strong> Interfaith<br />

S. Mark Heim, The Depth of <strong>the</strong> Riches: A Trinitarian Theology of Religious Ends,<br />

W. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, Grand Rapids, Michigan / Cambridge, U. K.,<br />

2001; Series: Sacra Doctrina: Christian Theology for Postmodern Age, general editor:<br />

A. G. Padgett. Includes bibliography and index, xi + 312 pages, ISBN<br />

0-8028-4758-7.<br />

In his recent book The Depth of <strong>the</strong> Riches: A Trinitarian Theology of<br />

Religious Ends S. Mark Heim proposes a new perspective on interreligious<br />

dialogue. The book is part of <strong>the</strong> series Sacra Doctrina:<br />

Christian Theology for a Postmodern Age. This series is a project of<br />

The Christian Theological Research Fellowship and its goal is to rethink<br />

traditional <strong>the</strong>ological doctrines in <strong>the</strong> light of <strong>the</strong> postmodern<br />

cultural situation.<br />

Given this general goal, Heimës book is in many respects constructive<br />

and innovative. He thinks through new ways of looking at<br />

interreligious dialogue, as this task is pressed upon <strong>the</strong> Christian<br />

church <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> changing cultural situation of <strong>the</strong> Western world.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> first part of his book Heim explains his approach to <strong>the</strong><br />

question of religious pluralism. He reviews <strong>the</strong> three traditional Christian<br />

responses to this question: exclusivism, inclusivism and pluralism.<br />

Heimís summary points out <strong>the</strong> following: Exclusivists hold that<br />

<strong>the</strong>re is only one religious end (Christian salvation) and that only<br />

practising Christians can hope to attain this goal. Inclusivists hold as<br />

well that <strong>the</strong>re is only one religious end, which <strong>the</strong>y also identify with<br />

Christian salvation, but <strong>the</strong>y allow <strong>the</strong> possibility that this end will be<br />

achieved <strong>by</strong> many ìanonymous Christiansî (K. Rahner) among <strong>the</strong><br />

adherents of o<strong>the</strong>r religions. Pluralists hold as well that <strong>the</strong>re is only<br />

one religious end, which must not be identified with any concrete<br />

doctrine of any particular religious tradition, but which will never<strong>the</strong>less<br />

be attained <strong>by</strong> all serious believers, regardless of <strong>the</strong>ir particular<br />

convictions. The universal religious end is beyond description in concepts<br />

and propositions (J. Hick), it is only symbolically and vaguely<br />

expressed in all religious traditions.<br />

Heimís main criticism of <strong>the</strong>se traditional approaches is that <strong>the</strong>y<br />

all build on <strong>the</strong> unproven assumption that <strong>the</strong>re must be only one<br />

126


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

religious end for all people. While exclusivism has nothing to offer to<br />

interreligious dialogue, both inclusivism and pluralism tend to underestimate<br />

<strong>the</strong> concrete particularities of religious traditions. This neglect<br />

of particularities is in sharp contrast with <strong>the</strong> witness of religious<br />

traditions to <strong>the</strong> crucial importance of <strong>the</strong>se particularities. For<br />

both inclusivists and pluralists, believers will be ìsavedî (i.e. will<br />

attain <strong>the</strong> only existing religious end) not because, but in spite of <strong>the</strong><br />

concrete shape of <strong>the</strong>ir religious heritage. Heim disagrees with Gandhiís<br />

claim that all religions lead to <strong>the</strong> same goal and are essentially<br />

<strong>the</strong> same in spite of <strong>the</strong>ir apparent differences. In Heimís view <strong>the</strong><br />

concrete practices, rituals, habits, <strong>the</strong> whole lifestyle shaped <strong>by</strong> particular<br />

traditions are essentially important exactly in <strong>the</strong>ir being different<br />

from any o<strong>the</strong>r way of life. They make people who <strong>the</strong>y are<br />

and <strong>the</strong>y shape <strong>the</strong> particular religious end towards which believers<br />

direct <strong>the</strong>ir existence. He points to <strong>the</strong> fact that <strong>the</strong> expectations of<br />

different religions in terms of afterlife are unexchangeable and irreducibly<br />

different. The diversity of <strong>the</strong> ends of particular religions<br />

corresponds to <strong>the</strong> obvious diversity of particular lifestyles and mindsets<br />

which <strong>the</strong>se religions produce in <strong>the</strong>ir adherents. Nirvana is<br />

a paradigmaticly different religious end from <strong>the</strong> Christian eschatological<br />

vision, which again is totally different from <strong>the</strong> humble religious<br />

end of Taoism, etc. What solution to this problem does Heim<br />

offer?<br />

Heim agrees with Hickís view that whatever <strong>the</strong> true nature of<br />

Ultimate reality may be, <strong>the</strong> way it is perceived <strong>by</strong> any human person<br />

will be strongly marked <strong>by</strong> his or her cultural and religious background<br />

and training. Whatever <strong>the</strong> actual ultimate destiny of a believer,<br />

his or her perception of it will be codetermined <strong>by</strong> religious<br />

expectations of <strong>the</strong> particular tradition. These expectations (religious<br />

ends) will be <strong>the</strong>refore at least partially fulfilled and confirmed <strong>by</strong> his<br />

or her actual post mortem condition and experience. This would seem<br />

to imply that Heimís view is simply relativistic. That conclusion appears<br />

to be confirmed <strong>by</strong> Heimís <strong>the</strong>sis that every <strong>the</strong>ory of interreligious<br />

relations must be designed from within oneís particular tradition,<br />

which must provide <strong>the</strong> conceptual framework. There is no<br />

meta<strong>the</strong>ory, free of presuppositions and a priori commitments. Therefore<br />

Heim as a Christian offers a Christian solution, but this solution,<br />

127


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

he claims, can be easily appropriated <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> representatives of o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

religions.<br />

On <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r hand, Heim denies that his stance is relativistic. To<br />

<strong>the</strong> question how can anyone decide which religion (which religious<br />

end) to choose, Heim responds that <strong>the</strong>re is one relative criterion on<br />

which to base such a choice, namely <strong>the</strong> explaining power of each<br />

proposed <strong>the</strong>ory of religion and interreligious relations. In o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

words, we need to ask which religion is able to explain itself and all<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r religions in <strong>the</strong> most comprehensive and satisfactory way. In<br />

Heimís view, this is Christianity. He holds that <strong>the</strong> best explanation of<br />

<strong>the</strong> diversity of religions with <strong>the</strong>ir differing religious ends, which<br />

respects <strong>the</strong>ir particularities, but still offers a unified interpretive<br />

framework is <strong>the</strong> Christian doctrine of <strong>the</strong> Trinity. This suggestion is<br />

open to public debate and <strong>the</strong>refore not relativistic.<br />

In Heimís view, any <strong>the</strong>ory that wants to be a candidate for <strong>the</strong><br />

most comprehensive and satisfactory <strong>the</strong>ory of religion and of interreligious<br />

relations must fit <strong>the</strong> following criteria: besides providing<br />

a unified interpretive framework for all religions, it must 1) see <strong>the</strong><br />

value of religious particularity, 2) acknowledge <strong>the</strong> distinctive truth<br />

of o<strong>the</strong>r religions, 3) at <strong>the</strong> same time see <strong>the</strong> legitimacy of each<br />

religionís witness to its own ìone and onlyî aspect. Heim believes<br />

<strong>the</strong> best candidate is <strong>the</strong> Christian trinitarian conceptual structure. He<br />

agrees with R. Panikkar that Trinity is <strong>the</strong> key to understand <strong>the</strong> plurality<br />

of world religions. The distinct religious ends of different religions<br />

are related to <strong>the</strong> distinct dimensions of <strong>the</strong> trinitarian divine<br />

life.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> second part of <strong>the</strong> book <strong>the</strong> author reviews <strong>the</strong> biblical and<br />

<strong>the</strong>ological tradition of <strong>the</strong> Christian church to show parallels and<br />

anticipations of his view of religious plurality. He points to <strong>the</strong> universalistic<br />

elements of <strong>the</strong> Scripture (<strong>the</strong> covenant with Noah, ìpagan<br />

saintsî such as Jethro, Ruth, Job etc., <strong>the</strong> Johannine notion of Logos,<br />

<strong>the</strong> Pauline notion of <strong>the</strong> law written on peopleís hearts etc.) He<br />

reviews <strong>the</strong> universalistic elements in Justin Martyr, Origen and o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

Fa<strong>the</strong>rs. He documents how very soon in <strong>the</strong> history of <strong>the</strong> church <strong>the</strong><br />

eternal destiny of human beings was seen in a more and more differentiated<br />

way: <strong>the</strong> Fa<strong>the</strong>rs speak (alongside heaven and hell) of purgatory,<br />

which for some of <strong>the</strong>m is a permanent destiny. Augustine speaks<br />

128


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

about limbo for children and ano<strong>the</strong>r limbo for Old Testament saints<br />

(<strong>the</strong> bosom of Abraham) ñ <strong>the</strong>se are already four distinct destinations,<br />

some of <strong>the</strong>m temporary, some eternal. Thomas Aquinas speaks<br />

of five destinations: heaven, hell, purgatory, limbo for Old Testament<br />

saints and limbo for children. He also distinguishes different dimensions<br />

of hell and different levels of heaven.<br />

Heim offers one whole chapter of analysis of Danteís Divine Comedy.<br />

For Dante, everything in <strong>the</strong> afterlife moves <strong>by</strong> attraction, affinity<br />

and desire, nothing <strong>by</strong> force. Everybody ìends upî where he or<br />

she wants. Punishment is <strong>the</strong> sin itself, hell is ra<strong>the</strong>r privative than<br />

punitive. The eschatological destiny of every human being is actually<br />

<strong>the</strong> expression of his or her deepest desire, which God respects, honours<br />

and rewards. Therefore, for many, limbo is an eternal destiny,<br />

<strong>the</strong>y want to stay <strong>the</strong>re forever. There is some relation to God at every<br />

level. Later in <strong>the</strong> book Heim says that his view of religious ends is<br />

a modified version of Danteís eschatological vision in Divine Comedy.<br />

At <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> third part of <strong>the</strong> book Heim summarizes<br />

what he has said so far: different religions produce and shape different<br />

expectations and mindsets. By a series of religious choices people<br />

in each tradition become who <strong>the</strong>y are. They shape <strong>the</strong>ir lives in<br />

accordance and conformity with <strong>the</strong> religious end <strong>the</strong>y strive to<br />

achieve. Heim holds that <strong>the</strong>se different ends are not just human projections,<br />

but existing options of eternal destinations. These religious<br />

ends will <strong>the</strong>refore eventually become reality. God will honour each<br />

religionís expectations, just as in Danteís vision. How can that happen?<br />

As suggested above, Heim sees <strong>the</strong> answer in <strong>the</strong> Christian doctrine<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Trinity. The Trinity in Heimís view provides a unified<br />

map for diverse religious experiences. Different religions emphasize<br />

different aspects of <strong>the</strong> human relation to Ultimate Reality: some<br />

emphasise <strong>the</strong> deity above us, some <strong>the</strong> deity among us, some <strong>the</strong><br />

deity within us, in o<strong>the</strong>r words, each relates to a different aspect of<br />

<strong>the</strong> trinitarian life. Using <strong>the</strong> conceptual categories of R. Panikkar,<br />

N. Smart and S. Konstantine, Heim shows how <strong>the</strong> ìtrinitarian grammarî<br />

provides <strong>the</strong> best paradigm for interreligious relations: <strong>the</strong> doctrine<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Trinity with its transcendent as well as immanent dimen-<br />

129


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

sions, with is personalistic as well as impersonal elements serves as<br />

an all-inclusive map for religious diversity. There are religions of<br />

apophatism, o<strong>the</strong>r religions of personalism and still o<strong>the</strong>rs of divine<br />

immanence. All <strong>the</strong>se differences can be viewed, Heim says, as differing<br />

types of relating to <strong>the</strong> complex trinitarian divine being, to <strong>the</strong><br />

inner relational dynamics of Fa<strong>the</strong>r, Son and Holy Spirit. For Heim<br />

<strong>the</strong> trinitarian grammar is <strong>the</strong> best conceptual framework which Christian<br />

<strong>the</strong>ology can offer as a basis for <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ory and practice of<br />

interreligious dialogue.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> last part of his book, Heim offers an eschatological vision<br />

derived from his trinitarian <strong>the</strong>ology of diverse religious ends. He<br />

argues for <strong>the</strong> view, presented in <strong>the</strong> main body of his book, that<br />

human beings are essentially free to choose and codetermine <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

eternal destiny or, from <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological perspective, that <strong>the</strong> existence<br />

of diverse world religions with <strong>the</strong>ir diverse religious ends is due to<br />

Godís providential activity towards humankind. Heimís main emphasis<br />

in <strong>the</strong> last part of <strong>the</strong> book is what he calls <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological<br />

principle of plenitude. According to this principle, God aims at <strong>the</strong><br />

multiplication of all possible kinds of good. His goal is <strong>the</strong> largest<br />

possible diversity and communion in difference ñ it actually reflects<br />

Godís own trinitarian life. Heim refers in this context to A. Lovejoyís<br />

famous book The Great Chain of Being, which focuses on <strong>the</strong> history<br />

of <strong>the</strong> idea that God leaves no genuine possibility of being unrealised.<br />

This idea is ano<strong>the</strong>r expression of <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological principle of plenitude.<br />

In Heimís understanding, this principle 1) is a qualitative description<br />

of <strong>the</strong> divine life as triune, 2) is expressed economically in<br />

what God has made, 3) is reflected in <strong>the</strong> nature of salvation too, and<br />

most importantly 4) demands a variety of religious ends (besides<br />

Christian salvation). Heim believes that God allows <strong>the</strong> creature to<br />

determine its eternal destiny; in <strong>the</strong> richness of <strong>the</strong> trinitarian life,<br />

<strong>the</strong>re is space for pan<strong>the</strong>istic, as well as poly- and mono<strong>the</strong>istic relations<br />

to <strong>the</strong> deity, just as for both personal and impersonal views of<br />

Ultimate Reality (Heim refers in this context to P. Tillichís view of<br />

God as <strong>the</strong> Ground and A<strong>by</strong>ss of being).<br />

What I appreciate about Heimís book is his courage in breaking<br />

new ground in <strong>the</strong>ological speculation, in response to <strong>the</strong> contemporary<br />

cultural situation. His research is well supported <strong>by</strong> references to<br />

130


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

both classical and contemporary scholarship. He shows wide knowledge<br />

in <strong>the</strong> fields of systematic <strong>the</strong>ology and religious science and<br />

a developed skill of integrating <strong>the</strong> data of <strong>the</strong>se two fields of knowledge.<br />

He also fruitfully employs his rich experience of working for<br />

<strong>the</strong> Interfaith Working Group of <strong>the</strong> Faith and Order Commission of<br />

<strong>the</strong> National Council of Churches in <strong>the</strong> U. S. A as well as more than<br />

two decades of lecturing and publishing about world religions from<br />

a <strong>the</strong>ological perspective.<br />

My main objection to his <strong>the</strong>ological proposal (besides <strong>the</strong> highly<br />

speculative character of his eschatological vision, which he himself<br />

acknowledges) is that it ends up being very close to <strong>the</strong> classical<br />

inclusivist Christian <strong>the</strong>ory, which he strongly criticizes. Heimís view<br />

can certainly be attacked for <strong>the</strong> same reasons: a paternalistic attitude<br />

towards non-Christian religions as being only ìsecond bestî and as<br />

being implicitly (and unwillingly) related to <strong>the</strong> Christian religious<br />

Absolute. Heimís vision is not too far from Rahnerís concept of<br />

anonymous Christianity (or, let us say, Justin Martyrís view of logos<br />

spermatikos, in which pagans can participate, or Origenís universalistic<br />

vision of apokatastasis panthon). Heimís claim that his <strong>the</strong>ory<br />

can easily be appropriated <strong>by</strong> proponents of o<strong>the</strong>r religions simply <strong>by</strong><br />

exchanging trinitarian terminology for <strong>the</strong>ir own all-inclusive framework<br />

may prove true in <strong>the</strong> actual interreligious dialogue, but it<br />

doesnít seem to move beyond <strong>the</strong> classical inclusivist <strong>the</strong>ories. The<br />

innovative element is that Heimís version of inclusivism doesnít force<br />

<strong>the</strong> Christian view of eternal bliss on those who are not interested in<br />

it ñ Buddhists striving for Nirvana for example. They, just as everybody<br />

else, will be ìsavedî <strong>the</strong>ir own way. The traditional Christian<br />

view, which is perceived as arrogant <strong>by</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r faiths, namely that<br />

non-Christian religions may have some elements of truth in <strong>the</strong>m, but<br />

<strong>the</strong> clearest and fullest revelation of truth is found only in Christianity,<br />

is obviously present in Heimís <strong>the</strong>ory as well, perhaps because it<br />

cannot be removed as long as <strong>the</strong> thinker wants to remain a faithful<br />

Christian. Unfortunately, it has far-reaching and devastating effects<br />

on interreligious dialogue. This is an obstacle which Heimís proposal<br />

doesnít manage to overcome.<br />

To summarise, Heimís new book is an inspiring contribution to <strong>the</strong><br />

rapidly developing tradition of Christian <strong>the</strong>ological reflection on<br />

131


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r religions and Christianityís relation to <strong>the</strong>m. All <strong>the</strong>ologians<br />

involved in interreligious dialogue will benefit from this book.<br />

Filip »apek<br />

The Old Testament as Inspiration in Culture, International Academic<br />

Symposium, Prague, September 1995, Heller, J., Talmon,<br />

S., Hlav·Ëkov·, H., (eds.), Prudk˝, M. (executive ed.),<br />

Ml˝n: T¯ebenice 2001, 205 pp. + 16pp. supplement, ISBN 80-902296-8-9.<br />

This volume of essays of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament (i.e. of <strong>the</strong> Hebrew Bible<br />

or Tanakh) and its reception in art consists of six chapters. The introduction<br />

(pp. 9ñ22) follows <strong>the</strong> impact of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament on culture<br />

in general. Central to this introduction is <strong>the</strong> work of Israeli<br />

scholar Shemaryahu Talmon, The Hebrew Bible as Inspiration in Culture,<br />

which is preceded <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> editor's preface and a short address<br />

delivered <strong>by</strong> Moshe Yegar, <strong>the</strong> Israeli ambassador in Prague.<br />

The second part of <strong>the</strong> volume, entitled Studies in Theology and<br />

Philosophy (pp. 23ñ62) presents <strong>the</strong> exegetical study Inspiration and<br />

Communication According to Gen. 2,7 (in German) <strong>by</strong> Czech biblical<br />

scholar Jan Heller. Following this is an analysis of a painting <strong>by</strong><br />

Willemd Drost depicting <strong>the</strong> dialogue of Naomi and Ruth just after<br />

<strong>the</strong> departing of Oprah. This painting, as <strong>the</strong> author Dutch professor<br />

of biblical studies Karel Deurloo argues in his analysis, does not<br />

only aspire to be an illustration of <strong>the</strong> scriptural narrative, but as<br />

well, an artistic rendering of <strong>the</strong> message of <strong>the</strong> Book of Ruth. The<br />

third contribution to this section, <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Czech scholar Martin Prudk˝,<br />

examines <strong>the</strong> Second Commandment of <strong>the</strong> Decalogue lingustically<br />

and <strong>the</strong>ologically. An interesting study on <strong>the</strong> function of art in <strong>the</strong><br />

Old Testament <strong>by</strong> Czech professor of religion Milan Balab·n bears a<br />

title Achetypology of <strong>the</strong> Israeli Art of Painting (and Building) in<br />

Tanakh (in German) and concludes this section of <strong>the</strong> volume.<br />

A brief third chapter titled Studies in Czech and Slovak Bible<br />

Translation (pp. 63ñ71) consists of a study <strong>by</strong> Czech scholar Stanislav<br />

132


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

Segert, a long time resident of <strong>the</strong> USA. Entitled Old Testament Poetry:<br />

Czech and Slovak Translations and Transformations, it discusses<br />

<strong>the</strong> motives of <strong>the</strong> Songs of Songs and of <strong>the</strong> Psalms which have been<br />

creatively transformed and translated into Czech and Slovak poetry<br />

and music.<br />

The most extensive chapter, called Studies in Bible and Visual Arts<br />

(pp. 72ñ139), includes S. Talmonís amply illustrated study A Unique<br />

Depiction of a Scene From <strong>the</strong> Book of Jonah in a 13th Century<br />

Illuminated Hebrew Manuscript, showing <strong>the</strong> openness of Medieval<br />

Jewish illuminative art to <strong>the</strong> motives of classic Greek mythology and<br />

<strong>the</strong> Christian milieu. Next is <strong>the</strong> essay The Gothic Mural Painting of<br />

<strong>the</strong> Stations of <strong>the</strong> Cross in <strong>the</strong> Monastery of Emauzy (in German)<br />

which traces <strong>the</strong> influence of <strong>the</strong> central images of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament<br />

on <strong>the</strong> Christian art found at Emauzy. The author, Zuzana VöeteËkov·,<br />

is a member of <strong>the</strong> Czech Academy of Sciences. A similarly oriented<br />

contribution that might be considered is <strong>the</strong> study The Tower of Babel<br />

in <strong>the</strong> Bedford Books of Hours <strong>by</strong> Israeli scholar Mira Friedman,<br />

which investigates <strong>the</strong> influence of Jewish Midrashic legends on<br />

Gen. 11 in Christian art. Katrin Kogman-Appel takes ano<strong>the</strong>r direction<br />

in her stimulating exposition titled The Iconography of <strong>the</strong> Biblical<br />

Cycle of <strong>the</strong> Second Nuremberg and <strong>the</strong> Yahudah Haggadot: Tradition<br />

and Innovation. This detailed study analyses two Haggadots,<br />

challenging <strong>the</strong> prevailing method of interpretation of <strong>the</strong> iconography<br />

of biblical manuscripts. This method, orignating with Kurt<br />

Weitzman, emphasizes <strong>the</strong> necessity of certain model of an artistic<br />

prototype as a starting point and key for <strong>the</strong> study of o<strong>the</strong>r traditions<br />

which use this model as <strong>the</strong> given and essential pattern. Kogman-<br />

Appel opposes this interpretation, arguing that of <strong>the</strong> two Haggadots<br />

studied, nei<strong>the</strong>r belonged to any of <strong>the</strong> iconographical traditions, nor<br />

were directly connected with <strong>the</strong>m. On <strong>the</strong> contrary, <strong>the</strong>se Haggadot<br />

provide us with an excellent example of <strong>the</strong> peculiar and innovative<br />

way of <strong>the</strong> illustration of <strong>the</strong> Jewish manuscripts. The author concludes<br />

her argument with this statement:<br />

The Jewish artist of <strong>the</strong> Second Nuremberg and Yahudah<br />

Haggadot, far from being merely a talented copyist, was a highly<br />

original, creative and innovative illustrator, well aquainted with recent<br />

artistic trends of <strong>the</strong> developing graphic arts, thoroughly familiar<br />

133


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

with <strong>the</strong> Rabbinic tradition and deeply concerned to emphasize to<br />

Jewish character of his work. He did not depend upon a single source,<br />

but was inspired <strong>by</strong> a variety of models, elements of which he combined<br />

freely with his own unique creations (pp. 130 ñ131).<br />

The last contribution to <strong>the</strong> chapter is entitled Old Testament<br />

Scenes in <strong>the</strong> Bible of King Wenceslas IV, written <strong>by</strong> Hana Hlav·Ëkov·,<br />

member of The Academy of Science.<br />

The fifth chapter of <strong>the</strong> volume, titled Studies in Bible and Music,<br />

(pp. 140ñ182) begins with a remarkable study <strong>by</strong> Frantiöek J. Hole-<br />

Ëek O. M. titled The Books of Maccabees as an Inspiration of <strong>the</strong><br />

Hussite Choral Who Are <strong>the</strong> Gods Fighters.The author of <strong>the</strong> study<br />

discusses <strong>the</strong> choral line <strong>by</strong> line, referencing <strong>the</strong> stance of <strong>the</strong> Czech<br />

reformer Jan Hus toward The Book of Maccabees. HoleËeks frequent<br />

quotations from various historical documents aid readers in grasping<br />

<strong>the</strong> intensive dependence of Hus and <strong>the</strong> Hussites on d<strong>the</strong>se apocryphal<br />

booksd. The second contribution to this chapter is titled Violent<br />

Embraces: Monastic Representations of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament, written<br />

<strong>by</strong> M. Burcht Pranger from <strong>the</strong> University of Amsterdam, who points<br />

to a non-referentiality which ìunderlies whatever meaning of whatever<br />

imageî (p. 172). Pranger, interpreting especially <strong>the</strong> paintings<br />

The Stations of <strong>the</strong> Cross created <strong>by</strong> Barnett Newman, argues that<br />

each image provides <strong>the</strong> observer with new, unexpected and dramatic<br />

encounters.<br />

The sixth chapter, titled Studies in Bible and Literature,<br />

(pp. 183ñ200) is a contribution provided <strong>by</strong> Stefan Schreiner from<br />

<strong>the</strong> Institutum Judaicum, T¸bingen. Entitled The Bible In Narratives<br />

of Bruno Schulz, (in German) it examines <strong>the</strong> enigmatic work of <strong>the</strong><br />

writer, painter and visionary Bruno Schulz, exploring why and to<br />

what degree this assimilated Polish Jew was inspired <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Old<br />

Testament.<br />

Surely it is intentional that <strong>the</strong> pivotal <strong>the</strong>me of <strong>the</strong> work appears<br />

to be <strong>the</strong> Second Commandment of <strong>the</strong> Decalogue. This is manifested<br />

<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> different perspectives presented according to <strong>the</strong> specialization<br />

of <strong>the</strong> individual scholars who contributed to <strong>the</strong> volume.<br />

The prohibition of making images has profound <strong>the</strong>ological implications.<br />

On <strong>the</strong> one hand, it constitutes <strong>the</strong> ideological peculiarity of <strong>the</strong><br />

Old Testament, on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r it distinctly influenced <strong>the</strong> later Jews and<br />

134


BOOK REVIEWS<br />

Christians of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament on art. Therefore <strong>the</strong> prohibition, as<br />

quoted <strong>by</strong> S. Talmon, who states that ì<strong>the</strong> biblical authors paint in<br />

wordsî, thus making up for <strong>the</strong> absence of <strong>the</strong> medium of painting,<br />

which in ancient Israel was proscribed <strong>by</strong> law, with narration. (p. 21).<br />

The emphasis on an aniconic approach to God is also, according to<br />

M. Prudk˝ís contextual linguistic and <strong>the</strong>ological analysis, <strong>the</strong> main<br />

message of <strong>the</strong> Second commandment; he opposes <strong>the</strong> idea <strong>the</strong> prohibition<br />

on picturing would refer to o<strong>the</strong>r gods only. Moreover, <strong>the</strong><br />

prohibition of making images is not a result of a sceptical attitude<br />

toward art. Substantiation of this prohibition is, according to Prudk˝,<br />

not ìderived from <strong>the</strong> philosophic recognition of <strong>the</strong> inappropriateness<br />

of <strong>the</strong> analogy of <strong>the</strong> image, nor from any sceptical or negative<br />

attitude to art in general, but from <strong>the</strong> basic <strong>the</strong>ological postulates of<br />

<strong>the</strong> faith of Israel: any kind of image would be a threat to <strong>the</strong> freedom<br />

of YHWH, which he preserves in sovereign fashion even with regard<br />

to <strong>the</strong> worship of his own peopleî (p. 47). Consequently, he believes<br />

<strong>the</strong> Second Command applies not only to <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r gods, but also to<br />

<strong>the</strong> God of Israel. A similar point of view is expressed <strong>by</strong> M. Balab·n,<br />

ergo: <strong>the</strong> ability to make images contains a threat that <strong>the</strong> image<br />

might gain dominance over <strong>the</strong> subject it delineates (see p. 54). Analogously,<br />

M. Friedman documents that <strong>the</strong> capability of <strong>the</strong> Jewish artists<br />

not to portray God anthropomorphically also finds acceptance<br />

here and <strong>the</strong>re in Christian art (cf. p. 115f).<br />

The Old Testament as Inspiration in Culture a is well-balanced<br />

publication, recommended to all who are interested in <strong>the</strong> Old Testament<br />

and its impact on past and present culture. All unpublished<br />

essays presented during <strong>the</strong> symposium are briefly mentioned in <strong>the</strong><br />

summary at <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> volume, which has been composed <strong>by</strong><br />

professor Jan Heller (pp. 201ñ203).<br />

135


ADDRESSES OF THE CONTRIBUTORS TO THIS ISSUE<br />

Jind¯ich Halama, e-mail: halama@etf.cuni.cz;<br />

Karlova Universita v†Praze,<br />

Evangelick· teologick· fakulta,<br />

»ern· 9, CZ 115 55 Praha 1<br />

Jacob Nesuner,<br />

e-mail: neusner@webjogger.net<br />

Bard College, Annandale-on-Hudson, New York<br />

12504, USA<br />

Martin Rothkegel, e-mail: rothkegel@centrum.cz<br />

Jugosl·vsk˝ch partyz·n˘ 31, CZ 160 00 Praha 6<br />

Gerhard Sauter,<br />

Stanislav Segert,<br />

Filip »apek,<br />

Pavel Hoöek,<br />

e-mail: ute600@snphilos1.philos.uni-bonn.de<br />

Rheinische Friedrich- Wilhelms-Universit‰t<br />

Bonn<br />

Evangelisch-Theologische Fakult‰t,<br />

÷kumenisches Institut<br />

Am Hof 1, D53113 Bonn<br />

e-mail: segert@beachnet.com<br />

University of California, Los Angeles<br />

Near Eastern Languages and Cultures<br />

376 Kinsey Hall, Box 951511, LA, California<br />

90095-1511, USA<br />

e-mail: filipcapek@yahoo.com<br />

Masarykovo n·m.19,<br />

CZ 503 46 T¯ebechovice pod Orebem<br />

e-mail: hosek@etspraha.cz<br />

ETS, StoliÚsk· 2417/41a, CZ 193 00 Praha 9<br />

The authors of <strong>the</strong> articles herein published are responsible for <strong>the</strong>ir contents,<br />

and while <strong>the</strong> editors have presented <strong>the</strong>ir ideas for discussion, <strong>the</strong>y need not<br />

agree with <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

Communio viatorum is indexed in <strong>the</strong> ATLA Religion Database , published <strong>by</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> American Theological Library Association, 250 S. Wacker Dr., 16 th Flr.,<br />

Chicago, IL 60606, E-mail: atla@atla.com, WWW: http://www.atla.com.<br />

140

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!